HMIIMHHMHMMMMMI
GIFT OF
BENJ HEELER
MACMILLAN'S LATIN COURSE
THIRD PART
MACMILLAN'S
LATIN COUKSE
THIED PART
EASY EXERCISES IN CONTINUOUS PROSE
BY
W. E. P. PANTIN, M.A.
ASSISTANT MASTER AT ST. PAUL'S SCHOOL
MACMILLAN AND CO., LIMITED
NEW YORK : THE MACMILLAN COMPANY
1903
All rights reserved
<f
First Edition 1901
Reprinted 1903
PKEFACE
BEFORE using this book the student should at least
have had some practice in putting into Latin easy
sentences illustrating the use of the accusative and
infinitive, gerund and gerundive, ut and ne, cum, si,
etc. Some of these subjects are treated afresh, but
the sentences will be found too hard for the beginner,
at any rate for the young beginner.
An acquaintance with the earlier volumes of this
Course is not necessary.
My object has been to produce a set of easy
exercises in continuous prose, to give practice in those
words, constructions and idioms, which occur on every
page of Cicero and Caesar, and so to enable the student
to read these authors with some ease.
When I had finished my continuous pieces, I found
that there were certain difficulties which recurred in
most of them. The principal difficulties were con-
nected with the use of the participles, of the infinitive
and subjunctive in Oratio obliqua, of some of the
pronouns, of the gerund and gerundive, of the tenses
44546$
vi LATIN COURSE
in subordinate clauses, of si, cum, and a few other
conjunctions. Most of these subjects had been treated
in a very elementary way in Part II. of this Course,
but the student had not been carried far enough to
enable him to deal with the continuous exercises. I
therefore wrote some thirty exercises of detached
sentences, which are intended to lead up to the con-
tinuous exercises. These earlier exercises are more
difficult, and at the same time, I hope, more interesting,
than exercises of detached sentences generally are. I
venture to suggest that it may be worth while to take
a pupil through them two or three times, so that he
may become quite familiar with the rules and able to
apply them without any considerable effort.
I hope that the book may prove useful not only
for younger boys, but also for those elder boys and
girls who begin Latin rather late and cannot give
much time to the study of the language. For them
the important thing is that they should acquire as
rapidly as possible the power to read ordinary Latin
prose without great difficulty. I think that something
may be done to help them by excluding everything
that is not quite common, and by giving plenty of
practice in dealing with all those difficulties which are
of frequent occurrence. It is waste of time to give
them an exercise on Made virtute, for example, or the
use of the infinitive in rhetorical questions in Oratio
obliqua, for they will very likely never come across
PREFACE vn
an instance of either. What they need is such
familiarity with common constructions as will make
a sentence like the following easy and pleasant to
read : Cuius sermone ita turn cupide fruebar, quasi
iam divinarem, id quod evenit, illo exstincto fore, unde
discerem, neminem.
I owe a great deal to the Latin Grammar of
Gildersleeve and Lodge. For explaining grammatical
subtleties in clear and forcible language this book is,
it seems to me, unrivalled. I have found the numerous
examples in Driiger, and in Kiihner, useful. I have
also used constantly Merguet's Lexicons, (1) to the
Speeches, and (2) to the Philosophical Writings, of
Cicero.
I should like to express my gratitude to my
colleague, Mr. A. M. Cook, who has kindly looked
through my work from time to time and helped me
by his encouragement and advice.
CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
1 30. Miscellaneous ...... 1
31-32. The connecting relative . • . .22
33-35. se and eum ...... 24
EXERCISE 1 . . . . . .27
36-51. Pronouns and the adverbs connected with them . 29
(Qui, quis, cur, quando, etc., 36-40: quisqua-m
and ullus, 41 ; quivis, 42 ; aliquis, quidam,
quondam, 43, 44 ; quisquis, quicumque, 45 ;
quisque, 46 ; ipse, 47 ; idem, 48)
EXERCISE 2 . . . . . .38
52-58. The tenses . . . . .41
(The tenses classified, 52 ; general rule for tenses
in subordinate sentences, 53 : general rule
applied to iterative sentences, 54 ; general
rule applied to conditional sentences with the
indicative, 55 ; general rule applied to cum
sentences with the indicative, 56 ; iam diu
with the present, 58)
EXERCISE 3 . . . . . .49
59-64. Temporal sentences (ubi, simul ac, postquam, prius-
quam, dum) . . . . .51
EXERCISE 4 . . . . . .55
65-72. The conjunction cum ..... 57
EXERCISE 5 . . . . .62
73-79. The participles (examples in 77) . . 65
EXERCISES 6-8 . .73
x LATIN COURSE
SECTION PAGE
80-82. The infinitive, gerund, and gerundive. (The English
verbal substantive in -ing : ars scribendi, the art
of writing) . . . . .79
EXERCISE 9 . . . . . .83
83-89. The gerund and gerundive used as predicates (scri-
bendum est, I must write) . . . .85
EXERCISES 10, 11 . . ,90
90-95. The infinitive as subject (Predicative genitive) . 94
EXERCISE 12 . . . . . .98
96-99. The infinitive as subject (Impersonal verbs : decet,
oportet, interest, etc.) . . . .100
EXERCISE 13 . . . . . .103
100. The infinitive as subject (Impersonal verbs with
dative : licet, etc.) . . . .105
EXERCISE 14 . . . . . . 107
101-02. The infinitive as object . . . .109
103. Verbs with which the nominative and infinitive may
be used (nolo ire solus] . . . .110
104. lubeo, veto, etc. . . . . .111
105. Some verbs which admit of various constructions
(scio, volo, timeo, dubito, constituo, disco] . 112
EXERCISE 15 . . . . . .115
106-13. The infinitive with verbs of saying arid thinking . 117
114. The future infinitive active and passive . , 122
EXERCISE 16 . . . . . . 124
115-19. Conditional sentences . . . .127
EXERCISE 17 .... .130
120-23. The potential subjunctive (scire velim) . 132
EXERCISE 18 ... .135
124-25. Commands and prohibitions . . ,137
126-28. Exhortations (eamus, let us go) . 139
129-30. Wishes (Utinam veniat] .... 140
EXERCISE 19 . .... 142
131-52. Oratio obliqua . . . .144
EXERCISES 20-26 157
CONTENTS
SECTION
153-58.
The subjunctive in relative clauses (Nihil est cur
doleas, Dignus est quern imiteris, etc. )
EXERCISE 27 .
159-62. Causal sentences — Quod meaning "as to the fact
that" ......
EXERCISE 28 .
163-67. The Calendar . .
EXERCISE 29 .
168. Hints on the connection of sentences .
EXERCISES IN CONTINUOUS PROSE ....
ENGLISH-LATIN DICTIONARY .....
IRREGULAR VERBS
NUMERALS . .....
XI
PAGE
171
174
176
179
181
184
185
186
277
304
308
TO THE STUDENT
FIRST look through Sections 1-30. Sections 1-13 contain information
on some elementary matters, with which you will be more or less
familiar. Sections 14-30 contain short notes on some of the subjects
which are treated more fully later on in the book. These short notes
will help you to find your way about the book. You will also find the
Table of Contents useful.
Then read carefully Sections 31-35, study the examples with a view
to imitating them, and begin Exercise 1. The dictionary at the end
of the book contains all the words which are really necessary. Try to
think of the words for yourself: do not become dependent on the
dictionary, or you will be helpless without it. A good deal is left to
your intelligence, especially in the later exercises. For example, if
you look up ' peril ' you will not find it, but if you think what it means,
the words ' danger ' and ' periculum ' will occur to you. If you do not
find ' accompanied by, ' you may supply its place by using the pre-
position cum ; and so on.
Do not be satisfied when you have found out the correct words and
given them correct terminations. Consider whether the sentence
sounds like a Latin sentence, and go through it again and again till
you are satisfied that it does. The words may be right and the sen-
tence intelligible, and yet it may be a sentence which no Latin writer
could have written. Study the order of words, the connection of
sentences, etc., in the examples and in your reading.
After the dictionary you will find a list of irregular verbs, and the
numerals. Read the note on p. 276 on the marking of the quantities
in the dictionary.
The reference is always by sections (unless otherwise stated) : for
instance, ' see 77 ' means see section 77, which is on p. 68.
1. WHEN ? WITHIN WHAT TIME ? FOR HOW LONG ?
(a) The ablative answers the questions When ? On
what day ? At what hour ? In what year or month ?
Eodem die, The same day.
superioribus diebus, in earlier days.
quarta hora, at the fourth hour.
illo anno, in that year.
hac ipsa nocte, this very night.
(b) The ablative answers the question Within what
time?
Faucis diebus aderit, He will be here in a few
days.
Quattuor diebus capietur, It will be taken within
four days.
(c) The accusative answers the question For how
long?
Duo ami os in carcere erat, He was two years in
prison.
^ TIN COURSE
2. WHERE FROM ? WHERE TO ? WHERE ?
Use a preposition with all common nouns and with
the names of countries :
ab urbe venio — in agros ibo — in templo est;
e Gallia venio — in Italiam ibo — in Britannia est.
Use no preposition with the name of a town or
small island :
Eoma venio — Eomam ibo — Eomae est;
Bhodo (from Rhodes) — Khodum (to Rhodes)—
Ehodi (at Rhodes).
The town at which is put in the ablative unless it
is a singular word of the first or second declension,
when it is put in the genitive : Corinthi, Athenis,
Carthagine.
Use no preposition with domus and rus.
The name of a town is often used in apposition to
urbs or oppidum :
Ab urbe Eoma, from the city of Rome — in oppidum
Puteolos, to the town Puteoli — in urbe Eoma,
in the city 'of Rome.
The Latin idiom differs from the English in such
sentences as the following :
He came to me in the city, Ad me in urbeni (into
the city) venit.
He came to me at Rome, Ad me Eomam venit.
Use quo for 'where ?' eo for 'there/ hue for 'here/ if
motion to the place is meant :
Quo vadis ? Where are you going ?
Eo rediit, He returned there.
Hue veni, Come here.
MISCELLANEOUS
3. INTRANSITIVE VERBS HAVE IMPERSONAL PASSIVE
A verb is used transitively when it governs an
accusative of the direct object : vinco hostem, I conquer
iny enemy.
A verb is used intransitively when the action does
not go beyond the subject : dormio, I sleep.
A verb used transitively in the active voice has a
personal passive ; the object of the active verb is the
subject of the passive : (a) active, vinco hostem : (b)
passive, hostis vincitur : in (a) hostem is object, in (6)
hostis is subject.
A verb used intransitively in the active voice has
an impersonal passive in Latin : dormio, I sleep ;
dormitur, sleep is going on ; dormitum est, sleep is
done. As we have no impersonal passive in English,
we cannot translate dormitur, etc. literally : we cannot
say ' it is being slept/
Many intransitive verbs govern a dative of the
indirect object. Like other intransitive verbs they are
used impersonally in the passive ; the dative remains
unchanged :
Parco tibi, / am lenient to you, I spare you.
Parcitur tibi, Leniency is shown to you, You are
spared.
Many of these verbs are transitive in English :
hence the very common mistake of supposing they are
transitive in Latin. This is the more natural because
the impersonal use of the passive is not found in
English, and it requires a considerable effort to make
4 LATIN COURSE
the mind familiar with it. A few more examples may
help you to avoid blunders:
Creditur inihi, / am believed.
Ignoscetur tibi, You will be forgiven.
Persuasum est mihi, / have been persuaded, I am
convinced.
Note especially the use of the gerund : credendum
est Caesari a nobis. The agent must be expressed by
a, ab and the ablative ; for two datives would be
ambiguous. (See 87.)
4. COPULATIVE VERBS
The following verbs among others may be used
with two nominatives, one of the subject, the other of
the predicate : sum, I am ; videor, I seem ; nascor, I
am born ; evado, I turn out ; creor, nominor, I am
appointed ; putor, existimor, habeor, I am considered ;
appellor, dicor, I am called ; fio, I am made.
Cicero creatus est consul, Cicero was appointed
consul.
Ille putatur bonus vir, He is considered a good man.
Imperator certior factus est, The general was
informed.
When the copulative verb is in the infinitive with
possum, volo and similar verbs (see 103) the predicate
remains in the nominative :
Malet existimari bonus vir, He will prefer to be
considered a good man.
MISCELLANEOUS 5
Socrates parens philosophiae iure dici potest,
Socrates may with justice be called the father of
philosophy.
Dionysius fortis esse didicerat, Dionysius had been
taught to be courageous, or, had learned to be
courageous.
5. QUESTIONS. I. Direct
1. Simple Questions with num, -ne, nonne :
Num fecisti ? Did you really do it ? [Surely
you didn't ?]. Nonne fecisti ? Didn't you do it ?
[Surely you did?] Fecistine ? Did you do it? [Tell
me : I want to know.]
Num expects the answer ' No.' Nonne expects the
answer 'Yes.' -n% is appended to the most emphatic
word in a question asked for information ; the answer
is not implied. The most emphatic word is generally
placed first :
Interfecisti-ne omnes ? Did you kill them all ?
Omnes-ne interfecisti ? Did you kill them all ?
2. Double Questions: utrum and an:
Utrum vicisti an victus es ?
Utrum vicisti annon ?
3. Questions may also be introduced by such words
as Qi'is ? Cur ? Unde ? See 37.
LATIN COURSE
The Mood in a Direct Question
4. Direct questions have the verb in the indicative
if the expected answer would have the verb in the
indicative, as is the case with all the above sentences.
The subjunctive is used where the answer would be
in the subjunctive or imperative :
Si ad te venissem, quid fecisses ? Tecuin profectus
essein, If I had come to you, what would you
have done ? I should have started with you.
Quid faciam ? Kedi, What am I to do ? Go lack.
Utrum hostibus resistanms an nos dedamus ?
Resistamus, Must (Shall) we resist or surrender ?
Let us resist.
6. QUESTIONS. II. Indirect
The verb in an indirect question is in the subjunctive.
In a simple indirect question ' whether ' may be trans-
lated by num or -ne : num does not imply that the
answer to the question must be 'No.'
Scire velim num redierit, / should like to know
whether he has come lack.
Ex me quaesivit posset-ne fieri, He asked me whether
(or, if) it was possible.
Note. The word ' if ' introducing a question ( =
' whether ') must not be translated by si.
Just as the future infinitive is made up of the
future participle with esse, so the future subjunctive
MISCELLANEOUS 7
in indirect questions is made up of the future participle
with sim or essem :
Quaesivi num. nioriturus esset, / asked whether he
would die.
Considerabimus quid fecerit, quid faciat, quid
facturus sit, We will consider what he has done,
what he is doing, what he is going to do (will do).
In a double indirect question ' whether ' may be
translated by utrum or -ne ; ' or ' by an ; ' or not '
by nec-ne :
Scire velim utrum vicerit an victus sit (Scire velim
vicerit-ne an victus sit), / should like to know
whether he has won or lost.
Nihil interest utrum rescribas necne, It doesn't
matter whether you write lack or not.
7. HOW TO EXPRESS A CONSEQUENCE
To express a result or consequence use ut, ut . . .
non, ut . . . nemo, ut . . . nihil, ut . . . numquam (not
ne, nequis, nequid, nequando etc.).
Tanta erat tempestas ut nemo posset solvere, The
storm was so violent that no one could set sail.
Tarn paucae erant naves ut redire non possent, There
were so few ships that they could not return.
Contrast the next example.
8 LATIN COURSE
8. HOW TO EXPRESS A PURPOSE
To express a purpose use (1) ut, ne, nequis, etc.
(not ut . . . non} ut nemo, ut nihil etc.).
Ne in patriam redire possent, naves incendit, He
burned the ships that they might not be able to
return to their country.
In final clauses (i.e. clauses expressing a purpose)
ne-ve, not neque, is used for ' and not.'
Id ut efficerent ne-ve desperarent, metum dissimu-
lavit, that they might effect this and not lose
hope, he concealed his fear.
Ne = ( lest'; you can introduce ' lest ' in final clauses
in English, but not in consequence-clauses.
(2) The relative pronoun (qui) may also be used
to express a purpose : qui is then equivalent to ut is.
Misiinus qui quaererent, We sent some men to find
out ( We sent men who might find out).
Use qui instead of ut when the sense allows (i.e.
when ut is makes sense) ; for instance—
He sent two ships to protect the city, Duas naves misit
quae (not ut) urbi praesidio essent.
See 156 for further examples.
• (3) Quo (the ablative of qui) is used with compara-
tives :
Quo facilius intellegatis, epistulam legam, That you
may understand the more easily, I will read the
letter.
Quo is equivalent to ut eo, ' in order that/ ' by this
means/
MISCELLANEOUS
(4) A purpose is also sometimes expressed by the
gerund or gerundive followed by causa (the abl. of
causa, ' cause/ ' reason') :
In Asiam venit negotiandi causa, He came to Asia
in pursuit of his business (lit. for the sake of
carrying on his business).
Navium reficiendarum causa, In order to repair his
(5) The supine in -um is also sometimes used, but
only with verbs of motion :
Venerunt oratum regem ut sibi subveniret, They
came to beg the king to help them.
9. THE KKLATIVE EXPRESSING A TENDENCY OR EESULT
Qui with the subjunctive may be equivalent to
ut is or talis ut is :
Nemo tarn sapiens est qui sciat omnia, No one is so
wise as to know everything,
or simply
Nemo est qui sciat omnia, There is no one who
knows (i.e.. such that he knows) everything.
This use of the relative is specially common after
Sunt qui, Nemo est qui:
Sunt qui dicant, Some people say (There are some
who say).
See further examples in 157-58.
10 LATIN COURSE
10. VERBS FOLLOWED BY UT
The following verbs among others may be followed
by ut.
(a) ut final ; negative ne : in English we use the
infinitive with the corresponding verbs : I urge (order,
beg etc.) you to come, Hortor (impero, oro) ut venias,
I urge (order etc.) you not to come, Hortor (impero
etc.) ne venias.
peto a te persuadeo tibi
oro te impero tibi
hortor te praecipio tibi
moneo te edico tibi
suadeo tibi
All these verbs mean to try to induce a man to
do or to avoid doing so and so. Some of them may
take other constructions with different meaning, for
example :
i. Moneo te ut audias, / advise you, to listen.
ii. Moneo te eum iam ad oceanum pervenisse, /
warn you that he lias already reached the ocean.
In i. monto takes ut because it means ' I try to
make you listen/ in ii. it takes the accusative
and infinitive because it means ' I inform you
that he has reached the ocean/ In i. the
ut clause expresses my purpose in speaking
(my object is to make you listen). In ii. the
accusative and infinitive reports what I say
(I say iam ad oceanum pervenit}.
MISCELLANEOUS 1 1
Note that where we use our infinitive with these
verbs the Latin has ut (as in i.) : where we use ' that '
the Latin has the infinitive (as in ii.).
(b) ut consecutive or explanatory : negative non.
Accidit, it happens, it chances.
fieri potest, factum est etc., it is possible that, the
result ivas that etc.
I happened to see him, Accidit ut eum viderem.
11. QUIN
The following expressions among others are followed
by quin. They are all negative statements or questions
implying a negative answer :
Nemo est. Non recuso.
Quis est ? Non obsto.
Non dubito. Me retinere non possum.
Quis est quin sciat ? Who is there who does not
know ?
Eecusare non possum quin venias, / cannot object to
your coming.
Non dubito quin venturus sit, / have no doubt that
he will come.
12 LATIN COURSE
12. QUOMINUS
Quominus follows impedio, deter reo and some other
verbs of hindering :
Eeges impediendi sunt quominus Parthis sub-
yen iant, The kings must be prevented from
helping the Parthians.
Quominus = quo minus : quo, ( by which means ' is
equivalent to ut eo, ( that by this means ' : minus, ' to a
less extent, not at all.'
Quid obstat quominus sit beatus, What prevents
his being happy (what stands in the way so that
in consequence thereof he should the less be
happy ?).
13. SEQUENCE OF TENSES
The rule of sequence is : Primary tenses of the
subjunctive follow primary tenses of the indicative,
historic tenses of the subjunctive follow historic tenses
of the indicative,
The Primary Tenses are
in the Indicative in the
Present. Present.
Future and Future Perfect. Perfect.
The Historic Tenses are
in the Indicative in the Subjunctive
Imperfect. Imperfect.
Perfect. Pluperfect.
Pluperfect.
MISCELLANEOUS 13
Note that the historic tenses correspond to the
Greek augmented tenses.
The primary tenses have to do with the present
and the future, the historic tenses with the past.
Hence the imperative mood is, of course, primary.
14. Tense in subordinate clause
1. Latin is more exact than English in the use of
the tenses in subordinate clauses :
Si quid iussisti, efficimus, If you give '(i.e. have
given) any order, we carry it out.
Si quid iusseras efficiebamus, If you, gave (i.e. had
given) any order, we used to carry it out.
As a practical rule, if you can introduce the more
exact expression (such as ' if you have given/ ' if you
had given/ ' if you shall have given ') in the English
without altering the sense, you must use one of the
tenses of completion (perfect, pluperfect or future
perfect) in the Latin.
2. If a subordinate clause refers to the future, a
future tense must be used in Latin :
Veniet, si valebit, He will come if he is well (i.e.
if he shall be well).
Veniet si iussero, He will come if I bid him to
(i.e. if I shall have hidden him).
See 52-57.
14 LATIN COURSE
15. lam diu etc. with Present
The present is used of an action commenced long
ago and still continuing, especially with iam and iam
diu.
Iam diu exspecto litteras, / have long been expecting
a letter (and am still expecting).
See 58.
16. Postquam etc. with the Perfect
Note the common use of the perfect tense (where
in accordance with the rule given in 14 we should
expect the pluperfect) with u~bi, nt, postquam, priusquam,
simul ac :
Postquam a nobis discessit, interfectus est, After
he (had) left us he was murdered.
See 60.
17. Dum with the Present Indicative
Dum takes the present indicative when it means
' during the time that/ ' in the course of the time
that ' :
Dum haec geruntur, (interea) nuntiatum est,
While this was going on (In the course of these
proceedings), a message was brought.
See 62.
MISCELLANEOUS 15
18. Dum, ' until,' with Subjunctive
Dum, ' until,' takes the subjunctive if there is any
reference to the future, or any sense of purpose or
expectation. Hence very often with exspecto and
similar verbs :
Exspectandum est dum redeat, We must wait till he
returns, or, for him to return.
See 64.
19. The Conjunction Cum
Cum, ' when,' takes the future or future perfect
indicative.
Cum, ' when/ takes the imperfect and pluperfect
subjunctive.
Cum, meaning ' since/ ' as/ ' seeing that/ ' although/
takes the subjunctive. See 65-72.
20. The English Present Participle
The present participle can only be used in Latin
of an action contemporaneous with that of the leading
verb. It is correct to write :
Flens oravit auxilium for ' Shedding tears he legged
for help,'
for he was shedding tears while he was speaking. But
it would not be correct to write :
Surgens discessit for ' Rising up he went away!
for he did not go while he was rising, but after he had
risen. We should therefore write :
Cum surrexisset discessit.
16 LATIN COURSE
21. We use our present participle in a causal sense :
Being hungry (i.e. as he was hungry) he asked for food.
The participle thus used should be translated into
Latin by (1) cum with the subjunctive, Cum esuriret,
As lie was hungry, or (2) by the past participle of a
deponent verb, Veritus, Being afraid. See 74, 78, 79.
22. The English Past Participle,
There is no past participle active in Latin. Its
place is supplied (1) sometimes by the use of the
passive participle, (2) sometimes by using cum with
the subjunctive, sometimes in other ways.
(1) a. Having conquered Ms enemy lie departed.
Hoste vie to discessit (His enemy having been
conquered).
b. Having conquered his enemy he killed him.
Hostem victum interfecit (He 'killed his
conquered enemy}.
Beware of writing the ablative absolute when, as in
(6), the participle may be brought into the sentence in
some other way.
(2) a. Having conquered his enemy he departed, Cum
hostem vicisset, discessit.
b. Having arrived there he had dinner, Quo
cum venisset cenavit.
Beware of using victus for ' having conquered,' or
ventus ( = ' the wind ') for ' having come.'
See 77 for examples of the use of the participles.
MISCELLANEOUS 17
23. The Gerund and Gerundive
I. The gerund and gerundive are used to translate
our verbal substantive in -ing, in the accusative after
a preposition, in the genitive, dative, and ablative.
The gerund is used as the intransitive form, and as the
transitive form when the object is a neuter adjective or
pronoun; the gerund is not used to govern a substantive
in the accusative: it is replaced by the gerundive, which
attracts the substantive into its own case.
ace. ad scribendum (multa, aliquid), With
a view to writing.
ad scribendam epistulam.
gen. ars scribendi.
ars scribendarum epistularum.
dat. and abl. scribendo.
scribendis epistulis.
The nominative and the accusative without a pre-
position are supplied by the infinitive :
nom. scribere est molestum, Writing is troublesome.
ace. nolo scribere, / dont want to write, I dont
like writing.
See 80-82.
II. They are used as predicates to express obliga-
tion or necessity or some similar idea. The nominative
and accusative are the only possible cases :
Moriendum est omnibus, We must all die.
Exspectandae sunt naves (tibi), You must wait for
the ships.
Versus mihi dedit rescribendos, He gave me my
verses to wi'ite out again.
See 83-89.
c
18 LATIN COURSE
24. The Infinitive wiili the Accusative
The infinitive, or the accusative and infinitive, may
be the subject to est and some other verbs :
Manere est optimum, It is lest to stay.
Me manere est optimum, It is best that I should
stay.
Manere solum est optimum, It is best to stay alone.
The words in italics form the subject to est. See 91—100.
25. The Infinitive with the Nominative
The infinitive, or the nominative and infinitive,
may be used with possum, debeo, wlo, nolo, malo, cupio,
statuo ( = ' I resolve '), coepi, desino, and soms other
verbs :
Cupit manere solus, He desires to remain alone.
See 101-105.
The nominative and infinitive may also be used
with passive verbs of saying and thinking :
Dicitur manere solus, It is said that he remains
alone.
See 110.
26. The Accusative with the Infinitive — Tense of the
Infinitive
The accusative and infinitive are used with active
verbs of saying and thinking ; to some extent also
with passive verbs of the same class. See 106-14.
MISCELLANEOUS 19
A common mistake is to put the wrong tense of
the infinitive. Observe the tense in the following :
They say he was king (i.e. They say Eex erat or
fuit, He was king), Dicunt eum regem fuisse.
They said he was king (i.e. They said Eex est, He
is king), Dixerunt eum regem esse.
They said he was king (i.e. They said Eex erat or
fuit, He was king), Dixerunt eum regem fuisse.
To avoid mistakes go back to the direct form, i.e.
ask yourself what they did say : if the direct form
has the present indicative, the indirect form will have
the present infinitive ; if the direct form has the
imperfect or perfect indicative, the indirect form will
have the perfect infinitive. See 113.
27. ORATIO OBLIQUA
The principal rules for Oratio Obliqua are :
The indicative mood is not used.
Statements are put in the accusative and infinitive.
Questions and commands have the verb in the
subjunctive.
Subordinate clauses have the verb in the sub-
junctive.
With regard to the tenses, keep as close as possible
to the Oratio Eecta and observe the rule of the sequence
of tenses. See 131-52.
20 LATIN COURSE
28. CONDITIONAL SENTENCES IN OKATIO EECTA AND
OBLIQUA
See 115-19 on conditional sentences ; 131-52 on
oratio obliqua, and especially 151.
A. 1. Si loquatur, audiam, If lie were to speak, I
would listen.
Dixi me eum, si loqueretur, auditurum esse.
2. Si locutus esset, audissem, If he had spoken,
I should have listened (it is implied that
he did not speak).
Dixi me eum, si locutus esset, auditurum fuisse.
3. Si loqueretur audirem, If he were speaking, I
should listen (it is implied that he is not
speaking).
Dixi me eum, si loqueretur, auditurum
fuisse.
B. 1. Si id dices, mentions, If you (shall) say it,
you will lie.
Dixi ilium, si id diceret, mentiturum esse.
2. Si id dixero, me caedet, If I say it (shall have
said it), he will flog me.
Dixi eum me, si id dixissem, caesurum esse.
3. Si id dixisti, mentitus es, If you said it, you lied.
Dixi eum, si id dixisset, mentitum esse.
4. Si quid dixeram, irascebatur, If I (had) said
anything, he used to get angry.
Dixi eum, si quid dixissem, iratum esse or
irasci solitum esse.
MISCELLANEOUS 21
5. Si quid dicit, mentitur, If he says anything, he
lies.
Dixi eum, si quid diceret, mentiri.
6. Si timebat, inentiebatur, If he was frightened,
he used to lie.
Dixi eum, si timeret, mentitum esse or mentiri
solitum esse.
29, THE POTENTIAL SUBJUNCTIVE
Scire velim, / should like to know.
Dixerit quispiam, Some one may say.
See 120-23.
30. COMMANDS, PROHIBITIONS, AND EXHORTATIONS
In the second person the following are the common
forms :
Commands —
Singular. Veni. Fac venias. Cura ut venias.
Plural. Venite.
Prohibitions—
Singular. Noli putare. Cave (ne) putes.
Plural. Nolite putare.
In the first and third person the subjunctive is
used :
Faciamus, Let us do it. Ne quis dicat, Let no one
say.
See 124-28.
II
THE CONNECTING EELATIVE
31. The connection between one sentence and another
is often more fully expressed in Latin than in English.
The relative pronoun and its adverb quo are very
largely used after full stops, colons and semicolons to
bind one sentence to another:
Quae cum audisset Eomam profectus est. Quam
ad urbem cum pervenisset ad fratris domum properavit.
Quern cum in Galliam iam prof ec turn esse cognovisset
Massiliam navigare statuit. Itaque ad portum currit,
or ad portum igitur currit.
' When he heard this (or, on hearing this), he
started for Eome. And when he reached the city he
hastened to his brother's house. Finding that he had
already set off for Gaul he determined to sail to
Marseilles. So he hurries off to the harbour.'
32. We cannot imitate this use of the relative in
English. We cannot say ' which when he had heard '
or ' to which city when he had come ' ; we change
the relative into a demonstrative, and say ' when he
had heard this,' ' when he had reached this city or
PRONOUNS 23
the city.' Sometimes we put in an ' and ' or ' but '
or ' now ' to express the connection with the preceding
sentence. This use of the relative is especially
common with cum, ' when.' Observe the order of the
words : the relative comes first ; only a preposition
can precede it :
Ex quo intellexi, From this I gathered.
Quibus de rebus certiores facti putavimus, Now
when we were informed of this we thought.
[Compare the two examples just given: the relative
tends to come first ; it precedes the preposition when
it has a substantive in agreement with it]
Quo facto, This done.
Quod si fecero, In that case ; more literally, If I
do so.
Qua re or Quare, Wherefore, Accordingly, For this
reason.
Quorum ad fines ut venit, When he reached their
territory.
Quorum uno interfecto, And when one of them was
slain.
Quo cum venissem, On my arrival, or Arrived
there, When I got there (ivhither when I had
come).
24 LATIN COURSE
SE AND EUM
33. Se and suus refer to the subject of the sentence :
Se interfecit, he killed himself (A killed A).
Eum interfecit, he killed him (A killed B).
Eum refers to some person already mentioned
other than the subject of the sentence.
In simple sentences there is no difficulty : but in
sentences which have a subordinate clause, it is not
always easy to decide whether se or eum is to be used ;
for in some subordinate clauses se refers to the subject
of the subordinate clause; in others it refers to the
subject of the principal verb. The general rule is
this: se in a subordinate clause refers to the subject
of the principal verb, when the subordinate clause
expresses the thought or will of that subject :
hence in such sentences as have the verb in the
infinitive, in indirect questions and commands, and
in sentences expressing a purpose :
(a) Dixit se ei ignoscere, He said that he forgave him.
(b) Oravit eum ut sibi parceret, He begged him to
be lenient to him.
(c) Imperavit eis ut se sequerentur, He ordered them
to follow liim.
(d) Quaesiverunt num se proficisci vellet, They
asked whether he wanted them to start.
In all these sentences se refers to the subject of
the principal verb, not to the subject of its own clause ;
in all of them the subordinate clause expresses the
PRONOUNS 25
thought or the will of the subject of the principal
verb. The Latin is clearer than the English : in (&), (c)
and (d) the words ' him ' and ' them ' translating se and
sibi are ambiguous.
34. But in the following u is used in the subordinate
clause to refer to the subject of the principal verb,
because the subordinate clause does not express the
thought or the will of that subject :
(e) Tarn gratus erat militibus ut laeti eum seque-
rentur (compare (c)), So popular was he with
the soldiers that they gladly followed him.
(f) Ambiorix in Aduatucos, qui erant eius regni
finitimi, proficisci voluit, Ambiorix wanted
to march into the territory of the Aduatuci,
who lived on the borders of his kingdom.
In (/) the relative clause does not express the thought
of Ambiorix, but it is a note of the historian's.
Ambiorix said to himself ' I will march into the
country of the Aduatuci.' The Aduatuci, observes the
historian, lived close to Ambiorix. See 155.
35. The following sentences * will make the matter
clearer :
Alexander moriens anulum suum dederat Perdiccae,
Alexander when dying had given his ring to
Perdiccas.
Perdiccas acceperat eius anulum, Perdiccas had
received his ring.
1 I borrow these from Gildersleeve and Lodge.
26 LATIN COURSE
Quare Alexander declaraverat se regnum ei com-
mendasse, Thereby [qua re, ( by this act,'
namely the gift of the ring] Alexander had
declared that he had committed the kingdom
to him.
Ex quo Perdiccas coniecerat eum regnum sibi com-
mendasse, From this Perdiccas had gathered
that he had committed the kingdom to him.
Ex quo oinnes coniecerant eum regnum ei commen-
dasse, From this all had gathered that he had
committed the kingdom to him.
Perdiccas postulavit ut se regem habereiit cum
Alexander anulum sibi dedisset, Perdiccas de-
manded that they should have him for Icing, as
Alexander had given the ring to him.
Amici postulaverunt ut omnes eum regem haberent
cum Alexander anulum ei dedisset, His friends
demanded that all should have him for king, as
Alexander had given the ring to him.
Ita se gesserat Perdiccas ut ei regnum ab Alexandro
commendaretur, Perdiccas had so behaved him-
self that the kingdom was intrusted to him by
Alexander.
PRONOUNS 27
EXERCISE 1
The connecting relative is to be used in the first eight sentences.
1. I am besieging a strongly fortified to.wn : when I
have taken it, I shall dismiss the army to
winter-quarters.
2. I promise to poison him this very day : this done,
you will be able to do all you wish.
3. Now when he was informed of this he thought
it best to delay no longer.
4. So we set off for the villa of Bibulus. And when
we reached his door, we were informed that
he was so seriously ill that all the doctors
were in despair.
5. He wrote that he would come to my aid. Touched
by his zeal, I replied that I would never forget
his kindness.
6. You see the villa here, built by my father. Being
in weak health he preferred to live in the
country. Here I was born. That is why
I love this place.
7. And when they asked for peace he replied that
he had not made war on them but they on
him.
2. all you wish, i.e. all the things which you wish. The relative
is often omitted in English, but must be expressed in Latin.
3. best to delay : use the gerund. See 89.
5. Touched, motus or commotus.
6. The villa here, haec villa.
Being in weak health : look out 'health ' ; cum with the subj. will
often translate the English participle : see 70.
That is why, ' For this reason.'
7. I make war on you, bellum infero tibi.
LATIN" COURSE
8. I see that all depends on you. Wherefore, that
we may attain what we hope for, take care
that you keep well.
9. She was so angry that she would not speak to
him.
10. A king wants to know what his subjects think.
11. Metellus begged them to give Jugurtha up to
him. He promised to give them such a large
sum of money that they gave the prisoner
up to him at once.
12. Quintus came to me at Aquinum on the following
morning and told me that his wife would not
speak to him.
13. Ennius expresses the opinion that the gods exist,
but he holds that they do not care what the
human race does.
14. When she saw him starting, she ordered them to
follow him.
15. She is afraid that you will desert her. She begs
you to write to her.
16. He was so fond of me, that I was generally
supposed to be his son.
8. all depends on him, in eo sunt omnia.
attain, consequor.
9. so, adeo.
I speak to her, cum ea loquor.
10. subjects, cives.
11. give up : use trado.
12. at Aquinum. See 2.
13. to express an opinion, censere.
exist, sum.
I hold, oplnor (1).
the human race, humanum genus.
16. I am so fond of him, sic diligo eum.
generally, vulgo (abl. of vulgus, the people).
I am supposed to be, habeor esse.
Ill
36. EELATIVE WORDS
With the relative pronoun Qui, quae, quod are
connected the following adverbs :
ubi, ' where,' ' when '
cum, or quom, ( when '
cur, ' for which reason/' ' why '
quo, ' to which place/ ' whither '
uncle, ' whence/ ' from which '
,. ,. (gualis, '(such) as '
and the adjectives •[ * ,.
\quantus, ' (as great) as.
37. INTERROGATIVE WORDS
Quis ? Quid ? ask the questions ' Who ? ' ' What ? '
Qui, quae, quod are the adjectival forms, that is to say,
are the forms used in agreement with a substantive :
Quis erat ? Quid dixit ? Quid periculi est ? Qui miles
erat ? Quae puella ? Quod helium gessisti ?
Uter asks the question ' Which (of two) ? '
Note. — Uter-que means ' each (of two),' ' either/
' both.' Quis-que means ' each of some larger number.'
30 LATIN COURSE
The following adverbs and adverbial expressions are
connected with Qwis?
Quando ? ' when ? '
Ubi ? or Quo in loco ? ' where ? '
Cur ? ' for what reason ? ' ' why ? '
Quo ? ' whither ? ' ' where (to) ? '
Qua ? ' by what road ? '
Unde ? ' where from ? ' ' whence ? '
(Qualis? 'what sort of?'
and the adiectives •[ ^ „ , , , „ ,
[ Quantus ? how great ?
All these interrogative words are used in indirect
as well as in direct questions :
Quid ageres, ubi terraruin esses, ne suspicabar
quidem, / hadn't even a suspicion wliat you
were doing, or where on earth you were.
Beware of using cum to ask the question ' when ? '
instead of quando, or qua for ' where ? ' instead of ubi.
38. Beware of confusing the relative with the
indirect interrogative :
Relative. I will do what you tell me, Id quod (or Ea
quae) iusseris faciam (iusseris is fat. perf.).
Interrogative. I don't know lohat you told us to do,
Quid (or Quae) nos facere iusseris
nescio (iusseris is perf. subj.).
In a relative sentence you can change ' who '
into ' he who,' ' those who ' etc., ' what ' into ' that
which.' You cannot do this in an interrogative
sentence without changing or destroying the sense :
/ know who did it, Quis fecerit scio.
/ know the man who did it, Eum qui fecit novi.
PRONOUNS 31
39. The indirect question may depend on a great
variety of expressions ; here are a few examples :
Scribe quid facturus sis, Write and tell me what
you are going to do.
Quam paucis ille copiis prae-esset non eram ignarus,/
was not ignorant how small was the force under his
command (lii.howfew troops he ivascommanding).
Miror qua de causa gaudeas, / wonder why you are
joyful
Monendus est quo in loco flumen transiri possit, He
mustbetold (luarned) where the river can be crossed.
Quid ego faciam noli laborare, As to what I am
doing don't trouble yourself.
Cur redieris intellego, / see why you have come back.
40. INDEFINITE. ' IF A MAN/ ' IF EVER/ ETC.
' Any/ 'any one/ 'a man/ and the like, are translated
by quis, qua, quid (adjectival forms qui} quae or qua, quod)
after ne, num, si, nisi, or a relative pronoun or adverb :
Si quis id dicit, mentitur, If a man says that, he lies.
Si quis me fefellit, ei non amplius credo, If a man
has deceived me, I trust him no more.
Quando is used in the same way for an unemphatic
'ever/ 'at any time': si quo is used for 'if . . . in any
direction/ 'if . . . any where'1 [i.e. to any place].
Si quando Eomam alio-ve quo mitterent legates, If
ever they sent envoys to Rome or any other place.
Num quando redibit ? Will he ever return ?
1 If there is any sense of motion towards a place, use quo (' whither'),
eo ('thither'): in modern English we have dropped 'whither' and
'thither' and we use only 'where' and 'there,' whether we mean 'to
a place' or 'in a place.'
32 LATIN COURSE
41. ' ANY ' AND ' EVER ' IN A NEGATIVE SENTENCE :
' AND NO ONE ' = NEC QUISQUAM
Quisquam is used for ' any one ' (substantival) and
ullus for ' any ' (adjectival) in negative sentences :
unquam (' at any time/ ' ever '), usquam (' at or to any
place ') are used in the same way. The negative
sense is often expressed by putting the sentence in an
interrogative form :
Quis dicit ( = Nemo dicit) quemquam nostrum
fugisse ?
Note the difference between the English and the
Latin idiom in :
and (or, but) no one came back, nee quisquam rediit,
and there is no hope, neque ulla spes est,
and I have never seen, neque unquam vidi.
Do not write et nemo, et nullus, or et nunquam.
42. 'ANY ONE YOU LIKE'
When ' any ' means ' any you please ' the Latin is
quivis * (qui -f vis, ' who you please/ the second person
of volo) or quilibet (qui + libet, ' who it pleases you ').
Compare Quivis potest id intelleyere, Any one can
understand it, with Negat quemquam id intellegere posse,
He denies that any one can understand it, i.e. He says
that no one can understand it :
Quidvis pati potius quain recedere, To endure any
hardship (anything you please) rather than retire.
1 declined quivis quaevis quidvis (substantive) or quodvis (adjective)
quilibet quaelibet quidiibet or quodlibet.
PRONOUNS 33
43. ' SOME OXE,' ' SOME ' * (ALIQUIS, QUIDAM, QUONDAM)
Aliquis means ' some one,' and is used chiefly in
affirmative sentences :
vidi aliquem, / saw somebody.
Quixpiam is less common :
Dixerit quispiam, Some one may say.
Quidam, ' a certain person,' ' one,' ' a ' :
vidi quemdam, / saw a certain person.
Compare aliquis with quidam : aliquis means some
one ' wholly indefinite to the speaker as well as to the
hearer': as in * some one told me, but I can't remember
who it was': quidam means a certain person 'definite
or indefinite to the speaker but not definitely designated
to the hearer ' : 2 as in 'a certain person told me ;
perhaps I could give you his name.'
44. Hence the adverb quondam, ' on a certain
occasion,' * one day/ ' once,' ' once upon a time ' :
id quod ego quondam dixi, as I said one day.
Note the common use of quidam and quondam in
beginning a story : for example, Colloquebar quondam
cum quodam homine, I was talking to a man one day.
Who the man was, and when the thing happened, are
points which make no difference to the story, and so
they are left indefinite :
/ hope to see you- some day (aliquando).
/ was with him one day (quondam or quodam die).
1 It is often better to translate ' some ' by sunt qui or nonnulli sunt
qui, e.g.
However, some people trust him, Sunt tamen qui ei credant.
See 167.
2 From Gildersleeve and Lodge.
D
34 LATIN COURSE
45. ' WHOEVER,' ' WHEREVER/ ETC.
Quisquis, quidquid (generally substantival), and
quicumque, quaecumgue, quodcumque (generally ad-
jectival), correspond to the English relatives 'whoever,'
' whatever/ etc.
Quocumque, Whithersoever, In whatever direction.
/ shall go wherever you go, Quocumque tu ibis, eo
( = thither) ego ibo.
Beware of using quicumque for quivis.
Compare
Any risk whatever must "be run, Quodvis periculum
est adeundum
with
Quidquid periculi est (Quodcumque periculum est),
est adeundum, Whatever risk there is we must
run it.
With quisquis or quicumque you must have a verb :
quivis contains its verb in itself.
46. QUISQUE
Quisque must be used with care. It corresponds
to the English word ' each ' only in some of its
meanings. It must never begin a sentence, but must
come immediately after one of the following :
1. se or mus,
2. a superlative,
3. an ordinal number,
PRONOUNS 35
4. a relative or interrogative word, such as those
shown in 36 and 37.
For instance :
1. se quisque amat, sua cuique res est carissima,
2. optimus quisque maxiine gloria ducitur, the
better a man is the more ambitious he is (the
more he is led on by glory),
3. tertio quoque anno, every third year,
4. causam quaerit cur quidque fiat, he tries to find
out the reason (why each thiny happens) of every
occurrence.
47. IPSE
Ipse is the emphasising pronoun :
Ipse fed, I did it myself, with my own hands,
It was I who did it, I did it for myself (i.e. I didn't
send some one else to do it for me).
Si scriberem ipse, longior epistula fuisset, sed
dictavi, If I were writing ivith my own hand, the
letter would have been longer, but I have dictated it.
It may be used of any of the three persons :
Ipse feci, / did it myself.
Ipse fecisti, You did it yourself.
Ipsi fecimus, We did it ourselves ; and so on.
It may be used as an adjective :
hac ipsa nocte, this very night.
It is often used to contrast the leader with his
followers, the general with his soldiers, etc.
Legiones in hiberna dimisit : ipse Eomam pro-
fectus est.
36 LATIN COURSE
48. IDEM
Idem (is-}- clem) is a more emphatic is. It is used
to connect two statements with one person or thing.
Sometimes we can translate it by ' the same/ some-
times by ' also,' ' at the same time ' :
Qui fortis est, idem est ficlens (The man who is
brave, that man is confident), The man who is
brave is also confident, or, is at the same time . . .
Frustra id iussisset, nisi eadem docuisset quomodo
esset faciendum, In vain would she have
given the order, if she had not at the same
time (or, also) shown how it was to be carried out.
Hence eo-dem, to the same place.
49. *ONE ANOTHER'
There is no reciprocal pronoun in Latin : ' one
another ' is translated inter nos, inter vos, inter se :
We embrace one another, Inter nos complectimur.
You were talking to one another, Inter vos loque-
bamini.
They love one another, Inter se amant
50. POSITION OF EELATIVE CLAUSE
Note the position of the relative clause in the
following examples, and arrange any similar sentences
in the same way :
Unde profectus erat, eodem rediit, He returned to the
point from which he started (Latin : from whence
he had started, to that same point he returned).
PRONOUN'S 37
Quern ipse capitis damiiavit, eimdem liberabit, He
will set free the very man whom he has himself
condemned.
You will see that there is a tendency in Latin to
put the relative clause first. In English the
antecedent must come before the relative : we could
not begin the last example ' whom he has himself
condemned/ but we must at least put the antecedent
' the man ' ( = eum) before the relative. Even then
the sentence will be a little awkward : ' the man
whom he has himself condemned he will set free.' It
is generally better to change the position of the twro
clauses, as in the examples above.
There is one relative pronoun in English which
may be used like the Latin relative without any
antecedent, viz. ' what ' : with this word the English
and Latin order may correspond :
Wliat they had foretold came true, Quae praedixerant
evenerunt.
51. The usual English equivalent of the Latin (is) qui,
eum qui, eos qui etc. is ' the man who,' ' the men who.'
In translating into Latin do not write homo qui or
vir qui. The antecedent is may generally be omitted
if it would be in the same case as the relative.
38 LATIN COURSE
EXERCISE 2
Many of the words required will be found in Sections 36-51, but not in
the Dictionary. You should learn the examples nearly by heart
before you begin to do the exercise.
1. There were in a certain city a king and a queen.
2. Why do they hate one another ? Anybody can
see why they hate one another.
3. Each man ought to look after his own interests.
4. If you want me to go anywhere to-morrow, let
me know to-day when I am to start.
5. Whatever is the issue of the war, both states will
lose many citizens. Can it be doubtful to
any one that the risk is great ?
6. Let us return to the point from which we made
a digression : you say that whatever is honour-
able is also useful.
7. The matter is very difficult to explain, and to me
at the present time any reason for idleness
seems good enough.
3. I look after my own interest, mihi consulo (3) (I consult for
myself).
4. volo with ace. and inf.
let me know, fac sciam (bring it about that I may know).
I am to start : use the gerund ; see 83.
5. issue, eventus (4), the outcome or result, from e-venio.
Whatever is the issue = Whatever shall be the issue. The future
must be used in Latin : see 14.
6. I make a digression, digredior (3). The relative clause will
come' first ; see 60.
7. difficult to explain, difficilis ad explicandum.
to be idle, cessdre : a reason for being idle, causa cessandi.
good enough, satis iustus.
PRONOUNS 39
8. If a man is hateful to them, they murder him,
and there is no one in the whole state who
dares bring them to trial.
9. As I wanted to make use of certain books from
the library of Lucullus I went to his villa to
get them out for myself. When I got there
I saw Marcus Cato sitting in the library.
What brings you here ? said he ; if I had
known you were at your villa I would have
corne to see you myself.
10. Whatever the people order we must do.
11. Is it not better to endure anything whatever than
to yield to the Germans ?
1 2. You ask when he will return ? Do you really
think he will ever return ? Yes, it is the
custom to come back from India every fifth
year.
8. who dares : subj., see 157.
I bring (him) to trial, reum (eum)facio (I make him the defendant).
9. As, cum with subj.
library, bibliotJieca.
to get them out : say ' that I might take them (promo (3)) thence '
(inde).
when I got there : see 32.
What brings you here? say ' Why have you come hither?' Quid
tn hue [venisti]?
I come to see you, ad te venio.
The English word ' villa ' has acquired a very different meaning
from that which the word bore in Latin and still bears in Italian. To
a Roman the word meant a country-house, often of great size, together
with all the land and buildings belonging to it. A palace like
Hatfield House together with its park might be covered by the
expression villa suburbana, 'a place near town.'
10. See 14.
11. it is better, satius est.
12. yes, etiam.
custom: say 'they are accustomed.'
from India, ab Indis.
40 LATIN COURSE
13. When we have found out how large is the force
under his command, we shall be able to decide
where to take refuge, and where to look for
help.
14. As to the doings of the city I am looking for a
letter from you : I should like to know what
Arrius is saying and how he takes being left
in the lurch, and who are going to be consuls,
and whether there is any news. I wish you
would write and tell me what day you think
you will leave Rome, so that I may inform
you where I shall be.
15. He told me to do it himself.
13. when we have found out : as to the tense, see 14.
Say ' of how great forces he is in command.'
where to take refuge etc. : say ' whither we must fly, whence we
must look for help.' As to the gerund etc., see 89.
14. doings of the city, res urbanae (urbanus is the adjective of
itrbs).
how does he take being deceived ? quo animo ( = with what feelings)
se deceptum fort ? Turn in the same way ' how he takes being left in
the lurch ' (to leave in the lurch, destitute).
I wish you would write and tell me, velim ad me scribas ; see 122.
IV
THE TENSES
52. A verb represents (i.e. puts before the mind) an
action or a state : currere, the act of running ; valerc,
the state of good health.
For our present purpose the distinction between an
action and a state is of no importance. We shall, there-
fore, generally speak of verbs as representing actions, and
leave the reader to understand thereby actions or states.
By the use of different tenses a speaker represents
an action, as (1) present at the time at which he speaks ;
or (2) past at the time at which he speaks; or (3)
future, i.e. about to happen at a time subsequent to
the time at which he speaks. The tenses, then,
represent an action as taking place at a time present,
past, or future, relatively to the time of speaking: (1)
scribo, I write (now) ; (2) scripsi, I wrote (at a time
which to me now is past) ; (3) scribam, I shall write
(at some time which to me now is future).
Further, the tenses may show the stage of the
action, i.e. the verb may represent the action either
as in progress or as completed. The following tenses
represent the action as in progress : they are called the
tenses of continuance :
In progress in the present, scribo, I am writing.
„ „ past, scribebam, I was writing.
„ „ future, scribam, I shall be writing.
42
LATIN COURSE
The following represent the action as completed ;
they are called the tenses of completion :
Completed in the present, scripsi, I have written.
„ „ past, scripseram, I had written.
„ „ future, scripsero, I shall have
written.
You will observe that the tenses of continuance begin
with scrib-, and the tenses of completion begin with
scrips-.
The speaker may, however, speak of the action
without reference to the stage reached; he may
simply state that the action takes, took, or will take
place :
Indefinite present, scribo, I write.
„ past, scripsi, T wrote.
„ future, scribam, I shall write.
These are called the indefinite or aorist * tenses,
because they do not define the stage of the action.
The following table will make the matter clearer :
The stage of
the action
not denned
The action
represented as
in progress
The action
represented as
completed
Time present
to the speaker
scribo,
I write
scribo,
I am writing
scripsi,
I have written
Time past
to the speaker
scripsi,
I wrote
scribebam,
I was writing
scripseram,
I had written
Time future
to the speaker
scribam,
I shall write
scribam,
I shall be writing
scripsero,
I shall have written
1 Aorist from the Greek ct6/>t0-ros 'indefinite.'
THE TENSES 43
53. The Latin idiom differs greatly from the English
in the use of the tenses in subordinate clauses. The
two principal points of difference are these.
1. If the subordinate clause represents an action
as prior to (that is, completed before) the com-
mencement of the action represented by the verb
of the principal clause, then, in Latin, one of the
tenses of completion is used in the subordinate
clause. As we have seen above, the perfect is used
of an act completed in the present ; the pluperfect of
one completed in the past ; the future perfect of one
completed in the future :
Present. Quae praedicta sunt,ea non semper eveniunt,
What is predicted, does twt always come true.
Past. Qui id fecerant, expulsi sunt, Those who
did it were 'banished.
Future. Qui prior strinxerit ferrum, eius victoria
erit, He who first draws the sword will
be the victor.
The English idiom sometimes shows by the tense
used that the one act is completed before the other
begins, but more often leaves this to be understood
from the context. We may say if we like, ' Those
who had done it were banished,' but in Latin the plu-
perfect must necessarily be used. In case of difficulty
try whether you can introduce the tense of completion
in the English without altering the sense : if you can
say 'what has been predicted,' for 'what is predicted,'
the perfect will be required in Latin. In the same
way in the third example, we do not alter the sense
if we introduce the unidiomatic 'he who shall first
have drawn the sword.'
44 LATIN COURSE
2. If the subordinate clause refers to the future
a future tense is used in Latin : (a) the future
simple to represent an action or state contempora-
neous with the action of the principal verb, (b) the
future perfect when the one action precedes the
other. In English, on the other hand, it is not
idiomatic to use a future tense in a subordinate clause.
(a) Erunt omnia facilia, si valebis, Everything will
be easy, if you are well.
(b) Cum Eomam venero, litteras ad te cotidie
scribam, When I get to Rome, I will write you
a letter every day.
54. The rules given in the preceding section apply
to subordinate sentences in general. It is specially
important to note their application to (1) iterative
sentences, (2) conditional sentences, (3) sentences
introduced by cum, ' when ' :
(1) Iterative sentences are sentences which deal
with the repetition of two acts in connection with one
another an indefinite number of times ; for instance
As often as A occurs, B occurs.
Such sentences are introduced by 'if (ever)/ si: 'when
(ever)/ cum ; ' as often as/ quotiens ; ' who (ever)/ qui-
cumque', 'wherever' ( = whithersoever), quocumque', and
similar expressions.
If the two actions are contemporaneous, the tenses
of continuance are used in both clauses :
Present. Cum can tat, audlmus, Whenever he sings,
we listen.
THE TENSES 45
Past. Cum cantabat, audiebamus, Whenever he
sang, we used to listen.
Future. Cum cantabit, audiemus, Whenever he sings,
we shall (always) listen.
But if the one action precedes the other, the tenses
of completion are used in the subordinate clauses :
Present. Cum cautavit, plaudmius, Whenever he
sings, we clap.
Past. Cum cantaverat, plaudebamus, Whenever
he sang, we dapped.
Future. Cum cantaverit, plaudemus, Whenever he
sings, we shall clap.
55. (2) The rules given in Section 53 will guide
you as to the use of the tenses in those conditional
sentences which take the indicative.
Unless you start at once there is no hope of escape,
Nisi confestim profectus eris, nulla spes est
effugiendi.
If we follow nature as our guide, we shall never go
wrong, Naturarn si sequemur ducem, numquam
aberrabimus. .
The old man used to get angry if I said anything
at all rough, Stomachabatur senex si quid
asperius * dixeram.
You will notice that the first two examples come
under the rule given in 53, 2, and the third is an
iterative sentence like those shown in 54. These are
1 This is the comparative of asper. A comparative is often used in
Latin where in English we might say 'rather rough,' 'a bit rough.'
The meaning is 'rougher than one might expect.' Sometimes the
sense is 'rougher than it ought to be,' ' too rough.'
46 LATIN COURSE
the only two classes of conditional sentences taking
the indicative which present any difficulty : in others
you will have no difficulty as to the tense, as the English
and Latin will correspond ; for instance
If I killed him., I did right ; but I did not kill him,
Si occldi, recte feci ; sed non occidi.
If you are in health, it is well, Si vales, bene est.
As to conditional sentences which require the
subjunctive, see 115, 116.
56. (3) The rules given in Section 53 will guide
you as to the use of the tenses in those sentences in
which cum takes the indicative. Cum takes the in-
dicative (a) in sentences referring to the future, and
(b), as we have already seen, in iterative sentences :
(a) Pecuniam tibi, cum potero, solvam, / will pay
you the money when I can.
Ego tibi solvam cum Titus mihi solverit, / will
pay you when Titus pays me.
(fy ttyges cum anulum converterat a nullo vide-
batur, Whenever Gyges turned his ring round
he was seen by no one.1
Ager cum multos annos quievit uberiores efferre
fruges solet, When a field has rested many
years it generally bears a more abundant crop.
Note the difference between the sentence above and
1 The story of Gyges and the magic ring is given in Cicero de
Officiis, iii. 38. The wearer of the ring became invisible when he
turned it round so that the jewel came to the inner side of the hand.
Cicero's words are 'Cum palam eius anuli ad palmam converterat, a
nullo videbatur, ipse autem omnia videbat' pala is the bezel of the
ring, i.e. the part in which the jewel is fixed.
THE TENSES 47
Gyges cum convertisset anulum a nullo videbatur,
Having turned his ring Gyges was seen ~by no one.
This refers to one particular occasion, whereas cum
converter at refers to any number of occasions.
57. If you have understood what has been said
above you will see that it may be summed up in the
following : Latin expresses more exactly than English
the relation of the action, represented by the verb of a
subordinate sentence, to the action represented by the
verb of the principal sentence. Latin states explicitly,
what we only state by implication, that the action is
future. Latin distinguishes the completed action from
the action in progress in many sentences in which we
should not do so.
When you have to translate, for example, ' when
he comes' into Latin, you must ask yourself (1) Is
the coming future ? (2) Does the coming precede the
other action ? or does it go on at the same time ?
What tense would be used in translating ' comes '
in each of the following sentences ?
(1) When he comes, I always come with him.
(2) When he comes, I shall be set free.
(3) When he comes, we always have a good talk.
(4) When he comes, I shall come with him.
58. We have seen that the present represents an
action as in progress at the time of speaking. Hence
it is also used of an action commenced long ago and
still continuing, especially with iam or iam diu:
lam diu regnat, she has long been queen.
Annum iam sexagesimum tertium regnat, It is the
sixty-third year of her reign, She has been
reigning more than sixty -two years.
48 LATIN COURSE
The imperfect is used in the same way in reference
to the past :
lam diu regnabat, She had long been queen.
The imperfect is used because the reign was still
continuing at the time referred to, just as the present
is used if the reign is still continuing at the time of
speaking.
In sentences of this type English is peculiar.
Compare the French Elle est reine depuis longtemps,
and the Greek Trakat /3acrtXeuet, and the German Sie
ist schon lanye Koniyin. Occasionally we find the
same use of the present in English : ' How does your
honour for this many a day ? ' (Shakespeare).
THE TENSES 49
EXERCISE 3
The subjunctive will not be used in this exercise, except in the
indirect question in sentence 8. The only difficulty lies in the use of
the tenses. Some of the words are not in the dictionary : see 52-68.
1. Whatever he heard and saw would (i.e. used to)
remain fixed in his memory.
2. I am indeed desirous and have long been desirous
to visit Athens.
3. As often as he falls he rises.
4. When you have destroyed Carthage you will be
made dictator, if you escape the impious hands
of your brother.
5. Those who paid the money were set free at once.
6. If (ever) we say anything at all rough, he gets
angry.
*7. If she gives any order we carry it out.
8. Be silent : I will tell you what is to be done —
Speak : I will do what you bid me.
9. Whenever he slept we kept silence.
10. In whichever direction he set off, he kept re-
turning to the same spot.
11. You have long had the wish rather than the
pluck to set yourselves free from Philip.
1. to remain fixed in the memory, haerere ('to stick') in memoria.
2. indeed, equidem.
7. carry out, efficio (3).
10. In whichever direction, Quocumque . . .
• set off: use ire.
return : use revertor (3).
to the same spot, eodem.
11. Say ' You have long wished rather (magis] than dared,'
Philip, Philippus.
50 LATIN COURSE
1 2. When you read this I shall perhaps have had my
interview with Caesar.
13. It was now the twentieth day of our siege of
Ephesus, and there seemed to be no hope of
a surrender.
14. We will go wherever you bid us go, and we will
never return unless you wish it.
15. If you fail to come I shan't be angry with you.
Come when you can.
16. The letters I sent you were not delivered.
17. The man who crushes Antonius will finish the
war.
12. I have an interview with him, convenio (4) eum.
13. siege : use the verb 'besiege.'
and there did not seem, to be any : see 41.
Proper names are not given in the dictionary if the Latin form is
the same as the English, and if the declension is obvious : for instance
Ephesus, Antonius are obviously like dominus.
14. Begin with the relative clause : see 50.
15. ' fail ' may be translated by non : non venit, he failed to come.
16. to send a letter to him, litteras ad eum dare ; to deliver the
letter to him, litteras ei rcddere.
17. crush, opprimo (3), from ob and premo.
TEMPORAL SENTENCES
Postquam, ubi, etc., with Perfect
59. We saw in 53 that in a sentence dealing with
two past actions, one of which is thought of as finished
before the commencement of the other, Latin uses the
pluperfect of the prior action :
Legati quos miserat redierunt, The envoys lie sent
came back.
In English it is often more idiomatic to use the
indefinite perfect (aorist) ' he sent ' than the pluperfect
' he had sent.'
60. This is the general rule in Latin. There is,
however, one important exception : with a large
number of temporal conjunctions the perfect (aorist)
is used in speaking of a particular1 past action.
Among these conjunctions are
ubi, when.
ut, as, when.
postquain, after.
simul ac (atque), ubi primum, as soon as, the moment
that.
priusquam (antequam), before.
1 Contrast the iterative sentences which refer not to a particular
occasion but to an indefinite number of occasions : for instance ' As
soon as he entered we ceased to talk ' refers to a particular occasion ;
' As soon as he entered we always ceased to talk ' is an iterative
sentence. The iterative sentences follow the general rule given in 53.
52 LATIN COURSE
Compare the Greek use of the aorist eiretStj airrjKOev,
'after he went away.' In English sentences of this type
we generally use the indef. perf., less often the pluperf. :
Postquam a nobis discessit a latrone interfectns
est, After he left us (or, had left us), he was
murdered by a highwayman.
Ut equitatum suum pulsurn vidit, acie excessit, When
he saw his cavalry driven back he left the field.1
The adverbs post or posted ( = ' after the time '),
prius or ante ( = ' before the time ') may be separated
from the relative adverb quam ( = ' at which time ') :
Neque prius fugere destiterunt quam ad flu men
Ehenum pervenerunt, And they did not stop
running before [the time (prius) at which time
(quam)] they reached the Rhine.
61. Priusquam, etc., with Subjunctive
In temporal sentences the mood is regularly the indic-
ative, except in oratio obliqua. (See, however, as to cum.}
If a purpose is implied in the temporal clause the
mood is the subjunctive ; this is not uncommon with
antequam and priusqiiam :
Caesar priusquam se hostes ex terrore reciperent
in fines Suessiorium exercitum duxit, Before
the enemy could recover from their panic Caesar
led his army into the territory of the Suessiones.
Here by using the subjunctive the writer tells us that
it was Caesar's purpose to act before the enemy had re-
covered. Contrast priusquam redii discessit, which states
simply that his departure took place before my return.
1 acies means an army drawn up for or engaged in battle : so \ve
may often translate it ' the fight,' ' the battle-field.'
TEMPORAL SENTENCES 53
62. How to translate ' While' ' Until' and the like
If ' while ' means ' during the time that ' (ez/ «),
it is translated by dum with the present indicative
even in reference to past time :
Dum haec aguntur (or geruntur) interea nuntius
advenit, While this was going on a messenger
arrived, or, In the course of these proceedings etc.
In the principal sentence interea (' in the middle
of it,' ' in the meantime ') is often added. When
translating into English it will generally be better not
to attempt to render interea by any separate ex-
pression, as its sense is sufficiently expressed by the
word ' while ' or ' in the course of.' But in translating
into Latin interea should as a rule be expressed with
dum, meaning ' during the time that.'
63. If ' while ' means ' so long as/ ' all the time that '
(eo)?) it is translated by dum or (quamdiu) with the
indicative : present, past, or future tenses are used
according to the meaning. Tam diu ( = ' for so long ')
is often added with the principal verb. The same
tense is generally used in both clauses :
Fuit haec gens fortis dum Lycurgi leges vigebant,
This nation was brave as long as the laws of
Lycurgus were in force.
Tiberius enim Gracchus tarn diu laudabitur, dum
memoria rerum Eomanarum manebit, For
Tiberius Gracchus will be praised as long as the
doings of Home are remembered (lit. as long as
the memory of Roman doings shall remain).
54 LATIN COURSE
64. ' Till ' or ' until ' is generally translated by
dum} The verb will be in the subjunctive (present
or imperfect) if there is any sense of purpose or
expectation ; hence very commonly with exspecto :
Exspectandum est dum redeat, We must wait till
he comes back, or, for him to return.
Dum mihi a te litterae veniant in Italia morabor,
I shall stay in Italy till I get a letter from you.
But if there is no suggestion of purpose or expectation,
the verb will be in the indicative :
Mansit dum ego redii, He stayed there till I came
lack.
This states simply that his stay lasted till the time of
my arrival. Contrast
Mansit dum redirem, He waited for my return.
This implies that his purpose in staying was to
see me.
1 Donee is quite uncommon in classical prose.
TEMPORAL SENTENCES 55
EXERCISE 4
Quern ut vidi, quern ubi vidi, quern cum mdissem give, as nearly as
possible, the same sense.
When possible, do the sentences in more ways than one.
Introduce the connecting relative whenever yon can (see 31, 32).
1. After we had carried off the gold we embarked.
2. When this news was brought, Fabius was appointed
dictator.
3. The moment that the enemy caught sight of our
cavalry, they made a rush and quickly threw
our men into confusion.
4. Some time before he died he gave all his property 1
to me.
5. As soon as the shouting was heard, the soldiers
deserted their posts and fled to the citadel.
6. All the time that we were talking I was looking
out for the messenger.
7. As soon as I looked at you, before you began to
speak, I felt that you were angry.
8. In the course of our talk your letter was delivered
to me.
3. I catch sight of, conspicio.
I throw into confusion, perturbo (1).
our men, nostri.
Arrange the sentence thus : ' The enemy, the moment that they
. ._ ., made a rush and . . .' 'The enemy,' being the subject of the
principal verb, must not be placed in a subordinate clause. You will
often have to apply this rule. We say ' When Caesar had conquered
the Gauls he returned.' What is the Latin order ?
4. Some time before, aliquanto ante (before by a considerable bit).
5. I desert my post, desero stationem ; statio (from stare], the place
where I ought to stand.
7. I look at you, aspicio te.
1 Words printed in italics need not be translated.
56 LATIN COURSE
9. While the elephants were being taken across the
river, Hannibal sent five hundred horsemen
towards the Bom an camp to observe the
position and number of our forces.
10. Perhaps you are waiting for me to' call on you.
I will come when Atticus has left me. Till
he came to me I did not know you had left
Rome.
11. This being the state of affairs, he nevertheless
refrained from action until envoys and letters
reached him from Cneius Pompeius.
12. As long as you are rich you will have many
friends.
13. He made up his mind to attack the city before
Domitius could come to the aid of the citizens.
Accordingly he did not wait for my return.
14. Before they reached Brundisium Pompeius set
sail.
1 5. While the Romans were making these preparations,
Sagimtum was already being attacked.
16. As long as Pompeius was in Italy I did not
cease to hope.
17. We had to start before the enemy could get
information as to our plan.
9. I take the elephants across the river, traicio (fyflumen el&pliantos.
In the passive, eleplianti flumen traiciuntur.
five hundred : the numerals are on p. 308.
I observe (i.e. I spy out, I reconnoitre), specular (1). For the
various ways to express a purpose see 8.
the position and number : say ' where and how great the forces
were. '
10. when Atticus has left : use cum.
11. This being the state of affairs, queue, cum ita esscnt.
I refrain from action, me teneo (I hold myself back).
17. We had to start : use the gerund.
VI
THE CONJUNCTION CUM
65. 1. If 'when' means 'whenever,' 'as often as/
cum is used, as we have seen, with the indicative :
Gyges cum anulum converterat a nullo videbatur,
When ( = If ever) Gyges turned his ring round
he became invisible.
See 53, 54 as to the tenses.
66. 2. If the clause introduced by * when ' refers to
the future, cum is used with the future or future perfect
indicative :
Veniain cum potero, / will come when I can.
Cum Karthaginem deleveris, deligeris consul, When
thou hast destroyed Carthage, thou wilt be chosen
consul.
Veniet cum ego iussero, He will come when Hid him.
Compare 53.
67. 3. Cum meaning ' when ' (not ' whenever ') has
the imperfect or pluperfect subjunctive when the
principal verb is in a historic tense.
Care must be taken to use the right tense, as the
English is often misleading : the imperfect is used to
represent an action as contemporaneous with (i.e. going
58 LATIN COURSE
on at the same time as) that of the principal verb ;
the pluperfect represents an action as prior to (i.e.
finished before) that of the leading verb :
Cum in Africam venissem, Masinissam conveni,
When I reached Africa, I went to see Masinissa.
Cum ad me scriberet, negavit se aegrotare, When he
wrote to me, he said he was not ill.
1 1 reached ' and ' he wrote ' are both the same
tense in English ; but, as we have seen, the Latin
tenses express more exactly than the English the
relation of one action to another. It is clear that the
arrival in Africa precedes the interview with Masinissa,
while the writing of the letter is contemporaneous
with the statement as to the writer's health. This
difference must be expressed in Latin ; it may be
expressed in English : we may say ' when I had
arrived ' and ' when he was writing.'
68. Gum meaning ' since,' ' as,' ' seeing that/ ' con-
sidering that/ ' although ' has the subjunctive :
Quae cum ita sint, proficiscendum est, Since this
is the state of affairs (or, This being the case), we
must start.
Cum dubitaret, ex deo quaesivit, As he was in
doubt (or, Being in doubt), he asked the god.
Nihil me adiuvit, cum posset, He gave me no
help although he had the power to do so, or, at
a time when he had the power to do so.
69. Cum with the subjunctive may often be best
translated into English by the use of a participle, as in
some of the examples above.
THE CONJUNCTION CUM 59
A Latin verb has no past participle active: cum
with the pluperfect subjunctive is often used to supply
its place :
Having arrived, Cum pervenisset.
Having taken the city, Cum urbem cepisset, or Urbe
capta.
70. Cum with the imperfect subjunctive often takes
the place of our present participle. We use our present
participle very freely in agreement with the subject
of the sentence to represent the cause of the action
represented by the principal verb: for instance, 'Feeling
thirsty he asked for water/ 'Thinking I was mistaken
I turned back.' These participles are represented
by cum and the subjunctive in Latin : Cum sitiret
aquam poposcit, Cum putarem me errare reverti.
71. Study the moods and tenses in the following
examples :
1 . Cum anulum convertit (perfect), a nullo videtur,
Whenever he turns his ring he is seen by no one.
2. Cum anulum converterit (fut. perf.), a nullo
videbitur, When he has turned his ring, he
ivill be seen by no one.
3. Cum anulum convertisset, a nullo visus est,
When he had turned his ring (or, Having
turned his ring), he was seen by no one.
4. Cum anulum converterit (perf. subj.), eum videre
non potes, As he has turned the ring you
cannot see him.
Cum anulum convertisset, tamen ab omnibus
visus est, Though he had turned the ring, still
he was seen by every one.
60 LATIN COURSE
72. If you look at the examples in 65, 66 you will see that
cum with the indicative is a purely temporal conjunction, that
is to say it is used to tell us only how one action is related to
another with regard to the time of its occurrence. We might
therefore represent the force of cum with the indicative by such
formulae as
As often as A occurs, so often does B occur,
or, At the time at which A shall (have) happen(ed), at that time
will B happen.
Now if you look at the examples of cwm-sentences in 67, 68
you will see that when cum has the subjunctive it may be
translated by 'when,' 'since/ 'as,' 'although.' One naturally
asks, What is the meaning of cum with the subjunctive which
lies at the bottom of all these different translations'? Cum
with a subjunctive puts before us the circumstances in which
the action represented by the principal verb takes place. For
example, Quae cum facto, essent discessit does not mean ' At the
time at which this had happened he went away,' but ' This
having happened (This being the state of affairs), he went away.'
The participle is often used in English in much the same way
to put the circumstances before us, and therefore often provides, as
we have seen, the nearest equivalent of a cum-clause. Cum may be
translated ' when,' ' since,' ' as,' ' although,' because the circum-
stances may be regarded as simply the occasion of the action
('when'), or as its cause ('since,' 'as'), or even, but less
commonly, as the cause which was insufficient to produce it
(' although ') ; in this last-named case tamen is often added to
make the sense clearer : quae cum facta essent, tamen discessit,
' This having happened, all the same he went away,' ' Although
this had happened he went away.
Hence these are all possible translations of the one sentence
Cum rex mortuus esset fugit :
(1) The king being dead, he ran away ;
(2) On the death of the king, he ran away ;
(3) When the king was dead, he ran away ;
(4) Since (as) the king was dead, he ran away ;
(5) Although the king was dead, he ran away.
In (1) and (2) the English puts the circumstances before us
THE CONJUNCTION CUM 61
without indicating how they are to be regarded ; (3), (4), (5) are
more explicit.
The more advanced student will do well to note that in the
strictly temporal sense cum may be used with any tense of the
indicative (not only in iterative sentences as shown in section 65
and not only in reference to the future as shown in section 66).
For example Cicero writes ' Atque his libris admunerandi sunt
sex de re publica, quos turn scripsimus, cum gubernacula rei
publicae tenebamus, 'And to these books (just mentioned) must
be added the six books Concerning the State which I wrote
at the time when I held the helm of the state.' When
cum is so used it is often preceded by turn or some other word
which directs the attention specially to the time of the occurrence.
Cum with the indicative is used just like a relative1 clause with
the indicative: eo anno cum consul eram = eo anno quo anno
consul eram, 'in the year in which I was consul.' On the other
hand when the subjunctive is used the meaning of the cum-
clause is less definite : the temporal sense is often the most
prominent but other meanings are not excluded. No instances
of cum with the past tenses of the indicative except in the sense
of ' as often as ' will be found in the exercises, but it must not
be supposed that it is uncommon or incorrect. Contrast the
following sentence with the examples given above :
Turn fugit cum rex moriebatur, He ran away at the time when
the king lay dying.
1 Of course cum or quom is connected with qui.
62 LATIN COURSE
HINTS FOR EXERCISE 5
The connecting relative is very common with cum ; see 31, 32 ;
Quo cum in locomanere statuisset, As he had made up his mind to stay
there. Remember that cum ('when ') and qua ('where ') are relative not
interrogative ; see 37. Be careful to use the interrogative words in
the indirect questions in this ex. : 'I don't know when he went away
or where he is,' Quando discesserit, ubi sit nescio.
Quaero means ' to try to find ' ; hence ' to look for,' ' search for ' ;
also ' to try to find out,' hence ' to ask.'
Quaero librum, I am looking for my book ; Quaero ex te ubi sit, I
ask you where it is. Note that Quaero ex te, not Rogo te, is the usual
Latin for 'I ask you (a question)' : the impersonal passive seems at first
a little awkward, ex te quaeritur, ex te quaesitum est, cum ex te
quaesitum esset (when you were asked, being asked).
Remember to use the accusative in Latin when motion is implied :
he came to me in the garden, ad me in hortum venit.
EXERCISE 5
Cum is to be used in every sentence, in some sentences more than once.
1. When you write to your father you will say that
you are now getting better. Ask him when
he is coming to see us.
2. Being uncertain where you were, I did not care to
write a long letter lest our intimate conversa-
tion might come into the hands of other people.
3. When he heard this, he saw that prompt measures
were necessary.
1. dico is used for ' I say ' in writing,
get better : see 'recover.'
2. I did not care to : use nolo.
intimate, familidris.
alius = other ; alienus, belonging to others ; res alienae, the affairs
of other people.
3. audio means I hear with my ears ; cognosco means I hear in the
sense I get to know, I receive information, as in the sentence ' I heard
that you were in town ' ; video means I see with my eyes ; intellego, I
see with my mind, perceive. In this sentence intellego must obviously
be used, and cognosco will give better sense than audio.
prompt measures : say ' he saw that they must act promptly. '
THE CONJUNCTION CUM 63
4. Seeing that he is two days' march away, what
reason is there why you should feel afraid ?
5. Though he might easily have escaped from prison,
Socrates would not do so.
6. It was said that the shrine was not far from
Antioch. When they were searching for it,
they found a Greek statue of marvellous
beauty. When they found this, they brought
it to the Governor in the city.
7. Being asked why he had made a plot against the
Governor, he would not answer.
8. As he would not answer he was thrown into
prison.
9. When I get to my country-house, I do nothing
and am absolutely idle.
10. As we have no soldiers we must carry on the
struggle by craft.
11. Being out of health I decided to go to my country-
house : when I got there I found that the
weather was not good for fishing. So I
amused myself with my books.
12. Being doubtful which had done it, he condemned
them both to death.
1 3. When you have collected the soldiers in one place,
you will be able to start.
4. to be two days' march away, bidui Her abesse (biduum, a period
of two days).
6. it is not far distant from Antioch, non longe abest ab Antiochea.
shrine, aedlcula, diminutive of aedcs, temple,
of marvellous beauty : abl. of quality.
Governor, Praetor, -oris.
9. to be absolutely idle, plane cessare.
10. I struggle, carry on a struggle, contendo (3).
craft, d&lus (2).
11. I fish, pisces capto (1).
64 LATIN COURSE
14. AVhen you write to me write in Latin. I used
to write in Latin when I wrote to my teacher
when I was a boy.
15. Considering that she is more concerned about the
safety of the state than about her own safety,
it is not seemly that we should feel afraid.
16. He said this and then withdrew.
17. Being hungry I returned as quickly as I could.
14. I used to do it when I was a boy, (ego) puer faciebam. puer is
in apposition to the subject : I, a boy, used to do it. So, He did the
same when consul, eadcm consul fecit.
15. ' she ' is emphatic and must be expressed,
to be concerned, perturbari.
16. I withdraw, discedo (3).
VII
THE PARTICIPLES
73. It is not easy to use the participles correctly
and idiomatically. It will save you trouble if you
can get a clear notion as to what participles there are
and what they mean.
1. Transitive Verb. — Vinco (hostem), / conquer
(my enemy}.
Active Voice.
Present Participle. Vincens hostem, (While) con-
quering my enemy.
Perfect Participle. None. [' Having conquered
the enemy ' must be translated by turning it round
into the passive and saying, hoste victo, ' the enemy
having been conquered,' or hostem victum or some other
case as may be necessary to suit the rest of the
sentence, or by a subordinate clause such as cum
hostem vicisset. Beware of writing victus hostem.}
Future Participle. Victurus hostem, Being about
to conquer the enemy.
66 LATIN COURSE
Passive Voice.
Present Participle. None. [You will not feel the
need of one : ' While being led in he asked ' will be
easily turned by a subordinate clause : cum adduceretur
quaesivit.]
Perfect Participle. Victus, Having been conquered.
Future Participle. None.
2. Intransitive Verb. — Venio, / come.
Active Voice.
Present Participle. Veniens, (While) coming.
Perfect Participle. None. [As an intransitive
verb has no passive, except in the impersonal usage,
ventum est, etc., we cannot imitate lioste victo : we
must therefore use a subordinate clause to express the
English ' having come/ cum venisset. Beware of
Writing ventus for * having come.']
Deponent verbs, whether transitive like sequor, or
intransitive like morior, have all three participles and
are therefore the easiest to use :
Present Participle. Sequens, (while) following.
Past Participle. Secutus, having followed.
Future Participle. Secuturus, about to follow.
74. The present participle in Latin represents an
action as contemporaneous with the action of the
principal verb : for instance the sentence flens oravit
auxilium, ' shedding tears he begged for help/ tells us
that the weeping and the begging for help went on at
the same time. The English participle in -ing some-
times represents, like the Latin present participle,
contemporaneous action, sometimes prior action : we
THE PARTICIPLES 67
say, for instance, ' Hearing this he went away '
meaning that he went away after he had heard it :
in Latin audiens discessit would mean ' he went off
listening/ Again, ' Being defeated he was put to
death ' evidently means ' he was defeated and then
put to death,' Viet us interfectus est. As a practical
rule, do not use the present participle in Latin
unless you can express the English with ' while.'
75. There are one or two verbs which form an
apparent exception to this rule : it is quite correct to
write Mihi qnaerenti respondit, ( On my asking this he
answered,' though obviously the asking precedes the
answering, and one would expect Quod cum quaesivissem
respondit. The reason appears to be that quaero does
not correspond exactly to / ask but means rather /
try to find out so that Mihi quaerenti respondit means
'When I was trying to find out he answered.' Peto,
' I ask for, I try to get,' is used in the same way.
76. The above hints may help you to answer the
question, What participle, if any, ought I to use ?
Present or past ? Active or passive ? We now pass
on to another difficulty : What case is the participle
to be put in ? The ablative absolute occurs so
frequently that many students fall into the mistake
of putting the ablative where some other case ought
to be used. ' When I was walking in he stepped out '
must be Me ingrediente egressus est. With this
ablative absolute contrast the five following sentences,
and see if you understand why the ablative absolute
would be impossible in any of them : note that the
wording of the English will not help you.
68 LATIN COURSE
Nbm. When I was walking in I saw him,
Ingrediens vidi euni. [Here the participle
agrees with ego implied in vidiJ]
Ace. When I icas walking in he saw me, Ingredi-
entem me vidit. [Here the participle agrees
with me which is the object of vidit. ~\
Gen. When he was walking in I caught sight of
his head, Ingredientis vidi caput.
Dat. When he was walking in I gave him the
letter, Ingredienti epistulam dedi.
Abl. (but not abl. abs.) He was seen by his daughter
as she came in, Ab ingredieiite filia visus est.
Only use the ablative absolute when you cannot
work the participle into the construction of the
sentence. The ablative absolute is a parenthesis, put
into the sentence, never making a part of the con-
struction : it may be shut off by commas : Ille, me
ingrediente, egressus est. In the other five sentences it
is impossible to put a comma anywhere.
77. The participle is used in Latin in many
sentences in which it would not be correct, or at
any rate not idiomatic, to use a participle in English.
Some of the more common ways of rendering the
Latin participle are collected here :
(a) Sometimes, of course, we use a participle in
English :
The envoys sent by Antonius bring word, Legati ab
Antonio missi nuntiant.
They approach him begging and imploring . . .,
Adeunt orantes atque obsecrantes.
THE PARTICIPLES 69
77 (continued)
(b) Sometimes we add ' while ' or ' when ' or ' if to
the English participle :
While watching over the king he was also a protection
to us, Eegem tuens et nobis praesidio erat.
When caught (or, If caught) he will not be dangerous
to you, Captus periculo vobis non erit.
(c) We often translate a Latin participle by a
subordinate clause :
1. A relative clause.
The envoys who had been sent by Pompeius brought
word, Legati a Pompeio missi nuntiaverunt.
/ obey a voice which never urges me on, but often calls
me back, Pareo diviuae cuidam voci nunquam
impellent!, saepe revocanti.
2. A clause introduced by ' when/ ' while/ ' now
that/ ' after/ ' as ' ( = ' when ') etc. :
When I was questioning him he made no answer,
Quaerenti mihi nihil respondit.
Now that the ships are burned they cannot go back,
Navibus incensis redire non possunt.
Now the king is dead, Eege mortuo.
When he was on his way back I saw him, Eedeuntem
vidi.
The city was founded by Aeneas as he was flying
from Troy, Urbs ab Aenea a Troia fugiente
condita est.
As I was returning he told me, Mihi redeunti
nuntiavit.
70 LATIN COURSE
77 (continued)
3. A clause introduced by ' as ' ( = ' because ' ) :
As he was driven back from Antioch he lost hope,
Ab Antiochea reiectus desperavit.
As I heard no voice I began to feel afraid, Nulla
voce audita pertimescebam.
4. A clause introduced by ' though ' :
Though she tried to speak she could not, Conata
loqui non potuit.
Though he ivas driven back he did not lose hope,
Eeiectus non desperavit.
5. A clause introduced by 'if ' :
If you are beaten you will not be allowed to enter the
city, Victo in urbem redire non licebit.
Many of these sentences might be expressed as well
by subordinate sentences in Latin. We may say for
instance
Si victus eris in urbein tibi redire non licebit.
This is very much like
Victo in urbem redire non licebit.
but, obviously, there is a difference. We cannot say
which is the better way of translating the sentence
into Latin without seeing the context from which it
is taken. No rules can be given to guide you as to
whether you should translate by a participle or a
subordinate clause ; the participle is generally to be
preferred, provided that it makes the meaning quite clear.
(d) We often translate the participle by a co-
ordinate clause :
He took the city and burned it, Urbem captam
incendit.
THE PARTICIPLES 71
77 (continued)
I tried but was not successful, Conatus nihil effeci.
So they brought him the book and he read it, or, So
the book was brought and he read it, Itaque
librum ad-latum legit.
Here the English construction cannot be imitated
in Latin : urbem cepit et incendit is not good Latin ;
et is not used to connect verbs in this way. If a
participle cannot be used in a sentence of this type
you should turn it by a subordinate clause :
He arrived there and ordered . . ., Quo cum venisset
imperavit . . .
(e) An abstract substantive is often the best
English equivalent :
After the capture of the city he dismissed his men
to their winter-quarters, Urbe capta milites in
hiberna dimisit.
The news of the victory reassured the citizens, Nuntiata
victoria firmiores fecit civium animos.
With the help of his mother, Adiuvante matre.
Since the foundation of the city, Post conditam urbem.
(/) Miscellaneous translations :
With tears he begged for help, Flens oravit auxilium.
They fled in terror, Perterriti fugerunt.
In my sleep he appeared to me, Dormienti mihi
visus est.
Without success, or, Unsuccessful, Be infecta (the
thing not being accomplished : from in, not
and facio).
72 LATIN COURSE
78. We often use a present participle in English
agreeing with the subject of the sentence to represent
the cause of the action ; we say, for instance, ' Being
unable to go out I sent a note/ ' Being doubtful who
had done it he acquitted them all.' In sentences of
this type the usual Latin equivalent of our present
participle is cum with the subjunctive : Cum ipse exire
non possem epistulam misi, Cum dubitaret quis fecisset
absolvit omnes. In the same way
Seeing, cum vidisset (i.e. w/ien he had seen with his
eyes), or cum intellexisset (i.e. when he had
understood}.
Thinking, cum putaret (i.e. because he was thinking).
Contrast the following sentences in which the
present participle is rightly used : notice that it does
not represent the cause :
Dixit ridens, He said with a smile.
Per Graeciam iter faciens Athenas venit, While
marching through Greece he came to Athens.
79. The perfect participles of many deponent verbs
are used where we might expect the present :
arbitratus, thinking (having come to the conclusion),
veritus, fearing (having got into a fright},
admiratus, ivondering (having been startled).
These are often used to represent the cause :
Thinking it undesirable, to linger he set off, Non
morandum esse arbitratus profectus est.
THE PARTICIPLES 73
EXERCISE 6
A participle is to be used in each sentence.
1. He had his dinner and went away to bed.
2. When I was asleep my mother appeared to me.
3. Terrified by the dream I fled.
4. We attacked the enemy and beat them.
5. With tears they begged me to protect them.
6. The news of the arrival of Pompeius will reassure
every one.
7. So the prisoner was brought in and said that the
enemy had no hope of victory.
8. When the letter was brought in no one could read
it.
9. We delivered the letter and at once left the
house.
10. He kissed his mother and begged her to give him
some money : he had, he said, been away from
home three months, but he had let no day
pass without writing to her.
11. Touched by his prayers she ordered money to be
brought.
I. The verb ceno (1), 'I have dinner,' has a deponent participle,
cenatus, 'having dined.'
I go away to bed, cubitum discedo : cubitum is the supine of cubare,
'to lie down,' so the phrase means literally ' I go away in order to lie
down.'
5. to protect them : see note on se and eum (33-35).
7. to bring a man in, adducere (to lead).
8. to bring a thing in, ad-ferre (to carry).
10. Omit 'he said,' which is implied in 'begged' : use the accusative
and infinitive as you would if dixit were expressed.
I let no day pass without thinking, nullum diem esse patior quin
putem.
II. Touched: pay 'moved,
prayers, preces (3).
74 LATIN COURSE
12. When the money was brought by the servant she
gave it to the boy.
13. Since the expulsion of the kings, since the libera-
tion of the state by Brutus, no one has been
called king.
14. If he is beaten he will not be willing to return.
15. They said that he had been murdered and thrown
into a cart.
16. In answer to my questions the servant said she
was not at home.
17. Such was his influence that even in his absence
we could not resist him.
18. When he reached Rhodes on his way back from
Syria he heard that Clodius had been killed
by Milo.
19. After killing the traveller he robbed him of his
clothes.
20. Though acquitted of the capital offence he was
kept five years in prison.
13. Use expello and libero (1).
15. cart, plaustrum.
17. influence, auctoritas.
18. Rhodes, Rhodus, a small island ; see 2.
Milo, Milo, -onis.
THE PARTICIPLES 75
EXERCISE 7
A participle is to be used in each sentence.
1. When I warned you not to give him anything you
did not believe me.
2. He would not listen to me when I was warning
him that plots were being made against the
king.
3. Being warned of these dangers I thought it best
to go away as quickly as possible.
4. When the plot was disclosed they begged the king
to pardon them : if he would spare them they
would go away and never return.
5. Moved by fear of the danger hanging over him
he summoned the leading men of the state to
his presence.
6. I was warned by a traveller who was passing that
my house was on fire. I do not know who
set it on fire.
7. He advanced to the river and pitched his camp.
Moneo tc de 2wriculo, I warn you of the danger.
Moneo te eumfugisse, I warn you that he has fled.
Moneo te ne eas, I warn you not to go.
Moneo te quid sit faciendum-, I warn you what to do.
Insidias facio tibi, I make a plot against you.
Pate-facio, I disclose (from patere, ' to lie open ' ; hence, ' I cause
it to lie open, I make it clear'),
to be on fire, flagrdre.
to set on fire, incendZre.
to put in chains, vincire.
to flog, virgis caede're (to beat with rods).
3. it is best to go : use the gerund.
4. if he would . . . : this is oratio obliqua depending on 'they
said' which is implied in 'they begged.' See 27.
and never : not et numquam ; see 41.
76 LATIN COURSE
8. In the month of November he finished the war
and dismissed his army to their winter-
quarters: he himself started for Italy without
delay.
9. As we disembarked he came to meet us.
10. He concealed his hatred and pretended that he
was friendly to us.
11. Considering that an inquiry is being held as to
the murder of a fellow -creature it is not
seemly to laugh.
12. What shall I say of Socrates, over whose death I
am wont to shed tears as I read Plato ?
13. When I was at Tusculum, a boy sent from Eome
by your sister handed me a letter which had
been brought to her from you, and gave me
a message that the courier would set off from
Eome to you that very day. Hence I was
compelled to write a very short letter.
14. If you go in you won't be allowed to come out.
15. Orders were given that he should be put in chains
and flogged.
8. For the names of the months see 163.
11. I hold an inquiry as to, quaero de . . .
fellow-creature, homo.
12. I shed tears over the death, tnorti illacrimor.
13. at Tusculnm, in Tusculano (more literally, on my Tusculan
estate).
handed = ' gave. '
courier, tabellarius (letter-carrier).
Hence : say ' Thus it resulted,' eofactum eat.
14. Use ingredior and egredior, compounds of gradior (3), ' to step.'
The English sentence contains eleven words: the Latin will have four.
THE PARTICIPLES 77
EXERCISE 8
In this exercise use a participle whenever you can. Do not suppose
that an English participle can always be represented by a Latin
participle. For instance, if you want to translate ' Having reached
his home he gave the message ' you may feel that a participle ought to
be used to translate ' Having reached ' ; but as pervenire has no past
participle you must write Cum domum pervenisset.
1. Eising from my bed I ran to the window.
2. When the theft was discovered we hurried to the
city to inform the praetor. Arrived there
we heard that the thief had already been
arrested and flogged.
3. He replied with a smile that the king on receipt
of this message had shut himself up in prison.
4. The next day having reached Paris we received
your letter,
o. We seized the bridge and sent horsemen to look
•for the Britons. And they when they saw
the number of our soldiers were panic-stricken
and gave themselves up.
6. Why did you not listen to my advice ? When
you were going out I told you some trouble
was impending.
thief, fur.
theft, furtum.
discover, cognosce (3).
arrest, capio (3).
I shut him up in, includo (3) eum in (ace.).
5. look for, quacro.
6. Say ' why didn't you obey me when I gave you advice ? For
when you were going out . . .' The connecting link enim (which is
placed after the first word) is necessary in Latin.
78 LATIN COURSE
7. And so though he summoned them all to his
presence, he could not find out how large the
island was nor what kind of men inhabited it.
8. Wishing to provide for the safety of his wife and
children he retired. The result was that the
whole province revolted.
9. Having recovered from this illness he sailed to
Italy. Arrived there he spent many days
in visiting the most beautiful cities of that
country.
10. Being unable to find out where he was lingering,
I decided it was my duty to act without
delay and not to wait for his return.
11. Caesar gave orders that he should encamp near
Ravenna, repair his ships and follow him to
Greece.
12. Finding they could do nothing they retired, and
none of them could be persuaded to make a
second attempt.
13. Thinking that it would be impossible to finish the
war before the winter, he arranged terms of
peace.
7. Arrange thus : ' neither how great was the size of the island, nor
what kind of (qualis) men inhabited it could he find out.'
9. Say ' in visiting (gerundive) the cities which that country has
most beautiful.'
10. duty : express by the gerund ; see 89.
12. find : use intellego.
do, efficio.
be persuaded to : see 3 and 10.
I make a second attempt,! try again, iterum experior (4).
VIII
THE INFINITIVE, GERUND AND GERUNDIVE
80. Incunduni est legere, Reading is pleasant.
Hie sedet legens, Here he sits reading.
If you compare these two sentences you will see
that the word ' reading ' is used in two different senses.
In the first it is a substantive, meaning the act of
reading; in the second it is an adjective, meaning
engaged in reading. It is not difficult to distinguish
these two uses of the English words ending in -ing ;
if you feel at all doubtful as to whether you have
a verbal substantive or a participle before you, you
should try whether you can put before the word
ending in -ing such an expression as ' the act of/ ' the
habit of,' ' the pursuit of ' : if any such expression can
be added, without altering the sense, you have clearly
the substantive not the adjective ; for example [' the
pursuit of] learning is difficult/ [' the habit of] lying
is disgraceful/ The words added in brackets clearly
do not alter the meaning, so you may conclude that
' learning ' and ' lying ' are here used as substantives
and translate discere est difficile, turpe est mentiri.
If the word ending in -ing is a participle you cannot
add such an expression as ' the act of ' without alter-
ing or destroying the meaning ; for instance, ' He sits
here [the act of] reading ' is clearly not sense.
If you have understood the above you will see why the
following argument is false : ' Elding is pleasant. I am
riding. Therefore I am pleasant.' Of course this is ridi-
culous, but do you see exactly where the argument fails?
80 LATIN COURSE
81. In Latin the infinitive is used as a substantive
in the nominative or accusative case, but it cannot
be used with prepositions :
Nom. Discere est difficile, Learning is difficult.
Ace, Cupimus discere, We desire to learn.
With the latter sentence compare Cupim,uspecuniam,
' we desire money/ and observe that discere is the
object of cupimus, just as pecuniam is.
The infinitive though used as a substantive is still
a verb and may govern a case :
Aurum habere praeclarum mihi videtur, The pos-
session of gold (the having gold) seems a fine thing
to me. [Habere is the subject of the sentence.]
Cupit habere aurum, He desires the possession of
gold. [Habere is the object of cupit.]
In both -sentences aurum is the object of habere;
in both habere is used as a substantive, in the first in
the nominative, in the second in the accusative case.
The infinitive is used as a substantive only in the
nominative and accusative cases ; the other cases are
supplied by the gerund, and the gerund is used with
prepositions ; we say ad discendum, ' with a view to
learning,' not ad discere.
We may, therefore, show the declension of the
verbal substantive thus :
Nom. Mentiri est inhonestum, Lying is dishonour-
able.
Ace. Cupit mentiri, He wants to lie.
Propensus est ad mentiendum, He has pro-
pensities towards lying, He has a tendency to
tell lies.
THE GERUND AND GERUNDIVE 81
Gen. Cupidus est mentiendi, He is desirous of lying,
He is longing to lie.
Dat. Operani dat mentiendo, He gives his attention
to lying, He takes trouble about it.
Abl. Patrem mentiendo decipit, He deceives his
father ~by lying.
The dative is very uncommon. Ad with the
accusative, in with the ablative, arid causa wilh the
genitive are very common. Some prepositions are not
used with the gerund : you cannot say Sine rogando
for ' without asking.'
82. The gerund may be used intransitively, i.e.
without an accusative object, or it may have . such
an object, provided that it is a neuter pronoun or
adjective : aliquid rescribendi causa, ' for the sake of
sending you some answer/ ad plnra scribendum, ' with
a view to writing more.'
If the object is not a neuter adjective or pronoun,
the gerundive generally * takes the place of the gerund
and attracts the substantive or pronoun into agree-
ment with it. So instead of
epistulam scribendi causa
write
epistulae scribendae causa, with a mew to writing
a letter.
The meaning is the same ; the gerund is the sub-
stantival, the gerundive the adjectival form.
Examples :
Vincendi causa, For the sake of winning the victory.
1 After a preposition invariably
G
82 LATIN COURSE
Potestatem mihi facit adeundi ad filiam, He grants
me permission to go to see my daughter (more
literally, he gives me the power of going etc.).
Beate vivendi cupiditate inceosi omries sumus, Every
one of us burns with the longing for a happy life.
Eeginae vincendae causa, In order to conquer the queen.
Occasio defendendae urbis, An opportunity of (or,
for) defending the city.
In agris vastandis decem dies consumpsit, He spent
ten days in devastating the country.
Ad se conservandam, With a view to securing her
own safety.
Sui conservandi causa, With a view to securing his
(or, her) own safety}
Only the direct (i.e. accusative) object of a verb
can be attracted. We write navium parandarum causa,
' with a view to getting the vessels ready/ instead of
naves parandi causa. But we could not imitate this
attraction with such a verb as pareo, which has an
indirect (i.e. dative) object ; we must write Deis parendi
causa, ' with a view to obeying the gods.' In fact a
verb used intransitively has no gerundive form?
1 Mei, tui, sui, nostri, vcstri were originally neuter forms, the
genitives of meum, tuum etc. Hence the gerundive in agreement with
them is always in the neuter singular. Therefore write Tui videndi
occasio, 'an opportunity of seeing you,' whether the person referred
to as ' you ' be masculine or feminine, and nostri videndi occasio, not
nostri videndorum occasio, in spite of the plural meaning of nostri.
2 The more advanced student should note that there are a few
exceptions to this rule : utor, fruor, fungor, potior, vcscor, though
they govern the ablative, have gerundives like transitive verbs ; for
instance, Tcnendus est voluptatis fruendac modus ; In spcm vcnerant
potiundorum aistrorum. But these gerundives are not used as
predicates with the verb 'to be ' : utendum est aetate, not utenda
est aetas.
THE GERUND AND GERUNDIVE 83
EXERCISE 9
1 . Not the possession of gold, but the holding sway over
those who possess gold, seems a fine thing to me.
2. Teaching is difficult, learning is easy.
3. We learn by teaching. By teaching boys we
ourselves learn.
4. We spent ten days in making the bridge.
5. To err is human, to forgive divine.
6. We were compelled to wait several days in order
to repair the ships.
7. While I was in prison I was not granted per-
mission to write a letter.
8. They hoped by the murder of Caesar to set their
country free.
9. When I saw him setting off, I thought it was an
excellent opportunity for escape.
10. When all preparations had been made for setting
off the weather was not suitable for a voyage.
11. Do we not all long for a good and happy life ?
12. Everything is ready for an attack on the city.
13. I am longing to see you, my dear Tulliola.
Many of the words for this exercise will be found in 80-82, but not
in the dictionary. Use the gerund or gerundive when possible.
1. I hold sway over, impero (dative).
5. ' It is tlie way of men to err, of the gods to pardon those who
have erred.'
6. wait, morari.
several : ' not a few. '
in order to repair : ' for the sake (causa) of repairing.'
8. the murder of Caesar : use the verb interficio. You will often
find that Latin uses the gerund or gerundive or past participle where
we use a substantive. Bear this in mind in doing the following
sentences.
13. I am longing : use cupidus sum with genitive
my dear Tulliola, Tulliola mea.
84 LATIN COURSE
14. When he asked whether we had come to hear
Antonius, we replied, "We have come with
the object of hearing, not Antonius, but you."
15. Is not the mind of man nourished by learning
and thought ? Is not the greatest pleasure
got from learning ?
16. He seems to have a bent, not only for learning,
but also for teaching.
17. On being asked why he had learned nothing, he
replied that he had had no opportunity for
reading.
18. Does the art of living seem difficult to you?
To kill one's self, what is it but to leave one's
post without the orders of the General ?
19. If an opportunity were offered me for setting
my country free, I would eagerly seize it.
14. with the object, causa
15. thought, i.e. reflection : use cogito (1).
I get the greatest pleasure from, capio summam voluptatem ex . . .
16. propensus ad, inclined towards, having a bent for, or prone to :
participle from propendere.
17. for reading : genitive.
18. what is it but . . ., quid aliud est nisi . . .
I leave my post . . . , de statione decedo (3).
19. offer, dare.
eagerly,, avide.
seize, arripio (3).
THE GERUND AND GERUNDIVE 85
THE GERUND AND GERUNDIVE USED AS PREDICATES
83. We have seen that the gerund and gerundive
are used in the accusative with prepositions, and in
the genitive, dative, and ablative to supply those cases
of the verbal substantive.
We shall now see that the nominative case and
the accusative without a preposition are used in a
different way.
The nominative. The gerund and gerundive are
used in the nominative with the verb 'to be ' to
signify obligation, necessity, duty, and similar ideas.
For instance
(a) Proficiscendum est, A start must be made.
(b) Epistula scribenda est, A letter should be written.
84. If the verb is used intransitively1 the gerund is
used as in (a) ; if the verb is used transitively (as
scribo epistulam ; passive, epistula scribitur], the gerun-
dive is used as in (b). Remember that the same verb
may be used either transitively or intransitively : for
instance if I say scribo, ' I am writing,' I use scribo
intransitively (just like morior, ' I am dying ') and so I
should say scribendum est, ' I must write ' : but it would
not be good Latin to say scribendum est epistulas.
It will save trouble if you realise that no intransi-
tive verb has a gerundive (for our present purpose we
may ignore the exceptions mentioned in the note on
p. 82, n. 2), and that the gerundive belonging to a transi-
tive verb can only be used when the verb is used in a
transitive sense.
1 Compare 3.
86 LATIN COURSE
Intransitive Verb
Active. Ambulo, / am walking.
Passive (impersonal). Ambulatur, A walk is going on.
Gerund (impersonal). Ambulandum est (mihi), A
walk is necessary (for me}.
Transitive Verb
Active. Scribo epistulam, / am writing a letter.
Passive (personal). Epistula scribitur, A letter is
being written.
Gerundive (personal). Epistula scribenda est, A letter
ought to be written.
The same verb used intransitively
Active. Scribo, / am writing.
Gerund (impersonal). Scribendum est (mihi), Writing
is necessary (for me), I must
write.
85. The accusative. After a verb of saying or
thinking the verb 'to be ' will, of course, be in the
infinitive, and the gerund or gerundive in the
accusative.
Dixit proficiscendum esse, He said a start should
be made.
Putavit epistulam esse scribendam, He thought that
a letter ought to be written.
86. In this kind of sentence the gerund and
gerundive are used as predicates : in epistula scribenda
est, for instance, epistula is the subject and scribenda est
the predicate, i.e. that which is said about the subject.
The gerundive is most commonly used as a pre-
THE GERUND AND GERUNDIVE 87
dicate with the verb ' to be ' : it is also so used with
some other verbs, such as dare, ' to give/ curare, ' to take
care that . . .'
Epistulam mihi legendaiu dedit, He gave me the
letter to read (He gave me the letter : it was to
le read}.
Epistulam mittendam curavit, He had the letter sent.
Curo is of course connected with the substantive cura :
compare the phrase Id mihi curae est, ' It is to me an object of
care, I am anxious about it.' Curo may be followed by the
gerundive or by ut. With the gerundive curare corresponds to
the English * have,' in such a sentence as
He had the dinner prepared (i.e. caused it to be prepared), Cenam
parandam curavit.
87. With the gerund and gerundive the agent is
generally put in the dative :
Eundum est mihi, / must go.
Eundum est tibi, You must go.
Eundum est ei, He must go.
Eundum est nobis, etc.
Urbs mihi capienda est, / must take the city,
Urbs tibi capienda est, You must take the city ;
and so on.
But if the verb is accompanied by another dative,
the agent is expressed by a, ab with the ablative in order
to avoid ambiguity. You must not write Pecunia
danda est tibi mihi, for it will not be clear whether
you mean ' You ought to give the money to me ' or ' I
ought to give the money to you.' Write, therefore,
if you mean the latter, Pecunia tibi a me danda est.
In the same way do not write Parcendum est ei nobis
for ' We must spare him/ but Parcendum est ei a nobis.
LATIN COURSE
88. Beware of writing eundus sum for ' I ought to
go/ or vincendus sum for 'I ought to conquer/ Eundum
est mihi really means ' there's a journey for me ' ; hence
comes the sense a journey is for me a necessity or
a duty, but you will find it convenient to regard (he
form as a passive and to translate it to yourself as
' A journey ought to be made by me ' : by paraphrasing
thus you will make it impossible to fall into the
blunder eundus sum. The gerundive used as a
predicate is passive, even from deponents : so, of course,
' I ought to conquer the Gauls ' must be rendered
vincendi sunt Galli mihi, ' The Gauls ought to be con-
quered by me ' (more exactly, ' For me the Gauls are
meet to be conquered '). The mistake referred to is
common because the gerund and gerundive, when used
in the way shown in 80-82, are translated by the
active in English : for instance, Causa eundi erat, ( The
reason for going was . . . ' : Spes vincendi Caesaris, ' The
hope of conquering Caesar.'
89. A few examples will make the matter clearer :
note in what various ways the gerund and gerundive
are rendered in English : ' I had better/ ' I ought/ ' it
is my duty/ 'it is necessary/ etc.
Eedeundum esse putavi, I thought it my duty to
return.
Intellexi proficiscendum esse, / saw that I ought to
start.
Statui exspectandum esse, / decided that I had
letter wait.
Non diutius morandum esse arbitratus, Thinking it
right to delay no longer.
THE GERUND AND GERUNDIVE 89
Hostium audaciam comprimendam esse dixit, He
said that the audacity of the enemy must be
crushed.
Nihil temere agendum est, We must not act rashly.
Non credendum est homini, The fellow is not to be
trusted.
90 LATIN COURSE
EXERCISE 10
1. We must either win or die.
2. If I forgive you, you must spare him.
3. When I heard this I decided that it was my duty
to wait for Bibulus to arrive. In the mean-
time I thought it right to send you this
information.
4. I will have your books returned to you. Don't
you think I am to be trusted ?
5. Each man should use his own judgment.
6. He teaches us that we should forget wrongs done
to us.
7. He should be encouraged not to let the oppor-
tunity slip away
8. Do we not all think fame preferable to wealth ?
9. If he wins he will give the soldiers the city to
plunder : do you really think that it is for us
to help him ?
10. Have we not learned from our fathers that we
must not act treacherously, that we must
conquer our foes by valour not by wickedness ?
2. ' must ' is here future, ' you will have to spare. '
3. send information, scribo. In this exercise use the gerund or
gerundive whenever it is possible. Many of the sentences could, of
course, be done in other ways.
5. Each man, quisque. Note the position of quisque in this
sentence : Suum quisque noscat ingenium, Let each man know his own
nature ; see 46.
6. say ' wrongs received ' (accipio).
7. I let ... slip away, dimitto. Mitto means 'to let go' as well as
' to send ' : hence the sense of amitto, to lose.
8. Use prae-pono for ' I prefer.'
10. treacherously : abl. of insidiac, treachery.
THE GERUND AND GERUNDIVE 91
11. He gave up the dead body of Eumenes to his
friends for burial.
12. To me, however, it seems that death is even to be
longed for. Either I must die or I must live
in a free state.
13. If the Gauls attempt to make war we shall have
to summon C. Marius from the lower world
to command our forces.
14. I will have a bridge made across the river, that
you may come to me the more easily.
15. This done I handed over the army to my brother
Quintus to take to their winter-quarters. 1
returned to Laodicea.
11. I give up (i.e. to hand over), trado.
say ' the dead Eumenes. '
sepelire, to bury.
12. optare, to long for.
13. excltare, to summon.
from the lower world, ab inferis (from the people down below),
to command : use qui with subj. ; see 8.
14. pontcm facio in flumine.
15. hand over, dare.
I take : meaning ' I lead,' duco.
I returned : ' I ' must be translated ; see 47.
92 LATIN COURSE
EXERCISE 11
Do not use the dictionary more than you are obliged but try to
think of the words for yourself. In this exercise, for example, do not
look up ' departure ' but think what it means : of course, it will be
translated by a verb. You probably know the Latin for to
' commence ' : if not, you must think of some other English word
which has the same meaning and look that up. In the same way
you will probably be able to get the word for to ' get better. '
1 . We must make all preparations for departure, even
though we are doubtful in which direction we
are to march.
2. Neither Pompeius nor Caesar is to be trusted :
you must not act rashly, but you must wait
till you know which is going to win. When
you have discovered this, then but not before
you must praise the one and blame the other.
3. Having at last made up his mind to start he had
everything taken on board the ship. The
following morning as he could not set sail,
the wind being against him, he returned to
Athens and spent three days in visiting the
temples.
4. I have no doubt he has told you that Julia is out
of health. That was the reason of our coming
to Italy. We have been staying here now
more than five months. The doctor says we
must remain till she gets better. Meanwhile
I have much to write.
1. even though : say 'even if.'
in which direction: say 'whither.'
2. then but not before, turn vero (then of a truth).
4. I am out ofjiealth, infirma valetudine sum (I am in weak health).
We have been staying . . . : see 58.
to write : use the relative : see 157.
THE GERUND AND GERUNDIVE 93
5. When they heard this they all began to shout
that the poor wretch should be spared.
6. I recommend you to say to yourself every day
that a hot temper is to be resisted.
7. He burned his ships so that there might be no
hope of returning home, and commenced his
advance into the country of the Indians.
8. As he had gone out for a walk I could not see him.
9. We spent many days in making preparations for
wintering on the island ; for there seemed
now to be no hope of sailing till the summer
returned.
6. say to yourself : use meditor (1).
hot temper, iracundia.
IX
THE INFINITIVE USED AS A SUBSTANTIVE (continued)
90. We have seen that the infinitive is used as a
substantive in the nominative or accusative case :
1. Norn. Vivere dulce est, Life is sweet, It is sweet
to live (almost equivalent to Vita est dulcis).
2. Ace. Cupit mori, He desires to die (not very
different from Cupit mortem).
It is evident that in (1) vivere is the subject of est,
and that in (2) mori is the object of cupit.
In some respects, then, the infinitive is like other substan-
tives. But there is this important difference : with the
infinitive a subject is implied, if not expressed. If, for example,
we translate the sentence Timere est turpe, l Fear is disgraceful,'
we do not completely express the meaning of timere. If we say
4 It is disgraceful that one should feel afraid ' or * for a man to
feel afraid ' we render by the words ' one ' or ' a man ' the
indefinite subject of timere. In other words the infinitive timere
like the indicative timet makes a statement about a subject : it
puts before the mind the union of two ideas — subject, some one ;
predicate, fear. But the statement is dependent, it cannot stand
alone, just as the English 'that a man should feel afraid ' cannot
stand alone. This is the essential difference between the infinitive
and other substantives. Now compare the two sentences.
Magnus timor hostium est turpis, Great fear of the enemy is
disgraceful.
Magnopere timere hostes est turpe, To greatly fear the
enemy is disgraceful.
You will notice that the infinitive, like the other parts of
the verb, has an adverbial attribute (magnopere), whereas other
THE INFINITIVE AS SUBJECT 95
substantives have adjectival attributes (magnus). The infinitive
governs the same case as the rest of the verb (hostes, ace.), other
substantives govern a genitive (hostiurri). Further, the infinitive
may be active or passive : timere, ' the feeling afraid of,' timeri,
'the being feared by.' Compare with these two forms the
expression timor hostium which may mean ' the fear one feels of
the enemy ' ( = timere hostes), or ' the fear felt by the enemy ' ( =
timeri ab hostibux). Lastly the infinitive has different tenses :
Non tain turpe fuit vinci quam contendisse decorum est, There
was not so much disgrace in being beaten, as there is honour
in having struggled (It was not disgraceful to be suffer-
ing defeat : it is an honour to have struggled).
THE INFINITIVE AS SUBJECT
91. 1. The simple infinitive may be the subject of
the sentence
Manere optimum est, It is best to stay.
Here manere is the subject to est.
2. The subject of the infinitive, if expressed, is in
the accusative case :
Me manere est optimum, It is lest that I should stay.
Here me is the subject to manere, and the clause me
manere is the subject to est.
3. If the subject of the infinitive is not expressed
it is understood in the accusative case : auy word
agreeing with the subject of the infinitive will, of
course, be in the accusative :
Manere solum est optimum, It is best to remain alone.
Here the clause manere solum is the subject to est :
the subject of manere is not expressed : solum is in the
accusative because it is a predicate agreeing with the
subject of manere, which is either quite indefinite or
is supplied by the context.
96 LATIN COURSE
92. You will notice that when the subject of the
infinitive is not expressed, the English and the Latin
usually correspond very closely : Mentiri turpe est,
1 Lying is disgraceful ' or ' It is disgraceful to lie.' But
if the subject of the infinitive is expressed we cannot
imitate the Latin construction ; we cannot translate
Turpe est te mentiri by ' It is disgraceful you to lie,'
but we must render it in some such way as this (1)
' It is disgraceful that you should lie ' or (2) ' It is
disgraceful for you to lie' or (3) 'Your lying is dis-
graceful/ Beware of translating the word ' should '
in (1) by debere, the 'for you' in (2) by tibi, or 'your
lying ' in (3) by tuum mentiri.
93. When the infinitive, or a clause of which the
verb is an infinitive, is the subject of the sentence,
the predicate will consist of
(1) est, videtur or some other copulative verb with
(a) an adjective in the neuter singular nominative, as
Turpe fuit vinci, Being beaten was a disgrace,
or (b) a substantive in the nominative
Sed iam tempus est abire, But now it is time to go
away,
or (c) a substantive or adjective in the genitive
Sapientis est tempori cedere, It' is wise to yield to
circumstances.
(2) A verb in the third person singular:
Legere me delectat, Reading charms me.
See 96-100.
THE INFINITIVE AS SUBJECT 97
94. (1) («) and (6) need no further comment.
(c) We have nothing corresponding to this use
of the genitive in English. We cannot say ' It is
of a friend to do this.' We must therefore represent
the sense in various ways ; here are a few examples :
Amici est, It is friendly, It is the duty of a friend,
It is for a friend to.
Stulti est, It is the act of a fool, It is foolish, stupid,
Boni viri est hoc facere, It is natural to a good
man to do it, A good man will do it.
Philosophi est, It shows a philosojjhic spirit, It is
scientific.
Parvi animi est, It shows a paltry spirit.
95. You can say Stultum est hoc facere or Stulti est.
You can say Sapientis est hoc facere but not Sapiens est.
You can say Turpe est hoc facere but not Turpis est.
The reason is obvious : Sapiens est means ' He is a
wise man,' and therefore it would be inconvenient to
use it for ' It is a wise act ' ; therefore use Sapientis
est, which cannot be misunderstood. In the same way
Turpis est means 'He is a base man,' and therefore,
it is inconvenient to use it for ' It is the act of a base
man/ For the same reason Omnium rerum is the
genitive of omnia, ' everything ' ; for omnium means
' of everybody.' Do not use as a neuter (without a
substantive) any form of an adjective which may be
mistaken for a masculine.
98 LATIN COURSE
EXERCISE 12
In doing this exercise use the genitive as shown in 94 whenever it
is possible. Some of the necessary words will be found in 90-95, but
not in the dictionary.
1. It is for a friend to warn a friend what to avoid.
2. It was foolish to hope for it, shameless to
demand it.
3. Is it an unheard-of thing that a king should be
tried for his life ?
4. It is the duty of the consul to see what is going
on, and to foresee what is likely to happen.
. 5. It seems to me deplorable that you should have
been able to do this with impunity.
6. A good citizen will remember that he ought to
help the state in times of difficulty.
7. Does it show a philosophic spirit not to try to
find out the reason of every occurrence ?
8. It seemed best that the consul himself should
remain at Rome.
9. Nothing shows such a narrow, paltry spirit as the
excessive love of riches.
1. what to avoid : say ' what he ought to avoid ' (gerundive),
avoid, vitare.
2. shameless, impudens.
3. He is tried for his life, reus est capitis; reus means the defendant,
the accused.
4. likely to happen, futurum.
5. deplorable : use miser.
6. ought : use debeo.
in times of difficulty, in rebus adversis.
7. Say ' to seek for the reason why each thing happens ' (subj. ;
see 157).
9. ' so narrow, and so paltry.'
excessive love : 'to love too much.'
THE INFINITIVE AS SUBJECT 99
10. It was stupid to think of peace when you saw
the army in line.
11. Have you never heard that it is for a young
man to reverence his elders ?
12. It is much more difficult to explain to another
how it is to be done than to do it one's self.
10. I think of peace, pdcem coglto.
an army in line, odes.
12. to explain to another, docere alterum.
how, quo modo (in what way).
Contrast alter and alius. Alter means 'one of two,' so 'a second
man,' 'any fellow-creature,' ' one's neighbour.' Alius means 'different,'
alii alia amant, different people like different things, some like one
thing some another.
100 LATIN COURSE
THE INFINITIVE AS SUBJECT (continued)
96. The following verbs, among others, are used as
predicates with the infinitive as subject. Many of
these verbs are used in the third person singular
only : such verbs are sometimes called impersonal.
(a) Verbs which may be used transitively, i.e. with
an object in the accusative : as Mentiri te dedecet,
' Lying ill becomes you/ ' is unseemly in you/ ' it is un-
becoming for you to lie.' Note that te is the object of
dedecet not the subject of mentiri. The subject of the
infinitive is not expressed, if it is identical with the
object (whether expressed or understood) of the princi-
pal verb. Otherwise it must (of course) be expressed :
Decet caram nobis esse patriam, It is seemly that
our country should be dear to us.
Here the whole clause caram nobis esse patriam is
the subject of decet :
decet me loqui, it is fitting (or, seemly) that I should
speak.
dedecet me irasci, it is unseemly for me to get angry.
iuvat (from iuvare ' to help ' ), it is a pleasure :
iuvat me hoc scire, the knowledge of this gives
me pleasure, I like to know this.
oportet me hoc dicere, saying this is a duty for me,
1 ought to say this.
pudet me hoc fecisse, having done it makes me
feel ashamed, I am ashamed of having done it.
paenitet me vicisse, having gained the victory
brings me regret, I regret that I have won, I
am sorry I have won.
delectat me legere, reading charms me, amuses me.
THE INFINITIVE AS -SUBJECT
10,1
97. (b) Interest and refert.
Interest (from inter and est) means ' There is (this)
between/ ' There is (this) difference/ ' It makes a
difference/ ' It is important/ ' It matters.'
In sole lucernam adhibere nihil interest, To get
a lamp when the sun is shining makes no
difference.
The person to whom it makes a difference is put
in the genitive (if expressed) :
Omnium interest, It is important to every one.
But instead of the genitives of ego, tu, etc., the
adjectival pronouns in the ablative singular feminine
are used (just as if causa were understood : Mea [causa]
interest, It makes a difference for my sake, from my
point of view).
Interest mea, nostra, etc., It is important to me, us,
etc.
98. Refert has much the same meaning as interest,
and is used in the same way, but not with genitives. It
may be used with the pronouns mea, tua, etc., but is
more commonly used absolutely, the context showing
to whom the action referred to is of importance.
The subject of the infinitive is generally1 not
expressed if the person for whom the action is of
importance is identical with the subject of the infinitive,
as in
1 Generally, but it may be expressed : in the following sentence the
presence of se and me is clearly due to the contrast between them :
' Hie sua putat interesse se re ipsa et gesto negotio, non lege defendi ;
ego autem mea existimo interesse me nulla in disputatione ab Accio
videii esse snperatum ' (Cic. Cluetti. liv. 149).
.102 LATIN COURSE
Nostra interest vincere, It is important for us that
we should win [not Nostra interest nos vincere].
Contrast
Nostra interest te vincere, It is important for us
that you should win,
where te, the subject of the infinitive, is obviously
necessary.
The rule holds good when there is no genitive or
quasi-genitive (like mea) representing the person to
whom the action is of importance. Thus Interest
vincere is a complete sentence.
99. Interest and refert are also very commonly used
with indirect questions:
Doleam necne doleani interest, It makes a difference
whether I am in pain or not.
Magni interest, It is very important.
Quantum interest ! What an important difference
it makes !
Plus interest, It is more important.
Maxime interest, It is of the greatest importance.
Quid interest (nostra) ea cognoscere ? What is the
importance of getting to know this ? How does
it affect our interests ? What does it matter ?
THE INFINITIVE AS SUBJECT 103
EXEKCISE 13
Many of the words and phrases given in 96-99 will not be found in the
dictionary.
1. A law ought to be short so that it may be under-
stood more easily by the citizens.
2. It is by no means seemly for an orator to get
angry, it is not unseemly that he should
pretend to be angry.
3. Don't you think it is important to men to know
what is going to happen ?
4. How does it affect my interests that you should
be murdered ?
5. When I get to my country-house the mere doing
nothing charms me.
6. 1 wish you would show me what is the importance
of good writing : if you can read what I write,
what does it matter whether the letters are
well formed or not ?
7. It is fitting that our country should be dearer to
us than ourselves.
2. by no means, minime (adv. of minimus, lit. very little, to a very
slight extent).
3. going to happen : use sum.
5. hoc ipsum nihil agere, ' this doing nothing taken -by- itself ' (ipsum).
Note hoc ipsum agreeing with the infinitive : we have seen that an
infinitive cannot have an adjectival attribute : we cannot say Tuum
mentiri, ' Your lying,' or Forte puynare, ' Brave fighting.' But ipsum,
hoc ipsum, totum hoc, are used in this exceptional way : e.g. Vivere
ipsum turpe est nobis, ' Life itself is a disgrace to us,' i.e. the mere fact
of existing [under such a tyranny].
6. I wish you would show me. Me doceas velim (see 122).
a well-formed letter, formosa littera : in this sense littera : as a
singular.
' good writing ' must be turned by an infinitive : an ordinary
substantive cannot be made the subject of interest. In the same way
' his health ' in 9, and ' this knowledge ' ( = to know this) in 12.
7. ourselves, nosmet ipsos, accusative, attracted to the case ofpatriam.
Compare the note to Ex. 16 (12).
104 LATIN COURSE
8. How does it affect your interests to know where
I want to go and what I am going to do ?
9. He used to say that his health was of importance
not so much to himself as to the state.
10. We do a great many things for the simple reason
that to do them is seemly, that it is right, that
it is honourable.
11. To the British also it will be more important to
have very fast ships than a strongly fortified
city.
12. Even the doctors, to whom this knowledge is of
the greatest importance, admit that they
understand nothing of the matter.
9. not so much, non tain.
10. ob earn unam causam quia, ' for the one reason that.'
right, rectus.
11. strongly fortified, mmiitissimus.
12. even the doctors: 'the doctors themselves.'
of the matter : use the plural.
THE INFINITIVE AS SUBJECT 105
100. Verbs used as Predicates with the Infinitive as
Subject
(c) Verbs which govern a dative.
Licet mihi hoc facere, It is left free to me to do it,
I am free to do it, I may do it.
Libet mihi hoc facere, It seems well to me to do it,
I choose to.
Prodest mihi hoc facere, It is an advantage to me to
do it.
Expedit mihi hoc facere, It is expedient for me to
do it, It pays to do it, It is for my interest.
The subject of the infinitive is not generally l
expressed if it is identical with the object of the
principal verb, whether that object is expressed or not.
1. Expedit (mihi) promittere, It is expedient for me
to promise, or that I should promise [not expedit
mihi me promittere].
Otherwise the subject is, of course, necessary to the
meaning :
2. Bonis expedit salvam esse rein publicam, It is
for the interest of good citizens that the country
should be safe.
The subject of the infinitive, though not expressed,
may have a predicate which will be in the accusative :
3. Expedit bonas esse vobis, It is for your interest
to be good women.
But with licet this predicate is generally attracted into
the dative if the object of licet is expressed : compare
1 It maybe expressed if emphatic: 'Quid proderat tibi £eexpensum
illis non tulisse?' (Cic. Verr. i. 102).
106 LATIN COURSE
4. Cur iis esse liberis non licet ? Why may they
not be free?
with
5. Medios esse iam non licebit, Soon we shall not be
allowed to be neutral.
In (4) liberis the predicate of the subject of esse is
attracted into the dative by iis the object of licet : in
(5) medios agrees with the implied subject of esse there
being no dative to attract it.
THE INFINITIVE AS SUBJECT 107
EXERCISE 14
Many of the words and phrases used in this exercise will not be
found in the dictionary. See 96-100.
The following will also be useful :
Prodest mihi, It is for my advantage.
Quid prodest eum laudare ? What is tlie advantage of praising him.
Yalde me iuvat, I am very much pleased.
Non dedecet facere, There is no disgrace in doing it.
Licet ei esse otioso, He is free to take a holiday (It is allowed him
to be at leisure). [Otium, often contrasted with negotium, means
freedom from one's ordinary business.]
Licet ei incolumi discedere, He is free to depart unharmed.
1. If I chose to accuse him of treason, what defence
could he make ?
2. Now that the hostages have been brought, you
are free to depart unharmed.
3. What is the advantage of my having a country-
house if I am so rarely free to take a holiday ?
4. I am very much pleased that you have recovered
from such a serious illness.
5. I don't know what is the importance of remem-
bering this.
6. It is very important to you fathers that your
children should learn this.
7. I am not ashamed of having said it because there
is no disgrace in saying it : I am sorry that I
said it because it is not for your advantage.
1. what is your defence? quid dcfcndis? The rules for condi-
tionals are in 115 ff.
3. rarely, raro.
6. Say ' to you, who are fathers.'
108 LATIN COURSE
8. If he were to ask me that question, I should be
ashamed to admit that I do not understand.
9. It is shameless your coming in those clothes !
10. If you don't finish it you won't be allowed to
have a holiday to-morrow.
11. It is folly for you to pretend you will help him.
9. Say ' dressed thus ' ; to dress, vestire.
come in : use incedo (3).
X
THE INFINITIVE AS OBJECT
The Nominative with the Infinitive
101. The infinitive is used as the object of certain
verbs :
Ego audeo ire, / dare to go.
Here ire is the object of audeo, just as in the
sentence Hoc audeo, ' I dare (to do) this/ hoc is the
object of audeo. In this construction the subject of
the leading verb is also the subject of the infinitive.
The subject of the infinitive is therefore in the nomi-
native, and with this nominative will agree any sub-
stantive or adjective belonging as predicate to the
infinitive. Hence we write
Ego audeo ire solus, I dare to go alone,
Voluit existimari sapiens, He wanted to le thought
clever,
where solus agrees with the subject of ire, sapiens
with the subject of existimari. Compare the sentence
Solitm ire optimum mihi videtur, To go alone seems
to me the best course,
where the clause Solum ire is the subject of videtur.
Compare also Dicit se solum ire, where the clause se
solum ire is the object of dicit.
110 LATIN COURSE
102. This use of the infinitive presents few diffi-
culties, because our English infinitive is used with
most of the corresponding English verbs. But note in
the list of verbs in 103 that we cannot use the simple
infinitive to translate Scio facere (' I know how to do ').
On the other hand, many English verbs which take
the simple infinitive have other constructions in Latin :
we say, for instance, ' I promise to come ' : the Latin
construction with verbs of promising is the accusative
and infinitive (future) : promitto me venturum. We
say ' I beg you to do it ' : Latin : oro te ut facias.
103. The simple infinitive (that is to say the in-
finitive without an accusative as its subject) may be
used as the object of the following verbs among others.
They are sometimes called auxiliary verbs. Those
marked with an asterisk * cannot be combined with a
verb in any other way. The others can also have
other constructions.
Verbs signifying
i. POWER or the want of it. Possum* queo* I
can ; nequeo* I cannot. To these may be added the
less common scio, I know how to : nescio, I don't know
how to : Vincere scis, Hannibal ; victoria uti nescis,
You know how to win a victory, Hannibal ; you don't
know how to use your victory.
ii. DUTY. Debeo* I ought.
iii. WILL and its opposites. Vblo, I wish, am
willing, want : nolo, I am unwilling, I do not wish,
do not want : malo, 1 prefer, I would rather : cupio, I
desire : audeof I dare, I venture to, I have the
pluck to : timeo, I am afraid to (i.e. through fear I
THE INFINITIVE AS OBJECT 111
am unwilling to, = timore motifs nolo) : vereor, I don't
like to (from a sense of delicacy or reverence I am
unwilling to) : timeo ire solus, I am afraid to go alone :
vereor laudare praesentem, I don't like to praise a man
in his presence: non dubito scribere, I don't hesitate
to write.
iv. INTENTION or EESOLVE : these are closely con-
nected with the verbs of will : cogito, I think of doing,
intend to do : quid ad haec respondere cogitas ? what
answer do you think of sending to these questions ?
statuo, or constituo, I decide to . . . , resolve to . . . ,
make up my mind to.
v. ENDEAVOUR. Conor* I try. [Note that riltor
ut . . . is not the Latin for ' I try to . . .']
vi. BEGINNING, CONTINUANCE, END. Coepi* I
begin : desino * facere, I cease to do : desisto facere, 1
give up doing, desist from doing.
viL HABIT. Consuesco * (hoc facere), I get into the
habit of (doing it): cvrw&vi* I have got into the habit,
I am in the habit of . . . : soleo* I am wont, accus-
tomed to. Here we may add disco, I am learning to ...
104. The following verbs take two objects, (1) of
the person, (2) of the infinitive :
lubeo, / order. Sino, patior, / allow.
Veto, I forbid. Doceo, / teach.
lubeo te abire, / order you to go
(like Hoc te iubeo, I give you this order).
Doceo te scribere, / teach you to write, I teach you
writing
(like Doceo te litteras, / teach you literature).
112 LATIN COURSE
Observe the difference between this construction
(a verb governing an accusative and also an infinitive)
and the construction of the accusative and infinitive
after a verb of saying or thinking ; in this latter
construction the accusative is not the object of the
leading verb, but the whole clause is the object, so
that the verb has one object not two :
Dixit te scribere, He said that you were writing.
105. SOME VERBS WHICH ADMIT OF VARIOUS
CONSTRUCTIONS
Many of the verbs given in 103 may, as we said,
have other constructions than the simple infinitive :
here are a few examples : compare the sentences given
in 103 ; the numbers refer to the classes mentioned
in th'at section :
i. Scio takes (a) the simple infinitive when it is
equivalent to possum, meaning ' By my knowledge I
have the power to/ It takes (&) the accusative and
infinitive, like other verbs of saying, thinking, and
knowing, when it means ' I know that it is so.'
Scio Hannibalem vicisse, / know that Hannibal
won the victory.
It takes (c) the subjunctive of indirect question :
Scio uter vicerit, / know which of the two won.
iii. Contrast (a) Volo ire, ' I want to go,' with (&)
Volo te ire, ' I want you to go.' In (a) the infinitive
has the same subject as the principal verb, in (ft a
different subject.
THE INFINITIVE AS OBJECT 113
Verbs of fearing take ne or ut with a different
*<->
Tiineo ne solus eas, I fear you will go alone.
Dubito may have (a) indirect question :
Dubito possit-ne fieri necne, / have my doubts
whether it can be done or not.
(b) (if negatived), quin :
Non dubito quin ille scripserit, / have no doubt
that he wrote it.
(c) In the sense of to hesitate, dubito is always
negatived : you cannot say Dubito scribere, ' I hesitate
to write.'
Of course the negative sense may be given by
turning the sentence into a question. Quis dubitat
scribere ? is a rhetorical way of saying Nemo dubitat
scribere.
iv. Verbs of intention and resolve combine the
two notions of thinking and willing. Hence many
of these verbs are used (a) like the verbs of will,
with the simple infinitive, (b) like the verbs of thinking,
with the accusative and infinitive, and (c) like many
verbs of thinking, with an indirect question.
(a) Constitui eras proficisci, / have decided to
start to-morrow. [Here volo might take
the place of constitui without any great
change of meaning.]
(b) Constitui eras proficiscendum esse or me
eras proficisci debere, / have made up my
mind that I ought to start to-morrow. [Here
constitui is nearly equivalent to puto.]
I
114 LATIN COURSE
(c) Xec constituere possum quid sit faciendum,
And I cannot make up my mind what to
do (what is to be done).
(a) Cogito progredi, / think of advancing (i.e. I
have nearly made up my mind to advance}.
(b) Dux suo se periculo progredi cogitat, The
leader reflects that he is advancing at his
own risk.
(c) Cogito quid sit faciendum, / reflect as to what
should be done.
vii. (a) Disco saltare, / am learning to dance.
(b) A Platone didici id esse verum, / learned
from Plato that this was the truth.
(c) Quales di essent discere voluit, He ivanted
to find out what the gods were like.
THE INFINITIVE AS OBJECT 115
EXERCISE 15
1. He wanted to be free from care : he did not want
to be and he never was rich.
2. I shall not give up urging and begging Pompeius
to do nothing disgraceful. I am afraid that
I shall effect nothing.
3. He does not like either to say or to do anything
which would appear unmanly.
'4. He has made up his mind to go to Britain. I
think of going with him.
5. I have not the power or the knowledge to decide
the case.
6. He wants to be rich and to be considered so.
7. I do not hesitate to call him clever : I venture
to say that he is the cleverest of them all. I
don't doubt that he will win fame.
8. I cannot be friendly to him. He ought not to
have been so timid.
Use the words given in 101-5 as far as possible. Many of the
words will not be found in the dictionary.
The Roman often uses et . . . et . . . where we should not say
both . . . and . . . but simply and. So also nee . . . nee . . .
Et est et habetur sapiens, He is wise and is considered so.
Nee scit neque unquam sciet, He does not know and he never will
know.
1. free from care, securus.
3. unmanly, parum virllis.
4. I go with him : say ' I go (as) his companion.'
5. I decide the case, id iudico (1).
116 LATIN COURSE
9. So he lost his temper and said, You begin to
be troublesome to me. Don't you know how
to write ? I will teach you to hold your
tongue.
10. They do indeed desire to be free, but they are
afraid to fight.
11. Would you rather look a greater fool than you
8Te or be a greater fool than you look ? I
am not in the habit of answering such ques-
tions.
12. He has learned to be brave. They will urge
him to become a soldier.
13. He tried to persuade me to stay with him.
14. If he had known how to use his victory, the war
would be over by this time.
15. I have made up my mind to go to Italy. I
cannot, however, make up my mind what
cities to visit. I think of going to Pompeii.
16. They want to die with their friends rather than
alone.
1*7. I wished you to know this.
18. They do not reflect that this may fall to their
lot.
19. They doubt whether it is honourable or mean.
9. lose temper : use irascor.
I hold my tongue, taceo.
11. look = appear.
14. be over : use conficio.
1 8. it falls to my lot, mihi accidit.
may = can.
XI
THE INFINITIVE WITH VERBS OF SAYING AND
THINKING
106. Verbs of saying and thinking may be followed
by the accusative and infinitive. In this construction
the infinitive is used not as a substantive, but as the
representative of the indicative : in the sentence Dixit
te scribere the words te scribere represent Hie scribit.
When we speak of verbs of saying and thinking we
include all verbs and phrases meaning to make a state-
ment to another, such as scribo ' I state in writing,'
significo ' I show by signs,' and verbs of perception like
video and intettego, and of knowing such as scio. Verbs
of this class are generally followed in English by the
conjunction ' that ' with the indicative : as ' I said that1
he was wrong.' But the verbs / declare and / consider
(among others) may take the accusative and infinitive
in English : as ' I declared him to be mad/ ' I considered
him to be wrong.' It is a good plan in case of
difficulty to turn the sentence into the accusative and
infinitive in English : it is easier to realise the force
of the Latin. Among the verbs which may take this
construction are
1 ' that ' often drops out, ' I told you he was wrong.'
118 LATIN COURSE
Saying. Thinking. Perceiving and knowing.
dico puto video
nego ^existimo sentio
respondeo arbitror intellego
nuntio suspicor audio
doceo, / point out statuo, I decide cognosce
that . . . that1 . . . scio
also such phrases as imply saying or thinking, for
instance, certiorem tefacio ; nuntius advenit, a messenger
came (to tell us) that : susplcio est, there is a suspicion
that : constaty it is well known that . . .
107. Many of the verbs of saying and thinking are
also used with the indirect question construction :
Compare Die quid fecerit, Tell me what he did,
with Dico eum fecisse, I say that he did it.
108. To the verbs of saying and thinking we must
add simulo, I pretend, spero, I hope, polliceor and
promitto, I promise, iuro, I swear, minor, I threaten.
With these verbs we often use the simple infinitive
in English : (1) He pretended to be poor, (2) We hope
to come, (3) They promised to do it. But in Latin
the accusative and infinitive are required, and the
future infinitive must be used in reference to the
future : thus
(1) Simula vit se esse pauperem.
(2) Speramus nos ventures (esse).
(3) Promiserunt se facturos (esse).
1 With the accusative and infinitive statuo is a verb of thinking :
Statuo parandum esse exercitum, 1 decide tJiat it is necessary to
prepare the army.
With the simple infinitive it is a verb of will :
Statuo parare exercitum, / resolve to prepare the army.
Compare 103 and 105.
VERBS OF SAYING AND THINKING 119
109. With the verbs of thinking are included the
verbs of emotion, such as gaudeo and doleo and such
phrases as lad-its sum.
Gaudeo te valere, / rejoice (to think) that you are well.
Admiror eum nos secutum esse, / am surprised that
he followed us.
110. If we take an example such as Dicunt
Pompeium fuissc timidum, They say that Pompeius
was timid, and change the verb of saying to the
passive, we write
Dicitur Pompeius fuisse timidus, Pompeius is said
to have been timid.
When the verb of saying is active Pompeium is accu-
sative and is the subject of the infinitive; when the verb
of saying is passive Pompeius is nominative and is
subject to the principal verb. The difference between
the two constructions may be seen in the English :
' They declare him (ace.) to have been timid ' and
1 He (nom.) is declared to have been timid.'
In English, however, we generally prefer the
impersonal construction in the passive, ' It is said that
he was timid/ whereas in Latin the personal construc-
tion is usual in the third person,1 except in the
compound tenses (i.e. the tenses made up of the
participle and the verb ' to be ').
It is reported that Ariovistus is near, Ariovistus
adesse nuntiatur,
but
Nuntiatum erat Ariovistum adesse.
1 When a dative is added to the principal verb, the impersonal
construction is adopted.
Caesari nuntiatur adesse Ariovistum.
120 LATIN COURSE
But videri, meaning ' to seem ' or ' be seen (to be)/ l
always has the personal construction, whatever the
tense or the person :
Visus est mihi scribere, It seemed to me that he was
writing, or, as if h e were . . .
111. Another point of difference between the
English and the Latin idiom is this: in English far-
more commonly than in Latin the verb of saying or
thinking is put in the parenthesis. So in dealing with
such sentences as ' P. was a coward, they say' or ' The
tribes are, it is said, inclined to revolt ' you must
paraphrase ' They declare P. to have been a coward,'
' The tribes are said to be inclined to revolt.'
112. Note that you cannot have a nominative with
the infinitive except (1) with a passive verb of saying
or thinking :
Dicitur esse sapiens, He is said to be wise,
or (2) with a verb of the class noticed in 103.
Nolo ire solus, / don't want to go alone.
113. With regard to the tense of the infinitive
depending on a verb of saying or thinking observe that
the present infinitive represents action contemporaneous
with (i.e. going on at the same time as) the action
represented by the leading verb ; and the perfect
infinitive represents action prior to (i.e. completed
before) the action represented by the leading verb.
1 videri is used impersonally with the sense ' It seems good to me
(to do it).' ' I resolve (to do it).'
Visum est mihi scribere, / have determined to write.
VERBS OF SAYING AND THINKING 121
1. Dicunt eum urbein condere, They say that he
is founding a city.
2. Dixerunt eum urbem condere, They said that he
was founding a city.
In both these sentences the act of founding the
city is represented as going on at the time when
the statements represented by dicunt or dixerunt are
made.
(1) They declare )
(2) They declared} him t0 be f°Undmg ft ^
(1) They say, or (2) they said, ' Condit urlcm, He is
(now) founding a city.'
Contrast with (1) and (2) sentences (3) and (4) :
3. Dicunt eum urbem condidisse, They say that
he (has) founded a city.
4. Dixerunt eum urbem condidisse, They said that
he (had) founded a city.
In these the founding of the city is represented as
having taken place at some time prior to that of the
statements represented by dicunt and dixerunt :
(3) They declare )
, Y him to have founded a city.
(4) They declared]
(3) They say, or (4). they said : 'Condidit urbem,
He (has) founded a city.'
122 LATIN COURSE
114. THE FUTURE INFINITIVE
1. ACTIVE
(a) The future participle with or without esse :
Dixit ilium venturum (esse), He said the man
would come.
Dixit illos ventures (esse),^ said the menwoidd come.
Dixit illam venturam (esse), He said she would come.
The participle is an adjective agreeing with the
subject of the infinitive.
(b) If there is no future participle use the im-
personal futurum esse (or fore) ut (meaning that it is
about to happen etc.).
Dixit fore (or futurum esse) ut ille convalesceret,
He said that the man would recover.
Dixit futurum esse (or fore) ut ilia convalesceret,
He said she would recover.
Dixit futurum esse (or fore) ut convalescerent, He
said they would recover.
Futurum 1 is neuter accusative singular in all the
above sentences.
(c) Even when the verb has a future participle
the form fore or futurum esse ut is sometimes preferred :
Dixit futurum esse (or fore) ut Caesar veniret,
He said it was likely that Caesar would come
has nearly the same meaning as
Dixit Caesarem venturum esse, He said that Caesar
would come.
1 In the above sentences the w^-clause is the subject of futurum
esse : ' he said that his (or her or their) recovery was about to take
place.' Compare accidit. Accidit ut rediremus, It happened that we
were returning, Our return happened. To avoid blunders you should
translate futurum esse to yourself by an English impersonal verb, for
instance ' He said it was likely to come to pass that she would recover.'
VERBS OF SAYING AND THINKING 123
2. PASSIVE
(a) Fore (QY futurum esse) ut.
Dixit futurum esse (or fore) ut Galli vincerentur,
He said the Gauls would be conquered.
(b) Supine with iri :
Dixit Gallos victum iri, He said they would be con-
quered.
(a) fe commoner than (b). (a) has been explained
on the previous page. (6) Eunt victum Gallos means
' they are moving with a view to conquering the
Gauls.' Intransitive verbs are used impersonally in
the passive (see 3) : hence itur victum Gallos means
' a movement is being made with a view to conquering
the Gauls.' Iri is the infinitive of itur : Dixit iri victum
Gallos means ' he said that a movement was being
made with a view to conquering the Gauls.'
Caution. Victum is the supine governing Gallos.
Don't suppose that it is the participle and make it
agree with Gallos.
124 LATIN COURSE
EXERCISE 16
1. It is said that Demosthenes often heard Plato
lecture.
2. They are, it is said, going to cross the river and
march into our territory.
3. It seems to me that you are more foolish than
before.
4. I am glad that you have arrived safe, and I am
not surprised that you have. come late.
5. I hoped to be made consul.
6. The praetor said that one of this man's slaves
had entered into a conspiracy and had per-
suaded many slaves to take arms : he must
be brought to him at once : such a person
was a danger to the state: he would be cru-
cified.
7. He was, according to tradition, the wisest of the
Greeks.
1. I hear him lecture, audio eum.
4. safe, salvus.
6. It is quite usual to have a long string of infinitives depending
on one verb. See 33-35 on se and eum.
7. tradition : use the verb tradere, to hand on, to pass on from
one to another ; being often used of passing on a story, this verb
came to be treated just like a verb of saying :
tradunt cum fuisse regem, they hand down the story that he was
king, tradition says that he was king.
traditur fuisse rex, he is said (by tradition) to have been king, he
was king according to tradition.
VERBS OF SAYING AND THINKING 125
8. The tradition is that Pythagoras came to Italy
when Tarquinius Superbus was in the fourth
year of his reign.
9. He pretended to be hungry so that we might
give him something. We promised to send
him some food.
10. Owing -to the elegance of their style it was
supposed that the plays of Terence were
written by C. Laelius.
11. For it seems as if I were at Eome when I read
your letters : it seems as if I saw you and
heard your voice.
12. As to Balbus I will say nothing further than that
he has always been an excellent citizen and
friendly to me, but that he felt the same
fears as the rest.
13. Day after day it was said that M. Crassus was
hostile to me.
14. It seemed to me in a dream that I saw my mother
coming to me to say that a divine voice had
warned her that some trouble was impending.
8. reign : use the verb regnare.
10. Owing to the elegance of their style, Propter elegantiam sermonis.
12. As to, de.
I say nothing further than . . ., nihil amplius dico nisi . . .
I feel the same fears as Bibulus, Eadem timeo quae Bibulus ; I tell
you that I feel etc., Dico me eadem timere quae Bibulum. Note the
case of Bibulum, attracted to agree with me. The sentence might
also be turned Dico me eadem timere quae Bibulus timeat. Compare
the note to Ex. 22. 1.
13. day after day: say 'everyday.'
14. a divine voice, divina quaedam vox — if you say divinam
quamdam voccm se monuisse the sentence will be awkward and
might be misunderstood (for there is nothing to show whether se is
the subject or object of the infinitive) ; so turn the sentence into
the passive form and say ' that she had been warned by a divine voice.'
126 LATIN COURSE
15. Messages kept coming to me every day to say
that he was going to come across the river.
At last on the seventh day news came that
he had got frightened and had retired.
16. He began to complain that he a Roman citizen
had been thrown into prison, that he had
been condemned unheard : he would go to
Borne and would accuse him.
15. ' Messages kept coming to say ' may all be expressed by nuntio.
16. unheard, indicia causa (his cause not having been pleaded) ;
dicere causam (to plead a cause).
XII
CONDITIONAL SENTENCES
115. 1. There are two kinds of conditional sentence
in which the subjunctive is used :
i. Those in which the present or perfect subjunctive
is used ; these refer vaguely to future time, and may
be expressed in English in accordance with the
formula
If A were to happen, B would happen.
For example
Si id dicas, mentiaris, If you were to say it (Suppose
you were to say it, should you say it, if you
said it), you would lie.
Si id fecerim, virgis me caedat (or ceciderit), If I
did it, he would flog me.
Contrast the more vivid future sentence in which
the indicative is used :
Si id dices, mentieris, If you say it, you will lie.
Si id fecero, virgis me caedet, If I do it, he will
Jloy me.
128 LATIN COURSE
116. ii. Those in which the imperfect and plu-
perfect subjunctive are used ; in these sentences it is
implied that the condition is not fulfilled : the imperfect
is used of present time, the pluperfect of past time :
Si id dixissem, mentitus essem, If I had said that,
I should have lied (it is obviously implied
that I did not say it).
Caederem te nisi irascerer, / should flog you, if I
were not getting angry (it is obviously implied
that I am getting angry).
Nisi ante Eoma profectus esses, nunc earn certe
relinqueres, If you had not started from Home
already, you would certainly leave it now
(notice the change of tense).
117. 2. In conditional sentences which do not
belong to either of the classes illustrated above, the
mood is the indicative (unless, of course, the sense
requires the imperative to express a command, or the
subjunctive to express a wish). No special rules need
be given ; care must be taken to observe the general
rules given in 53 with regard to the tenses. See
also 54 and 55.
The following sentences are examples of the most
important differences of idiorn between English and
Latin :
He will come if he can, Veniet si poterit.
He will come if I bid him, Veniet si iussero.
He came if (ever) I told him to, Veniebat si
iusseram.
CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 129
118. It is sometimes difficult to distinguish between
the vague future and the present unfulfilled, between
(a) If he did it I should be angry, Si facia t, irascar,
and
(b) If he were doing it, I should be angry, Si
faceret, irascerer.
What is the precise difference between (a) and (b) ?
(a) means ' let us suppose him to do it : I don't say
he will do it or that he won't : but let us imagine
that the thing occurs at any future time immediate or
distant and see what the result would be ' : thus (a)
leaves us in suspense. On the other hand (b) means
' let us suppose he were doing it : I know he isn't
doing it, but if he were now doing it.'
119. ' If ' . . . ' not ' is generally expressed by nisi,
' unless ' ; si non is used if the non belongs to a par-
ticular word. Hence
Si non-veneris, ignoscam, means ' If you fail-to-come,
I will forgive you!
Contrast
Nisi veneris, ignoscam, 1 will forgive you unless you
come, If you come 1 will not forgive you (nisi
negatives the principal sentence).
As a practical rule use nisi when ' unless/ ' except/
make sense, and si non when you can change the word
with Tien into a positive form such as ' if you fail-to-
do it/
130 LATITsT COURSE
EXERCISE 17
1. If you had come to the camp you would have
been seen by the soldiers. But you were not
seen by them. Therefore you did not come
to the camp.
2. To no purpose would nature have produced gold
and silver, unless she had also taught us
where it could be found.
3. If you do it. I shall be very grateful : if you fail
to do it I will forgive you.
4. If they found any beautiful statue, they gladly
brought it to Verres.
5. But when shall I receive your letters ? Who
will bring them on to me ? I should have
waited for them at Brindisi, had I not been
compelled to set sail: for the sailors were
unwilling to let the good weather pass.
6. If he tries to use force, I hope you will not yield
to him.
7. I would help your friend Rufus even if I had
been injured by him. As, however, I gather
from your letter that he was most anxious for
my safety, I cannot help being his friend.
2. to no purpose, frustra. also : see 48.
5. bring ... on, per-fero. Brindisi, Brundisium.
I let the good weather pass, tempestatem praetermitto (no adjective
is necessary).
6. I use force, m ago.
7. Begin Rufum istum (that R. you speak of),
gather, intellego.
I am most anxious for your safety, salus tua magnae mifii curae est.
I cannot help being : say ' I cannot not be ' ; this repetition of
non is not uncommon in Latin. (In English we say 'it is not un-
CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 131
8. I should have been less cautious if I had not
been warned by you.
9. If I had not borne a child, Rome would not now
be attacked; if I had not a son, I should
have died a free woman in a free country.
10. If you were to ask him what he thinks about
the political situation, he would perhaps give
you no answer.
11. It is not seemly that I should remember these
acts of injustice : even if I could take venge-
ance for them, still I should prefer to forget
them.
common,' but we do not say 'it is not not common.' We like the
sense of a double negative, but not the sound of a double ' not.' In
Latin the recurring non was not felt as unpleasing. )
8. less cautious, incautior.
9. bear a child, pario (3), perf. p8p%ri.
10. What do you think ? what are your views or opinions ?
Quid sentis?
the political situation, res publica (the state of public affairs).
XIII
THE POTENTIAL SUBJUNCTIVE
120. We have seen that the present and perfect
subjunctive are used in conditional sentences of the
vague future type :
Si id ex me quaeras nihil fortasse respondeam, If
you were to ask me that, I should perhaps give
you no answer.
The present and perfect subjunctive are used in
much the same way without any if-clause :
Velim scire, / should like to know (/3ov\oi^riv av
Dixerit quispiam, A man may say, will perhaps
say (et'jroi, TIS av).
Quis putet ? Who would, could, can suppose ?
The English equivalents of this subjunctive are
very various.
121. The imperfect subjunctive is used in the same
way with reference to the past : the second person,
meaning an imaginary ' you ' (' one/ ' a man '), is
especially common.
Maesti — crederes victos — in castra redierunt,
With dismal looks — you would have thought
they were beaten — they returned to the camp.
122. If you look at the examples above you will
see that the subjunctive is used to soften down an
THE POTENTIAL SUBJUNCTIVE 133
assertion, to bring it forward modestly : compare the
tone of
non credo, / don't believe it
with that of
vix crediderim, / can scarcely believe it.
The latter means, of course, like the former that
the speaker does not believe what has been asserted,
but the meaning is expressed in a somewhat softer
form. Hence
velim, / could luish, I should like,
nolim, I should not care to,
malim, / should prefer,
are more common than the blunter expressions
volo, / choose to, I wish to,
nolo, / won't,
malo, / want (to do this) rather (than that).
If the verb depending on velim etc. has the same
subject as velim it will be in the infinitive :
Hunc ego imitari nolim, I should not like to imitate
him. [It is clear that ego is the subject to
imitari as well as to nolim J]
If the verbs have different subjects, the depending
verb will be in the subjunctive present J :
Tu velim scribas or Tu scribas velim, / wish you
would write, I should like you to write, I would
have you write, I hope you will write. [It is
clear that ego is the subject of velim, tu of
scribas. Note that the pronoun tu is commonly,
though not necessarily, expressed.]
1 If the verbs have different subjects the depending verb is less
often in the infinitive, its subject being expressed in the accusative :
Caedi discipulos minime velim, 1 would by no means have the
pupils flogged.
134 LATIN COURSE
123. Vellem, I could have wished, should have liked
(but it is too late), Mallem, I should have preferred,
are used if the wishes are no longer realisable. The
depending verb is generally in the subjunctive
(sometimes with ut : negative ne) ; in the imperfect
tense in reference to the present ; in the pluperfect in
reference to the past :
Vellem viverent, / wish they were alive, Would that
they were alive.
Quam vellem adesses, How I wish you were, here.
Vellem ne scripsisses, / wish you had not written.
Note that in idiomatic English we often translate
velim and vellem with a dependent subjunctive by ' I
wish ' or, more emphatic, ' I do wish ' : beware of
translating this into Latin by the indicative.
THE POTENTIAL SUBJUNCTIVE 135
EXERCISE 18
In doing this exercise you must introduce the potential subjunctive
as far as possible. Do not, for example, use possum in 1 or spero in 4.
1. But you can never praise Plato too much or too
often.
2. I would have you think that no one was ever
more dear to any one than you to me.
3. This I would affirm without any hesitation that
eloquence is the most difficult of accomplish-
ments.
4. I hope you will forgive me if I am not able to
write so often.
5. When the battle was finished, then of a truth you
might have seen what a daring spirit there
had been in Catiline's army.
6. Would that Atticus could be here. Would that
he had not gone away from us.
7. I myself would not unwillingly go wrong in
Plato's company.
8. Perhaps some one may say, I do wish I were
allowed to do the same.
9. The letter which you sent the other day was very
pleasing to Pompeius, as I can easily under-
stand.
1. too much, minis valde.
Use nee . . . , nee . . .
3. affirm, confirmo (1).
Say ' that eloquence (eloquentia) is the most difficult accomplish-
ment (use res] of all.'
5. use cerno (3).
7. in Plato's company : use the preposition cum.
go wrong, erro (1).
9. the other day, proxime.
very pleasing, periucundus.
as ( = a thing which), quod.
136 LATIN COURSE
10. It would not have been easy to make out whether
Hannibal was dearer to the commander or to
the army.
11. Lastly — it may perhaps scarcely seem probable —
I hated this man much worse than I hated
Clodius himself.
12. How I wish we had our friend Panaetius with us.
13. Who would ever have thought that this great
war could be finished in one year by one
commander ?
14. Where now could you find in a single individual
this loftiness of mind which was at that time
a characteristic of the whole people ?
10. Say ' You could not easily have discerned ' (discerno).
11. probable, veri similis (like the truth),
worse : peius is used with odi,
13. Say hoc tantum bellum.
14. a single individual, unus.
loftiness of mind, altitude animi.
the whole people, populus universus.
XIV
124. COMMANDS
(1) Audi, Listen.
(2) Fac (ut) venias, Bring it about that you come,
Do come, Pray come, Be sure you come.
(3) Cura ut venias, Take good care to come, Mind
you come, Manage to come.
Commands are expressed (1) by the imperative,
(2) by/rtc (the imperative of facio) with (ut and) the
subjunctive, (3) by cur a (the imperative of euro, I
take care) with ut and the subjunctive.
125. PKOHIBITIONS
(1) Noli putare, Don't suppose (or, Please don't
suppose).
(2) Cave ne eas, Take care not to go, Mind you,
don't go.
Cave putes, Beware of thinking, Pray don't
think.
(3) [This form is rare] Hoc ne feceris, Do not do it
(or, You are not to do it).
(1) Prohibitions are generally expressed by noli or
nolite (the imperative of nolo, I do not wish, I am
unwilling) with the infinitive. Noli appeals to the
person addressed not to want to do the action referred
to : it is a polite form of speech, much like our
' Please don't do this.' It is an appeal rather than a
command. Hence it is always used by an orator
138 LATIN COURSE
addressing a jury or any body of men that he wishes
to please : nolite, indices, isti credere, Do not believe
him, gentlemen of the jury.
(2) Prohibitions are also expressed by cave (im-
perative of caveo, I am careful, cautious) with (ne and)
the subjunctive. Cave cautions the man addressed
against doing the action referred to. This is a polite
form of prohibition, because it suggests that in his own
interests the man should avoid the act.
(3) Ne with the perfect subjunctive represents a
peremptory, imperious order : it expresses in the
strongest possible way the will of the speaker that
the thing is not to be done : there is no appeal to the
feelings of the person addressed, no attempt to be
polite, no ceremony, but an order pure and simple.
The tone is that of the English ' You are to do this,
you are not to do that.' Hence this form of pro-
hibition is appropriate in addressing an inferior whom
one has the right to order about. Or it may be used
in speaking to a friend (especially an intimate friend
with whom there is no need of ceremony), but only if
the speaker is rather excited and very eager to prevent
his friend from doing something which he seems on
the point of doing. Hence it is, of course, never used
by an orator in speaking to a jury or a body of men
which he wishes to please.
In poetry ne with the imperative is often used in
prohibitions : equo ne credite, Teucri, Trust not the
horse, Trojans. It is perhaps worth noting that in
colloquial English we do not use the simple imperative
in prohibitions, though it is common enough in
poetry.
COMMANDS, PROHIBITIONS, AND THE LIKE 139
EXHORTATIONS
126. In the first person plural and the third person
singular and plural the present subjunctive supplies
the place of the imperative :
Cedamus, Let us yield.
Suum quisque noscat ingenium, Let each man know
his own mental powers.
127. Ne not non is the negative of all sentences
used to express the will of the speaker (volitive
sentences). Hence the use of ne in purpose clauses :
Ne quis putet, Let no one suppose.
Ne redeamus, Let us not return.
Contrast the potential subjunctive, Quis non laudet ?
Who would not praise ?
Ne may be followed by ne-ve, just as non is
followed by neque :
Ne tiraeamus neve desperemus, Let us not be afraid
nor lose hope.
128. The subjunctive is used in questions which
expect an answer in the imperative. This is called
the deliberative subjunctive :
Huic cedamus ? Are we to yield to him ? [Do you
bul us yield to him ?]
This is a sentence of the same type as Cedamus, Let
us yield, thrown into the form of a question.
140 LATIN COURSE
WISHES
129. We saw in 126 that the subjunctive is used
as a sort of imperative :
Eamus, Let us go.
Ne quis dubitet, Let no one doubt.
The tone is that of command or exhortation.
We pass on to a somewhat similar use of the
subjunctive :
Stet haec urbs, May this city continue to stand.
Moriar, May I die.
These sentences are optative rather than imperative
or hortative : the speaker expresses a wish that this
or that may happen, he does not order or exhort any
one to try to bring it about.
130. The subjunctive is often used in this way
with utinam, 0 that !
(a) Fut. Utinam (ne) veniat, 0 that he may (not)
come ! If only he were (not} to come.
(b) Pres. Utinam (ne) adesset, 0 that (or, Would
that) he were (not) here ! I wish he
were (not) here.
(c) Past. Utinam (ne) venisset, 0 that he had (not)
come ! Would that he had (not) come.
Observe that in the above sentences, as in con-
ditional sentences, the present subjunctive refers to
the future and represents the wish or condition as
still realisable ; the imperfect and pluperfect represent
COMMANDS, PROHIBITIONS, AND THE LIKE 141
the wish or condition as unrealisable, the imperfect
referring to present, the pluperfect to past time.
(a) Fut. Si veniat, If he were to come.
(b) Pres. Si adesset, If he were here.
(c) Past. Si venisset, If he had come.
Instead of utinam the potential subjunctive velim
or vellem may be used, as shown in 122—23.
(a) Fut. Velim veniat, / wish he would come.
(b) Pres. Vellem adesset, / wish he were here.
(c) Past. Vellem venisset, / wish he had come.
142 LATIN COURSE
EXERCISE 19
1. Go away quickly and hang yourself.
2. Nothing is more hateful than dishonour, nothing
more loathsome than slavery : either let us
hold to our freedom or let us die an honour-
able death.
3. Mind you keep well and send me a letter any
time you have the chance, so that I may know
what is going on in town.
4. Where am I to turn to avoid these troublesome
people ? I would go away into the country
at once if I were not expecting you here.
5. Be sure you come and see me when I get back.
6. As to what your boy is doing don't trouble
yourself: there is no reason why you should
distrust his teacher.
7. 0 that I may see the day when I may thank you
because you have compelled me to live : so
far indeed I much regret it.
8. 0 that you were at Rome ! You would have
stayed if we had thought that this would
happen. For if you were there we should
1. quickly, clto.
2. hateful, detestabilis. dishonour, dedecus, -Sris.
loathsome, foedus. hold to, teneo.
3. any time you have the chance : say ' as often as ever (quotiens-
cumque) you have any one to whom you can give (des) a letter,' As
to the subj. des see 157.
4. people, homines (a little contemptuous).
5. I come and see you, venio ad te.
6. distrust, diffldo (3), dat.
7. the day, ille dies.
so far indeed, adhuc quidem (hitherto at any rate).
8. happen : use sum.
COMMANDS, PROHIBITIONS, AND THE LIKE 143
have no difficulty in holding our enemy in our
power, or at any rate we should be able to get
information as to what he was going to do.
9. Pull yourself together, and reflect who you are
and what you have done.
10. It seemed to him in a dream that some god was
saying to him : This thou shalt do, this thou
shalt not do.
11. Pray do not suppose that any more welcome
letter than yours has ever been read out in
the senate.
12. Lastly, do not forget that you are Cicero.
13. May I die if I am not writing as I feel.
14. The gates are open, set off. Depart, and set the
state free from fear.
15. " No lies mind : did he make a plot against me ? "
" Yes, he did."
16. Pray don't suppose, because I write some wL at
lightly, that I have thrown aside all my care
for the state. Be sure of this, that day and
night I care for nothing but the safety and
liberty of my fellow-citizens.
say ' we should very easily hold in our power ' (teneo).
at any rate, certe.
get information, scio.
9. I pull myself together, me colligo (I collect myself).
reflect, consldero (1).
11. read out, r&Uo (1).
12. lastly, denlque.
13. He is not speaking as he feels, aliter loquitur ac sentit (he
speaks and feels differently).
16. somewhat lightly : use the comparative adverb from iocosus
( = in a jesting mood). As to this use of the comparative see note p. 45.
Be sure of this, Sic tibi persuade.
' days and nights I care for nothing else but that (nihil aliud euro
nisi nt) my fellow-citizens may be safe etc.'
XV
ORATIO OBLIQUA
131. The student is quite familiar with the construc-
tions illustrated by the following sentences :
1. Tulli# dixit se ilium in carcerem coniecturam,
Tullia said that she would throw him into
prison.
2. Imperavit (ut) ad urbem rediret, SJie ordered
him to return to the city.
3. Quaesivit ex eo num epistulam amisisset, She
asked whether he had lost the letter.
The first is an indirect statement ; the second an
indirect command ; the third is an indirect question.
Oratio obliqua (i.e. indirect, or reported speech) is
the general term under which are included indirect
questions, statements and commands. The term oratio
obiiqua is used especially of passages of reported speech
which run to any length, but it is quite correct to
apply it, as we have done above, to short indirect
statements or questions or commands ; and it is
obviously convenient to do so. We see then, that the
three first rules of oratio obliqua are
ORATIO OBLIQUA 145
1. Statements are put in the accusative and
infinitive.
2. Questions in the subjunctive.
3. Commands in the subjunctive : sometimes
with, more commonly without, ut.
132. To these we must add
4. In subordinate clauses the verb is in the
subjunctive. (This is, for you, the most important
rule of all because it is the least familiar.) Sub-
ordinate clauses are introduced by such words as the
relative pronoun, ' when,' ' where,' ' whence,' ' while,'
' if,' ' though,' ' because ' ; a subordinate clause taken
by itself makes no sense : for example in the sentence
' Have you lost the letter, which I gave you ? ' the
words in italics are the subordinate clause ; by
themselves they mean nothing.
133. We may illustrate rule 4 by adding sub-
ordinate clauses to the three sentences given above :
1. Dixit se ill u m, nisi epistulam repperisset, in
carcerem coniecturam. (Original words : Nisi
epistulam reppereris [fut. perf.] in carcerem te
coniciam.)
2. Imperavit ut ad urbem rediret unde venisset.
(Original words : Ad urbem redi, unde venisti.)
3. Quaesivit num epistulam amisisset, quam illi
dedisset. (Original words : Num epistulam
amisisti, quam tibi dedi ?)
134. We will now combine the three sentences into
one continuous piece. By beginning with the question
we shall get the best sense :
146 LATIN COURSE
Tullia quaesivit nuin, epistulam arnisisset, quam
illi dedisset. Ad urbem rediret unde venisset.
Se ilium nisi epistulam repperisset in carcerem
coniecturam, Tullia asked whether he had lost
the letter she had given him. He must return
to the city from which he had come. She
would throw him into prison if he did not find
the letter.
Note that imperavit (and with it ut) and dixit will
now be omitted : one verb quaesivit is sufficient to
introduce the whole speech.
135. It may be useful to add as a corollary to the
four rules given above, that the indicative will not be
used at all in oratio obliqua. The only indicative
in the passage above is quaesivit, and it introduces the
oratio obliqua and does not form part of it.
The rules for the moods in oratio obliqua are now
complete.1
136. Oratio obliqua may follow any verb of saying,
except inquit, (including, for example, to shout, to
urge, to promise, to complain, etc. etc.,) or of thinking,
knowing, feeling, etc., or any expression in which
saying or thinking is implied ; for example, Suspicio est,
there is a suspicion. In short, whenever a writer
1 With one unimportant exception. Rhetorical questions which
in the oratio recta would be in the indicative and in the first or third
person are expressed in the infinitive in oratio obliqua. A rhetorical
question is really a statement put in a vivid form ; no answer is
expected : for example, Quid est turpius quam iniutsu imperatoris
recedefe? What is more disgraceful than to retire without orders
from the general ? This becomes in oratio obliqua, Quid esse
turpius . . .? Contrast with this a real question to which an answer
is expected: Quid est facturus? What is he likely to do? This
becomes in oratio obliqua Quid esset facturus ?
ORATIO OBLIQUA 147
wants to put before us what was passing in the mind
of another he will generally use oratio obliqua. Hence
we find it on almost every page of Latin, and it is
important to see clearly how Latin oratio obliqua
differs from English reported thought or speech. Now
the characteristic of Latin oratio obliqua is the use
of the subjunctive and infinitive moods. In English,
on the other hand, we have no subjunctive, and our
use of the infinitive by no means corresponds to the
Latin.
137. In changing from oratio recta to oratio obliqua
in English we often have a change of tense, not often
of mood : in Latin both the moods and tenses are liable
to change, but tile important change is the change of
mood. Take a simple instance : in the following
sentences the only change in the English, besides the
obvious change of the pronouns, is a change of tense,
* will ' to ' would/ ' orders ' to f ordered ' ; in the Latin
we have a change of mood, faciam to facturum esse,
and of mood and tense, iusserit (fut. perf. ind.) to iussisset
(plpf. subj.).
Oratio recta : / will do what she orders, Ea quae
iusserit faciam.
Oratio obliqua : He said (or thought) he would do
what she ordered, Dixit se ea quae iussisset
facturum esse.
As the two languages are so different in this
respect, the easiest way to turn a piece of English
oratio obliqua into Latin is to put it first into oratio
recta in English, turn that into Latin, and then change
into oratio obliqua according to the rules.
148 LATIN COURSE
138. The rules for the moods have been given in
131-32. Eule 5 will deal with the tenses, Eule 6
with any other changes that may be necessary.
5. (i) When changing- the indicative to the
infinitive put the same : tense of the infinitive in
the oratio obliqua as you have of the indicative
in the oratio recta. Thus
scribo will become (dixit) se scribere,
scribam will become (dixit) se scripturum,
scripsi will become (dixit) se scripsisse.
(ii) When changing* to the subjunctive follow
the rule of sequence. (See Sect. 13.)
If the verb which introduces the oratio obliqua is
in a historic tense — and in this book this is com-
monly the case — then by the rules of sequence the
only possible tenses of the subjunctive are the historic
tenses, the imperfect and pluperfect. Hence a present
or future indicative, and any form of command or
prohibition, in the oratio recta will become imperfect
subjunctive in oratio obliqua ; for example
si scribit } f
or j- will change to Isi scriberet.
si scribet ]
scribe, ' write/ will change to scriberet, ' let him write,
he must write.'
A perfect, future perfect, or pluperfect indicative in
the oratio recta will become pluperfect subjunctive in
oratio obliqua :
1 In writing these rules I have aimed at clearness not at complete-
ness : I have not, for instance, mentioned that scribebam would
become scripsisse.
ORATIO OBLIQUA 149
si scripsit \ f
si scripserat V will change to -j s* scripsisset.
si scripserit j
A verb which is in the subjunctive in oratio recta
will of course remain in the subjunctive in oratio
obliqua. The tense will be subject to the rules of
sequence. Hence Mittam qui pacem petant, I will
send men to ask for peace, will become Dixit se
missurnm qui pacem peterent.
139. If you have fully understood what you have
read you will be prepared for the statement that you
can scarcely go wrong if you keep the three following
cautions before your mind :
1. Don't use the indicative.
2. When you use the infinitive (and you know
when to use it) put the same tense as you have in
the oratio recta.
3. If a verb is not in the infinitive it must be in
the subjunctive. The only possible tenses are the
imperfect or pluperfect : work from the oratio recta
by the rules of sequence.
140. 6. Besides the verbs some other words will be
liable to change, but the English will generally guide
you. Obviously the pronouns will in many instances
require change as in English. For instance
(Ego) meum librum amisi.
Dixit se suum librum amisisse.
(Tu) librum amisisti.
Dixit ilium amisisse librum.
If ' he ' in the oratio obliqua stands for ' I ' in the
oratio recta the Latin will be se ; meus and noster will
150 LATIN COURSE
change to suus. Compare 33. If, on the other hand,
' he ' stands for ' you ' the Latin will be ilium : tuus
and vester will change to illius, illorum.
Observe that the subject of the infinitive must be
expressed. Ego and tu may be omitted in the above
sentences, but se and ilium cannot be left out.
Such words as ' to-day/ ' to-morrow/ ' now,' ' here,'
will obviously need change. ' I cannot come to-day '
must be changed to 'He said he could not come on
that day.' Here common sense will guide you.
141. Examples. I. Statements depending on a
verb in a historic tense, arranged according to the
tense of the subordinate clause :
Indicative. Present.
Qui docent discunt.
Intellegebat eos, qui docerent, discere, He found
that men learned "by teaching.
Servos, si necesse est, in crucem tollo.
Fatebatur se servos, si necesse esset, in crucem
tollere, He would own that he crucified his slaves,
if ever it was necessary.
142. Future.
Si conalor, opus brevi tempore conficiam.
Sperabam me opus, si conarer, brevi tempore con-
fectururn (or, Sperabam fore ut opus, si conarer,
brevi tempore conficerem), / hoped I should soon
finish the work if I tried.
Si pugnabit, vincetur.
Putabamus eum, si pugnaret, victum iri (or,
ORATIO OBLIQUA 151
Putabamus fore ut, si pugnaret, vinceretur),
We thought he would be beaten if he fought.
Note that fore ut is often used in preference to
the other form of the future infinitive active, and
'that where the verb has no future participle fore ut
must be used : for instance
Sperabam fore ut disceret.
Negaverunt fore ut convalesceret.
In the passive fore ut is found more commonly
than the awkward combination of the supine with the
impersonal iri.
143. Perfect.
Qui mihi insidias paraverunt, eos capitis damnavi.
Scripsit se eos, qui sibi insidias paravissent, capitis
damnavisse, He wrote (to tell me) that he had
condemned to death the men who had made plots
against him.
144. Future Perfect.
Cum urbem cepero, faciam te certiorem.
Promisit se me, cum urbem cepisset, certiorem
facturum, He promised to send me information
when he had taken the city.
145. Pluperfect.
Qui flumen transierant ab hostibus interfecti sunt.
Imperatori renuntiavit eos, qui flumen transissent,
ab hostibus esse interfectos, He brought word
to the commander that the men who had crossed
the river had been killed.
152 LATIN COURSE
146. Subjunctive. Present.
Nihil interest mea utrum hodie an eras dbeas, It
makes no difference to me whether you go to-day
or to-morrow.
Negavit sua quidquam interesse utrum ille illo die
an postero dbiret (that clay or the next).
With regard to vague future conditional sentences,
see 151.
147. Perfect.
Oblivisceris quantas tu in me iniurias commiseris.
Dixi ilium oblivisci quantas ipse in me iniurias
commisisset, I said that he forgot how he him-
self had wronged me.
148. Imperfect and Pluperfect.
Cum haec confecissem et iam requiescerem adiit
Tullia, When I had finished this and was just
beginning to rest Tullia came to me.
Cum ea confecisset et iam requiesceret, adiisse
Tulliam dixit.
With regard to unfulfilled condition sentences,
see 151.
149. II. Examples of commands :
Imperator Nondum est, inquit, tempus pugnae:
castris vos tenete : nolite perturbari hostium
clamoribus : ne quis a loco discedat, The
general said, " The time for fighting has not yet
come : keep in the camp : don't be disturbed by the
shouts of the enemy : let no one leave his place."
ORATIO OBLIQUA 153
Imperator respondit nondum esse tempus pugnae ;
castris se tenerent : ne perturbarentur hostium
clamoribus : ne quis a loco discederet.
Di immortales in Galliam te revocant : redi : ne
transieris Kubiconem, The immortals gods recall
you to Gaul : (jo back : do not cross the Rubicon.
Deos immortales in Galliam ilium revocare : rediret :
ne transiret Paibiconem.
If you feel doubtful how to put an indirect com-
mand supply impero (or hortor or some verb of similar
meaning), e.g. imperamt ut se tenerent : imperavit ne
perturbarentur etc.
Observe that ne feceris or noli facere will be
represented by ne faceret.
150. III. Questions:
Non intellego cur in meam domum veneris : quis
te invitamt ? Quid cupis ? Quando exibis ?
Clamavit se non intellegere cur in suam domum
venisset : quis ilium invitasset ? Quid cuperet ?
Quando esset exiturus ?
In a question the future indicative is represented
by the future participle with the proper form of the
subjunctive of sum. Compare the use of the participle
to form a future infinitive, dixi eum exiturum esse.
If you feel doubtful how to put an indirect question
supply quaero. For instance Quaesivit quis ilium in-
vitasset : quaesivit quid cuperet : quaesivit quando esset
exiturus.
154 LATIN COURSE
151. 7. The rules given above as to the moods
and tenses in oratio obliqua will apply to all sentences,
except the two kinds of conditional sentence in which
the subjunctive is used in oratio recta. These are (a)
the vague future, (&) the unfulfilled condition :
(a) Si adsit (or, venerit, perf. subj.) certiores nos
faciat (or,fecerit, perf. subj.), If he were to come,
he would give us the information.
This in oratio obliqua would be
Putabam eum, si adesset (or, venisset), certiores nos
facturum esse,
In the principal clause faciat or fecerit will be
changed into the future infinitive. In the 'if '-clause
follow the rules of sequence, according to which veniat
will become veniret, venerit will become venisset.
Note that the vague future in oratio obliqua is not
distinguished from the vivid future.1 Si aderit (fut.)
or venerit (fut. perf.) certiores nos faciet (If he comes he
will give us the information), would be represented by
the same oratio obliqua as we have above :
Putabam eum si adesset (or, venisset) certiores nos
facturum esse.
(b) 1. Si adesset, certiores nos faceret, If he were
here he would be giving us the information (but
he is not here).
2. Si venisset, certiores nos fecisset, Had he come,
he would have given us the information (but he
has not come).
1 This is also the case in Greek so far as the ' if -clause is concerned,
in oratio obliqua may represent ta.v £X0u or el 2\0oi/j.i.
ORATIO OBLIQUA 155
These will become in oratio obliqua
1. Putabam eum, si adesset, certiores nos facturum
fuisse.
2. Putabam eum, si venisset, certiores nos facturum
fuisse.
The ' if '-clause is not changed : facer et and fecisset
both change is facturum fuisse.
Here are a few more examples : 1
(a) Si id dicas, mentiaris, If you were to say that,
you would tell a lie.
Dixi ilium, si id diceret, mentiturum esse, / re-
marked that, if he said that, he would tell a lie.
Si id fecerim, virgis me caedat, If I were to
do so, he would flog me.
Cogitabam eum me, si id fecissem, virgis
caesurum esse, / reflected that, if I were to do
so, he would flog me.
(6) Si id dixissem, mentitus essem, If I had said
so, I should have told a lie.
Sensi me, si id dixissem, mentiturum fuisse, /
felt that if I had said so, I should have told a lie.
Caederem te nisi irascerer, / should flog you, if
I were not feeling angry.
Kespondi me ilium, nisi irascerer, caesurum
fuisse, / replied that I should flog him, if I
were not feeling angry.
1 See also the examples in 28 (p. 20).
156 LATIN COURSE
152. The student who has fully mastered the fore-
going rules will do well to read this paragraph. We have
confined ourselves hitherto to oratio obliqua introduced
by a historic tense. Suppose the introducing verb be
in a primary tense rule 5 will be modified : wherever
by rule 5 we had the imperfect subjunctive we shall
now have the present, and wherever we had the
pluperfect we shall now have the perfect.
Thus
si scribit
i will become si scribat,
si scnoet
si scripsit } ....
. ., ,„ , *vr » » si scnpsent.
si scnpsent (tut. perf.)J
This is, of course, what would be expected from
the rule of sequence. There is one exception : the
unfulfilled condition sentence retains the historic tense
even after a verb in a primary tense. For instance
Scribit se, si exercitui prae-fuisset, urbem deleturum
fuisse, He writes that had he been in command
of the troops he would have utterly destroyed the
city.
ORATIO OBLIQUA 157
EXERCISE 20
Each sentence to be translated first in oratio recta, then in oratio
obliqua. Study Sections 131 to 145.
1. He promised to give me all the books which his
brother had left him. (Or. recta. I will give
you all the books which my brother left me.)
2. Xerxes the king of the Persians promised to give
a large reward to the man who discovered a
new pleasure. (Or. recta. I will give etc. to
that man who shall have discovered, etc.)
3. There was a strong suspicion that, if the Helve tii
tried to leave their territory, they would
march through the province.
4. They brought news that the men who were in the
city were dying of hunger : they would give
the city up to the enemy, unless we sent
them help within three days.
Before you begin the exercise study the order of words in the
examples given in 141 to 145. Note especially (1) that the subordinate
clause often comes in between the accusative and the infinitive : for
instance Dixit se, si posset, venturum, He said he would come if he
could ; (2) tha,t the personal pronouns tend to come together : for
instance Dixit se mihi, si posset, subventurum ; (3) look at sentence
3: the Latin order will be 'that the Helvetii, if they tried . . .,
would march.' The subject of the infinitive will be brought out of
the subordinate clause. It is a general rule in Latin but not in
English that the subject of the principal verb must not be placed in a
subordinate clause : we say ' If the Helvetii try to do it, they will
march through our province ' : the Romans say ' The Helvetii, if they
try to do it, will march etc.' Again, 'When Caesar returned he was
informed of the matter,' Caesar, cum redisset, de ea re certior factus est.
1. leave, relinquo.
2. discover, invenio.
4. the men who: say 'those who . . .' Translate in the same way
' a man who ' in the next sentence. In this sentence you will have
more than one infinitive depending on nuntiaverunt. You will often
have a long series of infinitives depending on one verb of saying or
thinking. Remember this in 7.
158 LATIN COURSE
5. I saw that a slave war would be a great danger
to a man who possessed so many slaves.
G. I thought that if we gave him money he would
lead us to the road.
7. There was a rumour that Bibulus had driven back
the Parthians who had advanced in the
direction of (ad) Antioch : that nevertheless
the chiefs who were loyal to us were iu the
greatest danger : that the king of the Persians
would help the Parthians, if necessary. So, if
we did not want to lose the whole province,
we must make our way to Antioch without
delay.
8. They saw that if they cut our army off from the
ships they would win.
9. He replied that, if they did not bring the hostages
they had promised, he would burn their towns
and lay waste their fields : when he received
the hostages he would arrange a peace.
10. When I saw it I told them that I thought it was
the very thing I was looking for.
5. slave war, servile bellum. servilis is an adjective formed from
servus, like civilis from civis.
possess : use sum.
7. it is necessary, opus est.
10. it is the very thing, id ipsum est.
ORATIO OBLIQUA 159
EXERCISE 21
Translate into English and re-write in Latin in oratio recta.
1 . Quaerentibus amicis cui relinqueret regnum respon-
dit ei qui esset optimus.
2. Kecte Graeci docebant ea non temptanda esse
quae effici non possent.
3. Senatus imperavit ut quicumque Galliam pro-
vinciam teneret, Haeduos defenderet. (Or.
recta. Quicumque tenebit, defendat, Let him
defend.)
4. Socrates dicere solebat onmes in eo quod scirent
satis esse eloquentes.
5. Respondit eas aedes esse relinquendas : cui enim
tot et tales essent libri, ei incendium maximo
fore dolori.
6. Videbat fore ut, si essent hostes pulsi, celeritate
periculum effugerent.
7. Etiamsi omnes deos horninesque celare possemus,
uihil tamen iniuste faciendum esse docuit.
8. Thernistocles respondit gratius sibi ilium esse
facturum, si se oblivisci quae vellet docuisset.
9. Eurn omnium laborum finem fore existimabant, si
hostem Hibero intercludere potuissent.
10. Etiamsi tempus ad bellum conficiendum deficeret,
tamen utilissimum sibi fore arbitrabatur, si
modo insulam adisset, et genus hominum
perspexisset, portus cognovisset.
11. Praedixit dormienti fore ut ille, cum Karthaginem
delevisset, consul absens deligeretur bellumque
maximum conficeret.
160 LATIN COURSE
EXERCISE 22
Each piece of oratio obliqua in the following sentences to be trans-
lated first in oratio recta. Study 131 to 151.
1. Ariovistus replied that he had come into Gaul
before the Roman people: why had Caesar
come into his territory ?
2. All along the line the leaders were proclaiming
that no one was to leave his place : the booty
was theirs, and for .them was reserved what-
ever the Koruans left behind : so they must
remember that everything depended on their
winning the victory. (Or. recta. Let no one
leave his place : yours is the booty, and for
you is reserved, whatever the Eomans shall
have left : so remember, etc.)
3. He boasted that if he had tried he would easily
have beaten me.
1. It is possible to go wrong in translating the word 'before' in
this sentence. Compare the following: De mails nostris tu prius
audis quam ego, You hear of our troubles before I do. Or. obi. Dixi
ilium de malis nostris prius audire quam me (or quam ego audirem}.
Observe that me is in the accusative case, the same case as ilium,
unless we express the verb in the quam-cla,use. Compare also : dico
eum eadem timuisse quae ceteros. Compare the note to Ex. 16. 12.
2. The men are trying to leave their ranks in order to secure their
share of the loot : the officers are trying to persuade them that the
baggage etc. which the Romans have abandoned will be kept for them,
but that they must remember that they have not beaten the Romans
yet.
proclaim, pronuntidre (ne).
so remember, proinde existimate. Proinde is used in exhortations.
3. boast, gloriari. See 151.
ORATIO OBLIQUA 161
4. He urged the soldiers • to jump down into the
water if they did not want to give up their
colours to the enemy : lie declared that he at
any rate would do his duty to the state and
their general. (Or. recta. Jump down into
the water, soldiers, unless you want . . . : I at
any rate will do . . .)
5. I knew that if he had wanted to see me he would
have summoned me to his presence.
6. When Philip sent a letter to the Lacedaemonians
threatening to prevent everything they might
try to do, they inquired whether he would
even prevent their dying. (Or. recta, (i) I
will prevent everything which you try to do.
(ii) Will you prevent us dying ?)
7. When my friend Atticus was staying with me a
little while ago at my house at Cumae, a
message was brought me from Marcus Varro
to say that he had corne from Eome on the
previous evening, and that he would have
come straight on to see us if he had not been
tired after the journey.
4. give up the colours, aquilam prodere. The standard of the
Roman legion in Caesar's time was a silver eagle,
at any rate, certe.
to do one's duty, officium prae-stare.
6. Or. recta (i) to prevent everything, prohibere omnia. (ii) I
prevent your dying, prohibeo vos mori (ace. and infin. as with veto,
iubeo, patior}. 0. obi. The order will be : The Lacedaemonians
when P. threatened (abl. abs. ) by letter (per litteras minitari) etc.
7. a little while ago, nuper.
at my house at Cumae, in Cumano. Varro, Varro, -onis.
on the previous evening, pridie vesperi (on the previous day in the
evening ; so ' this evening ' is hodie vesperi, ' yesterday evening, ' heri
vesperi).
straight on, continuo.
tired after the journey, de via fessus.
M
162 LATIN COURSE
8. I begged him to stay where he was : / said that
there did not seem to be any reason why he
should leave his friends : if anything happened
I would send him a letter at once. (Or. recta.
Do stay where you are : there does not appear
to rne to be any reason etc.)
8. Do stay : see 124.
if anything happens, si quid novi acciderit.
Or. obi. Note that 'I said' is omitted after ' I begged.' A Latin
writer slips very easily from an indirect petition or question to an
indirect statement. The use of the accusative and infinitive shows
that it is an indirect statement, and so the verb is unnecessary.
ORATIO OBLIQUA 163
EXEECISE 23
Write the oratio recta first.
1. He went to Capua and there found the consuls
and Pompeius, to whom he delivered Caesar's letter.
When they had read it they replied : Caesar was to
return to Gaul, to leave Ariminum, and dismiss his
armies : if he did so, Pompeius would go to Spain.
Meanwhile, till a guarantee was given that Caesar would
do what he promised, the consuls and Pompeius would not
interrupt their levies. (Or. recta. Let Caesar return
. . ., let him leave . . ., let him dismiss . . . ; if he
does so, P. will go. ... Meanwhile, till a guarantee
be given that C. will do what he promises, the consuls
and P. will not interrupt. . . .)
2. Ariovistus has crossed the Ehine and has taken
up his position in the territory of our allies the Haedui:
he is demanding the corn which they promised to give
us and is holding their largest town under his cruel
dominion. (Or. obliqua. A message was brought
saying that A. had crossed etc.)
3. We must not delay longer: within a few days
all our allies will revolt from us : we must not wait
for the cavalry to arrive : all is over with the Haedui :
Ariovistus is at hand : and the soldiers terrified by his
1. Or. recta. Let C. return : see 126. For ' return ' use revertor, I
turn back.
I give a guarantee, fidem do, followed by the same construction as
promitto. For ' till ' use quoad with fut. perf. in the or. recta,
interrupt, intermitto.
2. their largest town : say 'the town which they have largest.'
3. and the soldiers terrified by his approach : begin with the
relative, ' by whose approach the soldiers being terrified.' The verb
will be in the infinitive, for cuius = et eius ; the clause is not sub-
ordinate.
164 LATIN COURSE
approach will not dare to fight unless we set out at
once. (Or. obliqua. We thought it best to delay no
longer : the allies would revolt etc.)
4. Do not look round : on, on, Hannibal : as to
what happens behind thee take no heed. (Or. obliqua.
The god warned Hannibal not to look round etc.)
5. He said that he had ten legions ready : more-
over he had ascertained that Caesar was unpopular
with the soldiers and that they could not be per-
suaded to follow him. He urged that troops should be
levied throughout Italy, that Sulla should be sent to
Sicily, that money should be given to Pompeius to
carry on the war. (Or. recta. I have ten legions
ready etc. . . . Let troops be levied. . . .)
6. Cicero said that Scipio would not have con-
quered Carthage so easily if Sicily had not helped
him. Sicily had been the first to teach the Eoman
people how glorious a thing it was to rule over the
nations.
4. on, on : use the verb pergere, to go on.
as to what you do I take no heed, quid tu facias non laboro (1).
Non laboro means ' I don't trouble myself ' : it takes an indirect
question in the sense ' I don't trouble to think. '
behind thee, a tergo.
5. Caesar is unpopular with the soldiers, milites alieno sunt animo
in Caesarem.
throughout Italy, tola Italia.
6. help : use the phrase auxilio esse with dative.
ORATIO OBLIQUA 165
EXERCISE 24
Do each sentence first in oratio recta, then in oratio obliqua.
1. Clive will come quickly to our support : he will
arrive at the fort within three days : in the meanwhile
there is nothing to fear : there are supplies enough for
two months, and in our strongly built fort we can
keep back any number of the Indians. Our safety
depends on our courage : let us not lose hope, but let
us get everything ready for the defence of the fort. (Or.
obliqua. He pretended that Clive would come . . .)
2. I cannot come, lest in my absence the whole
province should revolt : accordingly, if any opportunity
presents itself, force your way out of the camp, and
come to me with all your forces. (Or. obliqua. Clive
wrote to say that he could not . . .)
3. We who remain in the fort are in the greatest
danger : as supplies are running short, and there is
no hope of cutting our way through the enemy, we
shall in a few days die either by the sword or by star-
vation. (Or. obliqua. It was reported that those who
remained etc.)
1. Clive, imperator.
there is nothing to fear : see 157.
to keep the enemy back, sustimre hastes.
any number : quims means any one you please, quantus-vis as large
as you please ; so quantas-vis copias Indorum, any number of the
Indians [however great you please to suppose them].
2. to force or cut one's way, erumpere.
3. by the sword or starvation, fame autferro.
166 LATIN COURSE
4. The Kaffirs have sent messengers in all directions
to let the neighbouring chiefs know how few there are
of us and what a good opportunity presents itself to
set their country free. (Or. obliqua. They informed
us that the Kaffirs had sent . . .)
5. [They say to one another,] If we can cut off this
little band of Englishmen from the rest of the army,
the English will even gladly make peace in order to
rescue their friends from their perilous position. (Or.
obliqua. The Kaffirs thought that if they could cut
off etc.)
6. You will be too late unless you arrive at the
fort to-morrow. (Or. obliqua. The messenger said
that we should be too late . . .)
7. What is to be done? If we set off to the
assistance of our comrades, the enemy will march down
to the sea and burn our ships ; if they do so, it will
soon be all over with us. (Or. obliqua. We felt
doubtful what was to be done. We thought that if we
set off . . .)
4. Kaffirs, barbari.
send in all directions, in .omnes paries dimitto.
5. even gladly, vel laetus (adjective).
I rescue them from a perilous position, ex periculo eos eripio (3).
6. you will be too late, sero facietis.
ORATIO OBLIQUA 167
EXERCISE 25
To be done first in oratio recta, then in oratio obliqua.
I have a communication to make to the officer in
command. I am a friend of the English people
through whose kindness I have recovered the kingdom
of my ancestors. At present, however, it is necessary
to conceal my friendly feeling and to simulate hatred
if I want to help you. As to the attack made on
your camp by my men, I was compelled to make it,
in order that the rest of the Indians might have no
doubt as to my loyalty : now that their suspicions have
been removed I have got information as to their plans :
so I have come both to ask forgiveness and to warn
you that all the Indians have made a conspiracy : on
an appointed day they are going to attack all your
forts, so that one regiment may not be able to come to
the aid of another. Therefore I warn, nay I beg you
to provide for the safety of your men. If you want
to get away in safety, you must start before the forces
of the Indians have come together. At present it
is easy for me to lead even a force encumbered with
I have a communication to make : say ' I have what (pi.) I would
like to say.'
recover, recupero (1).
to help you : use auxilio sum with dative.
As to the attack : see 162.
suspicions : use the singular.
so that one regiment . . . : say ' lest any regiment be able to come
to the aid of another ' (alteri).
in safety : use the adj. incolumis.
a force encumbered with baggage, impedltos milites.
168 LATIN COURSE
baggage through my territory, from which it is not a
long march to Fort William. This one promise I can
make, namely that I will to-morrow conduct you
safely through my territory. On the other hand, if
you linger till the whole of Bengal is in revolt, I shall
not be able to help you. I beg you to tell no one that
I have been in the English camp. (Or. obliqua.
The Eajah said that he had a communication to make
etc. He was a friend ,.-..)
Fort William, castra imperatoris.
to conduct safely, tutum iter dare.
On the other hand, Contra.
Bengal : say provincia.
ORATIO OBLIQUA 169
EXERCISE 26
Each passage to be done first in oratio recta, then in oratio obliqua.
1. What is to be done ? If the Rajah spoke the
truth, I ought to act promptly. I must this very
night make every preparation for departure. Never-
theless I must not act rashly, and I ought not to leave
the camp without orders from the general. Any
number of the natives can be held in check. I not
only withstood the first attack, but even drove back a
host of the barbarians with great slaughter. I have
supplies enough for twenty days: in the meanwhile
support will come from the nearest forts and from the
general. (Or. obliqua. He felt doubtful what to do.
If the Rajah had spoken the truth, he ought to
act etc.)
2. Plots are being made against the Sultan
Farfonilla by his enemies : the Englishmen who live in
the district in pursuit of trade are in the greatest
danger. (There was a rumour that plots were being
made etc.)
3. Set sail for the city as speedily as possible with
three cruisers. (I was ordered to set sail etc.)
4. The Sultan has already been poisoned : his
kingdom has been seized by his uncle Duroba : the
Englishmen will be murdered unless you are willing to
protect them. (Men came to report to me that the
Sultan had already been poisoned etc.)
]. any number (you please), quantae-vis copiae.
natives, Indi.
support, subsidium (pi.).
170 LATIN COURSE
5. If you do not surrender to me at once, I shall
bombard your city : if I do so, I shall punish you and
your friends. If, however, you come to me at once, I
will grant you your life. (I wrote to say that if he
did not surrender ... I should bombard etc.)
6. The Sultan committed suicide : I tried to per-
suade him not to do so, but was not successful. Now
that the Sultan is dead, I have been made Sultan by
the citizens in accordance with ancestral custom, and
I will not yield to you. If you choose to fight, I am
ready to defend the city. (He pretended that the
Sultan had committed suicide : that he had tried to
... he would not yield to me. If I chose to fight
he was ready . . .)
6. I am not successful, nihil efficio.
XVI
THE SUBJUNCTIVE IN EELATIVE CLAUSES
153. The subjunctive is, of course, used in a relative
clause, when it would be used in a simple sentence :
Simple. Haec dicere velim, / should like to say this.
Eelative. Haec habeo, quae dicere velim.
154. The subjunctive is used, as we have seen, in a
relative clause which forms part of a reported speech
or thought (oratio obliqua) :
O.K. Libros quos frater meus reliquit tibi dabo.
(a) 0.0. Dixit se libros quos frater suus reliquisset
mihi daturum.
155. It is not necessary that there should be any
verb of saying or thinking (such as dixit in the
sentence above) to introduce the speech or thought of
another : for example
(b) Paetus omnes libros quos f rater suus reliquisset
mihi donavit, means Paetus made me a present
of all the books which his brother (so he told me)
had left him.
Here the use of the subjunctive (reliquisset) and of
the reflexive pronoun show that the relative clause
is oblique ; i.e. they show that in this clause the
writer (Cicero) is reporting what Paetus had said to
him.
172 LATIN COURSE
In another letter Cicero writes
(c) Paetus mihi libros eos, quos Ser. Claudius reli-
quit, donavit.
This means, of course, Paetus has given me the
books which Claudius left him.
Here he is not reporting what Paetus had said to
him : he makes the statement that Claudius had left
the books to Paetus directly, not obliquely.
This use of the subjunctive is very convenient :
such parentheses as ' so he told me/ ' as alleged,' ' as
he said ' are often unnecessary in Latin, because the
mood shows that the writer is reporting.
156. The subjunctive is used, as we have seen in 8,
in relative sentences which express a purpose. Here
qui = ut is. This is especially common after verbs of
coming, sending, giving and choosing :
Venerunt qui nuntiarent, Men came to report.
Missus sum qui dicerem, I was sent to say.
Litteras ad eum scripsi quibus monerern, / sent him
a letter to warn him.
Delegisti quos Bomae relinqueres, You picked out
men to leave at Rome.
157. The subjunctive is used in relative sentences
which express a tendency or a result, just as it is used
in consecutive sentences after ut. Here again qui = ut
is or talis ut is
Nemo tarn sapiens est qui sciat omnia, No one is so
wise as to know everything.
THE SUBJUNCTIVE IN RELATIVE CLAUSES 173
Note the force of the subjunctive in the following ;
it is rendered in many different ways in English :
Sunt qui putent or Nonnulli sunt qui putent or
Non desunt qui putent, There are some who
think (There are some of a sort, to think, such
as think).
Nemo est qui me doceat, There is no one to teach me.
Nemo est unde discam, There is no one from whom
I can learn.
Habeo quod dicam, / have something to say.
Nihil est quod dicas, There is nothing for you to
say.
Quid causae est cur doleas ? What is the reason for
your sorrow ?
Nihil est (or Nulla causa est) cur doleas, There is
no reason why you should grieve.
158. The relative is used in the same way after
dignus, worthy, idoneus, suitable, aptus, fitted, is ( = the
sort of man to), talis, tantus, unus, solus.
Dignus est quern imiteris, He is woi*th imitating
(worthy that you should imitate him).
Unus est qui riobis subveniat, He is the one man to
help us (or, who can help us).
Non sum ego is qui te decipiam, / am not the (sort
of) man to deceive you.
Non tu is es unde pecuniam exspectem, You are
not the man from whom / should expect (to get)
money.
174 LATIN COURSE
EXERCISE 27
Ut is not to be used in this exercise. The relative pronoun qui
or one of the relative adverbs, such as unde, cur, to be used in each
sentence. The relative will take the subjunctive in sentences of the
type shown in 153-58 ; the exercise also contains sentences in which
the relative is used with the indicative.
1. What state is so strong that it cannot be over-
thrown ?
2. No one seems to me better fitted to write about
the war.
3. What is the reason why you weep ? Do not ask
me, lest I cause you to weep also.
4. They sent envoys to Rome to ask help from the
senate.
5. Virtue bids us love those who are unfriendly to us.
6. The earth never gives back without interest what
it receives.
7. The man who knows how to obey is also worthy
to command.
8. This is what I had to say about old age.
9. There is no reason why you should ask him to
dinner.
10. You are robbing Peter to pay Paul.
11. No one is so foolish as to deny it.
12. You are not the sort of person to know what is
going on.
13. You considered Crassus a suitable person to send.
1. to overthrow, evertere. 2. better fitted, aptior.
3. I cause you to weep also : say ' I bring you to that same
weeping, ' in eundem fletum te adduco.
6. interest, usura. 7. I know how to . . . : see 103.
9. I ask him to dinner, invito (1) eum ad cenam.
10. Say 'You are stealing from Peter what you may give to
Paul. ' For ' steal ' use eripio (rapio, I snatch) with dative of the person.
Petrus, Paulus.
13. consider, iudicare.
THE SUBJUNCTIVE IN RELATIVE CLAUSES 175
14. There is nothing for you to be afraid of.
15. Who is there from whom we can expect aid ?
16. What he said to me he will also say to you.
17. Now he has something to promise.
18. He is the only man we can trust.
19. I received a letter from him yesterday: he had
not much to tell : he was sending me some
statues which his sister had bought. Please
send a man to pay for the carriage.
20. I have absolutely nothing to write : for I have
no orders to give (for you have neglected
nothing), and nothing to tell you (for there is
no news), and it is not an occasion for jesting :
I have so many anxieties. This much, how-
ever, you should know, that I am going to
start on March 14. Therefore let your letters
follow me, so that I may hear not only all
that really happens but also all the rumours.
I shall receive them at Brindisi : for there I
intend to wait for the commander-in-chief.
If he tells me anything that you would wish
to hear, I will write.
19. for the carriage, pro vectura (veho = l carry in a boat or cart).
20. I have absolutely nothing : say ' there is absolutely nothing,'
plane de-est. Connect the sentences which follow with nee : ' neither
have I any orders to give . . ., nor anything to relate . . ., nor is it
an occasion for jesting (locus iocandi).'
to give orders (i.e. to tell a friend or a servant to do this or that
for you), manddre.
to neglect, praetermitto ( = pass over, leave undone).
anxieties: say 'so many things make me anxious,' sollidtare, to
make anxious.
This much, tantum.
you should know : use the imperative of scio, which is not sci but
scito. March 14 : see 163 ff.
what really happens, res contrasted with rumores.
XVII
CAUSAL SENTENCES
159. Cum takes the subjunctive :
Quae cum ita shit, Since this is the case, This being
so.
Quod, quid, quoniam take the indicative.
Quod and quia are, of course, connected with qui :
indeed, quod is the ace. neut. singular. You may see
how they got the sense of ' because ' from such a
sentence as this :
Expulsus est propterea (on account of this} quod
(namely that) filium defendit, or, ob earn causam
(for this reason) quod (that) etc.
Such expressions as proptere&, ob earn causam, idcirco,
are often used with quod and quia ; in these expressions
-ea, earn, id- are the antecedents of the relative.
Quoniam iam nox est, in vestra tecta discedite, As
it is now dark (or, Now that it is dark), depart
to your homes.
Quoniam was originally Cum iam, ' Since now.'
In classical Latin it is not used as a temporal con-
junction, but still there is something of its temporal
meaning left in it ; the best translation is often ' now
that/ It is very often used with iam as in the
example.
CAUSAL SENTENCES 177
160. Quod, quia, quoniam take the subjunctive in
oratio obliqua.
This is, of course, what you would expect, as all
subordinate clauses of oratio obliqua have subjunctive :
Monuit eos ut ab urbe discederent quod hostis
adesset, He warned them to leave the city because
the enemy were near.
Here the <^od-clause is part of the warning. Compare
Quod hostis aderat monuit eos etc., As the enemy
were near he warned them etc.
Here the quod-clause is not part of the warning, but
the cause which made him issue the warning.
161. The verb of saying or thinking may be implied,
the subjunctive of the causal sentence alone showing
that the writer does not give the reason as his own,
but is telling us what some one else thought or said :
Expulsus est patria Aristides, quod praeter modum
iustus esset, Aristides was banished because, as
people felt, he was too just, or, on the ground
that he was too just [praeter modum, beyond the
proper limit for a human being].
Note how convenient this use of the subjunctive is
in Latin to distinguish what a writer says on his own
responsibility from what he is putting into the mouth
of one of his characters. In English we sometimes have
to add ' as he said ' or some such words. Compare 155.
Hence the subjunctive in the following :
Socrates accusatus est quod corrumperet iuventutem,
Socrates was accused of corrupting youth (because,
as they said, he corrupted).
178 LATIN COURSE
Queritur quod fecerim, He complains that I have
done it (because, as he says, I have done it).
Dolebat quod fecissem, He was grieved to think I
had done it.
162. QUOD MEANING " AS TO THE FACT THAT "
Quod is often used at the beginning of a sentence,
where we might say ' As to the fact that/ ' With
reference to what . . ./ and the like :
1. Quod scribis de Pompeio, nulla causa est cur
timeas, As to what you say in your letter about
Pompeius, there is no reason why you should
feel frightened.
2. Quod hominem condemnavi, recte feci, As to the
fact that I condemned the fellow, I was right in
doing so.
It is often convenient to use a substantive to translate
the verb following quod', in (1) we might say 'As to
your remark/ in (2) 'With reference to the sentence I
Of course in oratio obliqua the ^wo^-clause, like
other relative clauses, will have the verb in the sub-
junctive : for instance
(2) Quod hominem condemn asset, recte se fecisse.
CAUSAL SENTENCES 179
EXERCISE 28
Use quod, quia, quoniam when possible. Do not use cum for ' because '
or 'since,' though it would make good sense in some of the
sentences.
1. He was condemned because he had retired without
Caesar's orders.
2. Caesar ordered him to be put to death on the
ground that he had retired without his orders.
3. He told me you were staying in bed because you
had an attack of gout.
4. Now that I have spoken about the war I will say
a few words about my own affairs.
5. Because he was not able to pay this sum of money
he was thrown into prison.
6. I did it for the simple reason that you told me to
do it.
7. Now that you are getting over your illness, I hope
that if you are careful you will soon be
stronger.
8. The soldier rejoices to think that he has beaten
the enemy.
9. Themistocles used to walk about at night because,
as he said, he could get no sleep.
10. Scaurus was accused of having received money
from King Mithridates for a treasonable purpose.
2. on the ground that = ' because, as Caesar said,' . . .
3. I have an attack of gout, expedibus laboro (1).
4. speak, dico.
6. for the simple reason, ob earn unam causam.
7. get over= ' recover.'
I am careful, diligentiam adhibeo.
9. to get sleep, somnum captre.
10. for a treasonable purpose : say ' for (ob) betraying the state.'
180 LATIN COURSE
11. As to my having attacked the camp without the order
of my superior officer, I did so because I thought
that, unless our allies saw at once that we were
not terrified by the capture of our ships, they
would all revolt and join the Germans. (To be
done also in oratio obliqua : ' As to his having
attacked ... he said he had done so . . .')
12. While Caesar was staying in these parts to repair
his ships, the envoys of the Mormi came to
him to beg his forgiveness, on the ground that
they had been compelled by their neighbours
to make war on the Eoman people, and to
promise to do what he ordered.
13. Caesar complained that after petitioning him for
peace they had made an attack without any
provocation, but said that he was willing to
forgive them if they gave him twenty hostages.
As to their assertion that they had been com-
pelled to make war he was surprised that they
dared to say this : he had been informed that
they had tried to persuade the Nervii to join the
conspiracy, but the Nervii had refused to do so.
14. He thanked me for sparing him.
11. superior officer : either imperator (the chief) or legatus (the officer
appointed by him as his deputy).
12. Do the oratio recta first. ' We ask forgiveness because we were
compelled . . . We promise to do what you order.'
stay : use moror (1). in these parts, in Ms locis.
to make war on, bellumfacere with dative.
13. Do the oratio recta first. ' After petitioning for peace you . . .,
but I am willing to forgive you if you give me ... As to your
assertion ... I am surprised that you dare ... I have been
informed that you tried . . .'
after petitioning : say ' when they had asked for peace.'
I make an attack without provocation, bellum sine causa infero.
refuse : use nolo.
XVIII
THE CALENDAR
163. The names of the months are
Januarius Aprllis Quintilis October
Februarius Mains Sextllis November
Martins Junius September December
These words are generally used as adjectives: mensis
Januarius is the Latin for January : sometimes mensis is
omitted. They are declined like bonus, tristis or celeber:
mense Maio, in May,
mense Sextlli, in August,
mense Novembri, in November.
The name Quintilis was altered to Julius and Sex-
tllis to Augustus, in honour of the two first emperors.
164. The Kornan does not number the days of the
month as we do. Three days in the month have names:
Kalendae (-arum), Nonae (-arum), Idus (Iduum), all
feminine. The Calends are the first of the month,
the Nones the fifth, the Ides the thirteenth : but in
March, May, July, October x the Nones and Ides are
two days later, i.e. the seventh and fifteenth. Hence
On Jan. 1, Kalendis Januariis.
On Jan. 5, Nonis Januariis.
On Jan. 13, Idibus Januariis.
On March 1, Kalendis Martiis.
On March 7, Nonis Martiis.
On March 15, Idibus Martiis.
1 Remember these four by some word made out of their initial
letters, e.g. Ma-Ma-Jul-Oc.
182 LATIN COURSE
165. The other days of the month are described as
so many days "before the Calends, or the Nones, or the
Ides, e.g.
Dec. 31, pridie Kalendas Januarias (the day before
the Calends of January},
Jan. 4, pridie Nonas Januarias,
Jan. 12, pridie Idus Januarias,
Dec. 30, ante diem tertium Kalendas Januarias
(the third day before the Calends),
Dec. 29, ante diem quartum Kalendas Januarias,
Dec. 28, ante diem quintum Kalendas Januarias,
and so we may go on, counting back till we reach the
day after the Ides, namely
Dec. 14, ante diem undevicesimum Kalendas Janu-
arias.
Again, March 1 4, pridie Idus Martias.
March 13, ante diem tertium Idus Martias.
March 12, ante diem quartum Idus Martias.
March 6, pridie Nonas Martias.
March 5, ante diem tertium Nonas Martias.
You will observe that Dec. 30, for instance, is not
in the Eoman way of reckoning called the second
day before the first of January, but the third; the
fifth of March is the third not the second before the
seventh ; that is to say, the Roman reckons inclusively,
counting in the Calends, or Nones, or Ides.
166. Hence we may make the following rules for
translating an English date into Latin :
1. If the day falls between the Calends and Nones,
add one to the date of the Nones (to allow for the
Roman inclusive method) and then subtract the given
THE CALENDAR 183
number. For example, Sept. 2. The Nones of
September fall on the 5th : 5 + 1 = 6: 6-2 = 4.
Sept. 2, then, is the fourth day before the Nones,
ante diem quartum Nonas Septerribres, or written
shortly a.d. iv Non. Sept.
2. If the day falls between the Nones and the Ides,
add one to the date of the Ides, and then subtract
the given number: e.g. Oct. 10. The Ides are the
15th. 15 + 1-10 = 6: hence a.d. vi Id. Oct.
3. The Eoman months have the same number of
days as the English : 1
Thirty days have September,
April, June, and November.
If the day falls after the Ides, add two to the
number of days in the month (one to allow for the
Eoman method of reckoning and one to represent the
first of the following month) and subtract the given
number, e.g. June 20: 30 + 2 — 20= 12: ante diem
duodecimum Kalendas Quintiles.
Oct. 20 : 31 + 2 — 20 = 13: a.d. xm Kal Nov.
167. The expression ante diem is treated as an in-
declinable substantive and may have a preposition in
front of it :
nuntii nobis tristes venerant ex ante diem in Non.
Jun. usque ad prid. Kal. Sept., From June 3
right on to Aug. 31 we had had bad news.
In order to get accustomed to the Roman Calendar
you should give the date in Latin at the head of every
exercise you write.
1 According to the Julian Calendar which came into use on Jan. 1, 45 B.C.
184 LATIN COURSE
EXERCISE 29
1. On Feb. 1st, Feb. 7th, April 15th, July 15th,
Sept. 20th, Nov. 30th.
2. From June 2nd to June 6th I shall be at Paris.
On June 13th I shall set off for Italy.
3. The letter which you wrote on April 28th was
delivered to me on May 9th.
4. It is reported that there was a battle on Sept.
30th. As yet we do not know which won.
I write this on Oct. 2nd. When I know for
certain I will write to you.
5. We shall reach Athens on June 14. I hope
that we have an excellent ship. Good-bye.
I wrote this as soon as I embarked. June
7th, Brindisi.
6. There are to be games at Antium from May 2nd
' to May 4th. My daughter wants to see them.
I shall be here till May 7th.
7. I reached Ephesus on Aug. 19th. There I
have been waiting for Pomptinus these four
days, and I have received no letter from him yet.
4. There was a battle : use the impersonal passive of pugno : see 3.
5. excellent, valde
G. games, ludi.
to see, spedare.
168. HINTS ON THE CONNECTION OF SENTENCES
1. Quo cum venisset, And when he arrived there,
or, Now when he arrived there,
or, When he arrived there.
2. Cum autem puer flumen transiret
And |
Now • when the boy was crossing the river,
But j
In continuing a story after a stop we often use the word
'and' or the word 'now.' The word 'now' when used in
this way is obviously not equivalent to 'at this time' and
cannot be rendered by 'mine.' In Latin the connection
between one sentence and another will very often be made by
the use of the relative pronoun or its adverb quo, or by the
use of autem. As to this use of the relative see 31, 32, where
many examples are given.
3. and they could not return nee redire poterant
and no one doubted nee quisquam dubitavit
and there is no hope neque ulla spes est
and we never saw him neque unquam vidimus
1 and ' followed by a negative is generally rendered in Latin by
nee or neque : neque should be used before vowels.
4. We often begin a sentence with ' Accordingly,' ' And so '
or simply ' So ' ( = Consequently). The corresponding Latin
will often be ita-que ( = And in this way), or igitur ( = there-
fore) : itaque stands first, igitur comes after the first word of
the sentence.
Nemo ausus est Phocionem liber sepelire ; itaque a servis
sepultus est, No free man dared to bury Phocion, and so
he was buried by slaves.
\We received such and such news,] and so we set off at once,
Statim igitur profecti sumus.
186 LATIN COURSE
EXERCISE 30 A
A prophecy
1. The city of Veil cannot be taken till the Alban
lake overflows. Then let us wait for the water to flow
down.
2. The immortal gods warned me that the city
could not be taken till the lake overflowed.
3. If the waters of the lake burst out and take
their own course to the sea, that will be a danger to
the Roman people ; if, on the other hand, the water is
carried off in such a way that it cannot reach the sea,
that will be your salvation.
4. Did he dare to say to the senate all that he
had heard ?
5. What did the gods foretell ?
Veii : proper names are not given in the dictionary if the declension
is obvious : Veii is of course a plural noun of the second declension.
Veientes, the people of Veii, is obviously of the third declension.
Though Veii is plural the verb will be singular agreeing with urbs.
Compare Veii capti sunt, Urbs Veii capta est, Oppidum Veii captum est.
1. till : see 64. the Alban lake, lacus Albdnus.
to overflow, redunddre.
to flow down, de-fluere.
3. Say 'if the lake bursts out (passive of e-mitto) and flows in its
own course (cursu suo pro-fluere) etc.' What tense should be used in
this clause ? See 53.
it will be a danger : use the dative. Compare id tibi honori est,
that is an honour to you.
'if on the other hand (sin autem) it (i.e. lacus understood from the
preceding sentence) is so (ita) carried off (use e-duc%re} etc.'
EXERCISES 187
6. Borne will very soon be taken by the Gauls.
7. What has been foretold does not always come
true, does it ?
8. Is there any one who does not believe that the
water of the Alban lake was carried along an aque-
duct to Rome ?
7. What, plural.
to come true, e-venire.
For questions, see 5.
8. Is there any one who does not : see 11.
to carry the water of the Alban lake along an aqueduct, aquas
Albanas dedu&re.
188 LATIN COURSE
EXERCISE 30 B
When the Alban lake had grown beyond its usual
size, there came to us a deserter from the Yeientes
and said that he had been warned by the immortal
gods that Veii could not be taken till the lake over-
flowed : and that if the waters of the lake burst out
and took their own course to the sea, that would be a
danger to the Roman people : if however the water
were carried off in such a way that it could not reach
the sea, that would be our salvation. And when the
senate heard this, it ordered that the waters of the Alban
lake should be carried along an aqueduct to Kome.
Now when the Veientes being weary of the war
sent envoys to Rome to arrange a peace, one of them,
it is said, declared that the deserter had not dared to
say everything that he had heard to the senate : for
the gods had foretold to him that Rome would soon
be taken by the Gauls. And who is there who has
See the notes to 30 A.
to grow beyond its usual size, crescere praeter modum (beyond its
limit).
From ' said that ' . . . to ' salvation ' we have oratio obliqua. See
131 ff.
Now when : see 168.
weary of the war : say ' tired by the war.'
to arrange : see 166.
one of them, ex Ms quidam.
one of them, it is said, declared : say ' one of them is said to have
said' ; see 110, 111. The oratio obliqua runs on to the word 'Gauls.'
And who is there etc. : ' which prediction1 indeed (quod quidem)
to have come true . . . who is there who has not heard ? '
1 A word printed in italics in the exercise or notes should not be
translated.
EXERCISES 189
not heard that this prediction caine true in the sixth
year after the capture of Yeii ? Not long before the
capture of the city a voice was heard coming from the
temple of Vesta " Repair your gates : if they are not
repaired, Rome will be taken."
the capture of Veil : see 77.
I hear a voice coming from a temple, exaudio vocem a tetnplo.
190 LATIN COURSE
EXERCISE 31
An urgent letter
When he learned what had happened, he sent for some
of his Indian horsemen whom he knew to be loyal, and
persuaded them by the promise of great rewards to
cany a letter to the commander-in-chief. This he had
written in Latin, lest if the letter were intercepted our
plans might get known by the Indians. He begged
the commander to come to his aid at once : large forces
of the Indians had crossed the Ganges and were marching
towards his camp. They could easily be cut off in the
mountain-passes and prevented from getting supplies if
he arrived within three days. On the other hand if they
reached the plains our forces would not be sufficient to
beat such a vast host. If he did not come, he and his
men would be placed in a very dangerous position.
They had scarcely supplies enough to last a month, and
the camp could not easily be defended.
what had happened, res.
he sent for . . . : say ' he ordered certain men of (ex) his Indian
horsemen to be summoned to him, and having set before them (pro-
pono) great rewards ..."
if the letter were intercepted : use participle.
Oratio recta : ' large forces of the Indians have crossed the
Ganges and are marching to my camp ; they can easily be cut off
and prevented from getting supplies if you arrive before the fourth
day. On the other hand, if they descend from the mountains there
will not be enough of our soldiers for beating so great a. host. If
you do not come, I and my men will be placed in a very dangerous
position. We have scarcely supplies enough to last a month, and the
camp cannot easily be defended.'
to prevent from getting supplies, frumento prohibere.
On the other hand, Contra.
to be placed in a very dangerous position : say ' to come into very
great danger."
"We have scarcely . . . : Nobis frumenti est vix in mensem quod
satis sit, Of corn we have what scarcely for a month would be enough.
EXERCISES 191
EXERCISE 32
Ariovistus
1. While we were talking thus to one another,
a message was brought, saying that Ariovistus had
crossed the river Ehine with nearly all his forces and
had taken up his position in the territory of our allies
the Haedui ; he was, it was said, demanding the corn
which they had promised to give us, and was holding
the largest town they had under his cruel dominion.
2. Now when we were informed of this, we
thought it best to delay no longer : within a few
days all our allies would revolt from us : we must not
wait for the cavalry to arrive : already all was over
with the Haedui : Ariovistus was at hand : and the
soldiers terrified by his approach would not dare to
fight unless we set out without delay.
3. So we set out at dawn of day and attacked the
camp of the Germans as they slept : and they were
panic-stricken at the first assault, and were not able
to resist us.
4. So we took possession of the camp and sent
some men to seek for Ariovistus. And in the evening
they returned, unsuccessful.
The oratio recta has been given in Ex. 23 : be prepared for a long
series of infinitives. You will find participles useful in 2, 3, 4.
1. thus: say ' these things.' to one another : see 49.
the largest town they had : say 'the town which they had largest.'
under his cruel dominion : abl. without preposition.
2. Now when we were informed of this : see 168.
it is best to delay : see 89.
within a few days : see 1.
3. and ... not: see 168.
4. sent some men to seek : use the relative ; see 156.
unsuccessful : see 77 (/) p. 71.
192 LATIN COURSE
EXERCISE 33
A timely warning
When I reached Paris I went to call on my friend
Eudemus. And when I arrived at his house the old
man embraced me and shed tears. Then I questioned
him about the book which he had long been writing,
and he asked me about my wife and children, and
we prolonged our conversation far into the night.
And when I had gone away to bed, it seemed to me
in my sleep that a child of marvellous beauty was
saying to me : " Arise, arise, Eufus, fly from this
house." So at first I arose, terrified by the dream, that
I might fly ; then, when I had collected myself, I
thought the dream of no account, and as I heard no
I go to call on him, convenio eum.
my friend Eudemus : Latin order, Eudemus amicus meus. (1) The
name conies first, the words in apposition follow ; (2) meus, tuus,
nosier etc. follow the substantive unless they are emphatic.
And when : see 31, 32.
I questioned him . . ., and he asked me: the verb should only
be expressed once in the Latin ; the meaning may be made clear by
the use of pronouns: thus 'I him . . ., he me . . . questioned'
(use interrogo}.
he had long been writing : see 58.
far into the night, in multam noctem.
of marvellous beauty : abl. of quality.
it seemed to me that a child was saying : videor cannot be used
impersonally : see 110.
at first, primo or primo quidern.
then, dein.
think of no account, pro nihilo hdbeo.
EXERCISES 193
voice I lay down again. Then as I slept my friend
Eudemus seemed to be saying to me : " Arise, arise,
Kufus : with me all is over : do you fly while you
may : my house is on fire." And when I heard this,
I arose in terror and fled from the house : and as I
entered the garden the slaves reported to me that
Eudemus was dead, and that there was no hope that
his book would be found.
and ... no voice : see 168.
it is all over with him, actum est de eo.
194 LATIN COURSE
EXERCISE 34
A letter to a friend
You learned from my former letter that my
brother burned his ships to prevent their falling into
the enemy's hands, and set out for the territory of the
Helvetii. When he arrived there, he made a camp
near the city of Geneva, and sent off letters to our
allies, that the news of the arrival of a Roman army
might reassure them all. On. the 1st of March news
was brought that the king of the Germans had crossed
the Khine with large forces, and that the allies of the
Eoman people would not be able to resist him, unless
a large army set off to their assistance without delay.
When he received this message my brother at once
sent two cohorts to protect the Haedui, and himself
led the rest of the army towards the river Ehirie. I
hope in a few days to be able to write and tell you
that he has gained a victory over the enemy, but
Before doing this exercise read 73 ff. on the participles,
burned his ships . . . and set out : see 77 (d).
to prevent their falling : say ' lest they might come. '
When he arrived there : see 168.
that the news etc. : see 77 (e).
and that the allies would not . . .: don't use et : see 168. Possum
has no future infinitive ; the present infin. generally takes its place :
rarely fore ut.
to protect : use the relative.
gain a victory over : simply vincere.
EXERCISES 195
I cannot conceal my anxiety ; for the neighbouring
chiefs, even though they are thought to be well
disposed, still will not dare to refuse to help the
Germans. Mind you write often : I should like to
know whether you are going to stay at Koine till I
come back or not.
for the neighbouring chiefs . . . : imitate the following sentence :
' even though he is secretly our friend, still he will not dare to be
openly hostile to the Gauls, etiamsi dam amicus cst nobis, tamzn aperte
inimicus esse Gallis non audebit. '
they are well disposed, bene sentiunt.
I should like to know whether . . : see 120.
196 LATIN COURSE
EXERCISE 35
A good omen
Accordingly, as the danger seemed now to threaten
the city, the brave Paulus was appointed dictator to
carry on the war with the Persae. And when he
went home to bring the news to his wife, he saw his
little daughter. So he kissed her and asked her what
she had done that day : and as she made no answer
but began to cry, he said " What is it, my child ?
why are you sad ? " And she said " Father, Persa
is dead." Now when he heard this he embraced the
child so joyfully that she wondered why he was glad.
So she asked him, and he said " This is a favourable
You will find participles useful, see especially 75, 77.
There are three different uses of ' now ' in the exercise ; compare
these three sentences :
Now when he arrived, Cum autem pervenisset ... Or Qui cum
pervenisset.
As he had now recovered, Cum iam convaluisset,
Now (that) Catilina has been killed there is no danger, Catilina
mortuo nihil periculi est.
Note the position of inquit after the first word or two of a speech :
And he said "Do you want to hear what is going on ? "
Et ille ' Visne audire ' inquit ' quid agatur ? '
danger threatens the city, impendet urbi periculum.
the brave Paulus, Paulus vir fortissimus ; note two points of
difference between the English and the Latin idiom : (1) it is not
usual in Latin to attach an adjective to a proper name : you could
not write Paulus fortis without vir ; (2) superlatives are often
preferred in Latin.
bring the news : say ' report the matter.'
little daughter : use the diminutive filiola.
child : use filia.
Father : say ' My father.' What is the vocative of meus ?
that she wondered : ' she ' must be expressed. Why ?
why ? qua de causa ?
a favourable omen, omen secundum.
EXERCISES 197
omen, my child : just as I am about to set off to
oppose the Persae, you bring me the news that Persa
is dead, and I have no doubt that the gods thus give
me to understand that in a few days the Persae will
all either die or surrender to me. But don't you
weep over the death of the dog : for when the war is
finished I will see that the most beautiful dog the
Persae have is given to you." But she answered
" Now Persa is dead, no dog can be precious to rne."
just as I am about to set off etc. : paraphrase thus ' for to me now
about to start against the P. you bring the news etc.' Note that the
connecting link ' for ' is quite properly omitted in the English, but
enim is necessary in the Latin.
to give me to understand, significare mihi (to show by a sign,
signum).
don't you weep : see 125.
the most beautiful dog they have : say ' the dog which they have
most beautiful.'
I will see that : use curare ut, to take care that.
it is precious to me, artiori est mihi.
198 LATIN COURSE
EXERCISE 36
Magic
Of the ancient writers who does not speak of
Teiresias ? Now he when a hoy used to feed sheep.
And one of these sheep being lost, it is said that he
made the following vow : "HI find the sheep," said
he, " I will give to the god the largest bunch of grapes
in the vineyard." So when the sheep was found by
the help of the god, he entered the vineyard and
found a bunch of wondrous size ; and this he at once
gave to the god. And when this story was noised
abroad, the king sent for the shepherd and said to
him that he was thinking of something. "Can you
Before doing this exercise read 31. 32.
Teiresias, -ae.
Now he when a boy : say ' who being a boy. ' Pucr is in apposition
to the subject of the sentence ; in the same way consul is used in
apposition to the subject in the following sentence Eadem consul fed,
I did the same as consul, or when consul.
I make the following vow, ita voveo (I vow in this way, to this
effect, thus).
If I find : see 53.
a bunch (of grapes), uva.
a vineyard, vinea.
I will give the largest bunch : say ' I will give to the god the
bunch, which shall prove to be (erit] the largest in the vineyard.'
by the help of the god : use the verb adiuvare. You will find
participles specially useful in this exercise.
the story was noised abroad : use the phrase celebrare rem, to make
a thing well known.
I am thinking of something, cogito (1) aliquid : I am thinking of
doing this, cogito hocfacere.
EXERCISES 199
tell me," said he, " by the help of that god of yours
whether it can be accomplished ? " And the shepherd
made answer that it could be accomplished. Then
the king told him that he had been thinking of
cutting a stone in two with a sword. And when he
heard this, Teiresias bade them make trial. So when
the stone was brought, he cut it through with the
sword, while the king and the people looked on. And
thus it came about that he was held to be the wisest
of all men.
that god of yours, dens iste.
when the stone was brought : use a participle ; mind the case.
See 76.
to look on, inspectare.
And thus it came about : say ' as a result of which (ex quo). '
it came about : the passive offacio.
he was held (to be) the wisest : use habeo, which is very common
in the passive in this sense.
200 LATIN COURSE
EXERCISE 37
An Eastern throne
As messages were brought to us almost every day
to say that plots were being made against the Sultan
Farfonilla by his enemies, and that the Englishmen
who lived in the district in pursuit of trade were in
the greatest danger, the Admiral ordered me to set
sail for the city as speedily as possible with three
cruisers, that the Sultan Farfonilla, the friend of the
English people, might see that his safety was an
object of care to us and that his enemies might retire
in terror on the approach of the ships. So I started
at once, and had such a prosperous voyage with the
wind in my favour that I reached the harbour on
the following evening. On my arrival, men came to
report to me that the Sultan had already been poisoned
and his kingdom seized by his uncle Duroba ; that
the Englishmen would be murdered unless I were
willing to protect them. When I learned this, I sent
Lieutenant Jones to tell Duroba that, if he did not
surrender to me without delay, I should bombard the
city. In that case, I should punish him and his
friends. If, however, he came to me at once, I would
grant him his life. When this message was given
The oratio recta has been given in Ex. 26.
on my arrival : do not use a substantive.
Lieutenant Jones : it will be best to use a Latin name, Trebonius
for instance.
In that case . . : ' If I did so.'
EXERCISES 201
him, he answered that the Sultan had committed
suicide : he had tried to persuade him not to do so,
but had not been successful. Now that the Sultan
was dead, he had been made Sultan by the citizens
in accordance with ancestral custom, and would not
yield to me. If I chose to fight, he was ready to
defend the city. When this was reported to me,
thinking that Duroba was not to be trusted, I made
all preparations for an attack on the city.
I am not successful, nihU efficio.
thinking : see 78, 79.
for an attack : not a substantive.
202 LATIN COURSE
EXERCISE 38
A dream that came true
1. My friend Eudemus of Cyprus while making a
journey to Macedonia came to Pherae : 2. this was
a famous city in Thessaly, but was held by the tyrant
Alexander under his cruel dominion. 3. Now in this
town Eudemus was so seriously ill that all the doctors
lost hope. 4. It seemed to him in a dream that a
youth of marvellous beauty was saying that he would
very soon recover and that in a few days the tyrant
Alexander would die, but that Eudemus himself would
after five years return home. 5. And what was fore-
told came true in the following way : Eudemus re-
covered ; the tyrant was killed by his wife's brothers ;
and, as the fifth year was drawing to a close,
when there was a hope in consequence of the dream
that Eudemus would return to Cyprus, he was slain
Thessaly, Thessalia.
Alexander (2), like magister.
Syracuse, S^rdcusae (1) : note that many names of cities are plural.
1. We say 'Eudemus of Cyprus'; the Roman says Cyprius
Eudemus, ' the Cyprian Eudemus. '
2. Connect with the relative, 'which was a city etc. ' : 'which' will
be singular to agree with ' city.'
under his dominion : no preposition ; abl.
5. Begin with Atque.
Insert et before 'Eudemus recovered,' and before 'the tyrant was
killed.'
what was foretold: make 'what' plural and mind the tense ; see 14.
to come true, evenire.
in the following way, ita.
as the year was drawing-to-a-close (ex-ire} : use the participle, and
reserve cum for the next verb.
in consequence of, ex.
EXERCISES 203
in battle near Syracuse. 6. Now the wise men
interpreted the dream as follows : they said that
the soul of Eudemus, when it left his body, did
then return home.
in battle: say 'fighting.'
6. as follows, ita.
If you are puzzled to know how to arrange the words in a Latin
sentence, you will sometimes find this rule useful : ' Begin with the
word, or group of words, which is most closely connected in meaning
with the preceding sentence.' Hence the pronoun is (referring to some
person or thing just mentioned) will often form the connecting link.
Here ei begins (4) because ei represents Eudemus, which was the subject
of (3). On the other hand in (5) you should begin Atque ita evenerunt
because of the emphasis on ita (= 'and in this way it all came true').
Sentences (2) and (3) will illustrate the rule.
204 LATIN COURSE
EXERCISE 39
Hard pressed
When he read this he concealed the state of affairs
and declared that Olive would come quickly to their
support ; he would arrive at the fort within three days:
in the meanwhile there was nothing to fear: there were
supplies enough for two months, and in their strongly
built fort they could keep back any number of the
Indians. Their safety depended on their courage :
they must not lose hope, but must get everything
ready for the defence of the fort.
This was the sort of thing which he said openly to
the men, but in secret he read the letter to a few
friends. As his looks did not agree with his way of
speaking, and as he acted in everything more timidly
For the oratio recta, see Ex. 24.
he concealed the state of affairs and declared, dissimulans pro-
nuntiavit.
Clive : say imperator.
there is nothing to fear : see 157.
to keep the enemy back, sustinere hostes.
any number : just as qui-vis means any one you please, so quantus-
vis means of any size or number you please ; say here quantas-vis copias
Indorum.
This was the sort of thing etc., Haec et talia . . . militibus dixit
(this and the like of this).
his looks do not agree with his way of speaking, vultus (sing.) cum
oratione non consentit.
he acts timidly in everything, omnia timide agit.
EXERCISES 205
than had been his wont in the earlier days of the siege,
and talked much in secret with his friends and avoided
the rest, the state of things could not be concealed
any longer. For Clive had written that he could not
come, lest in his absence the whole of the province
should revolt: accordingly, if any opportunity presented
itself, he must force his way out of the camp and come
to him with all his forces. This was rendered im-
possible by the besieging force.
earlier, superior.
the state of things, res : res often means what really is, as opposed
to what is supposed to be ; for instance, non re sed nomine.
to force one's way out, erumpere e (to break out).
This was rendered impossible by . . , Id ne fieri posset ab . . .
fiebat (That this should not be possible, was brought about by . . . ).
the besieging force : turn by a relative clause.
206 LATIN COURSE
EXERCISE 40
Socrates
Socrates, the wisest of the Greeks, used to say that
he obeyed a divine voice which never urged him on
but often called him back. Seeing one of his friends
with a bandage over his eye, he asked what was the
matter : and when he answered that he had gone out
into the fields with Xenophon to take a walk, and
that Xenophon had drawn back a bough and suddenly
let it go, then Socrates said " Well, you did not take
my advice when I tried to keep you back : for the
god had warned me that some trouble was impending."
It was Socrates too who, after the unsuccessful
fight near Delium, when he was flying with the general
Laches, would not take the same road as the others.
a divine voice, divina quaedam vox ; quid-am may often be trans-
lated 'a certain (one)' : it is sometimes less definite and means little more
than ' a ' or ' a sort of.'
which never urged him on (im-pellere, to drive . . . on), but called
him back (re-vocare, to call . . . back) : use participles.
Seeing one etc. : paraphrase thus ' He (qui) when he saw the eye
of a certain friend tied up ' (alligdre, to tie up).
what 's the matter ? quid est ?
Xenophon suddenly let go (re-mitt%re) a drawn -back bough (ad-
ducere ramum, to draw a bough to one's self, to draw it back).
Well, you did not . . . : say 'For you did not obey me when I was
etc.' The present participle of revocdre will give the sense of 'trying
to keep you back.' Note the use of enim in this sentence : ' You have
suffered, for you did not ' is implied in enim.
It was Socrates too, who . . . : say ' The same Socrates also, when
the unsuccessful fight near Delium had taken place and he was flying
etc., would not fly etc.' Idem is often used as here in continuing a
story about the same person : you must use it again in this exercise to
introduce the next paragraph and translate the word 'and.'
an unsuccessful fight took place, male pugnatum est.
Laches, Laches, gen. Lachetis.
take the same road : say 'fly by the same road.'
EXERCISES 207
And when they asked why he did not proceed by the
same road, he said that the god deterred him. He
got back safe to Athens, while those who had fled by
a different road came across the cavalry of the enemy.
And when he was condemned to death, Socrates
said that he was quite content to die : for the god had
given him no warning, either when leaving his home
or when pleading his cause.
And when they asked : use the relative and the participle. Will
you have the ablative absolute or the dative governed by dixit, ?
he said that the god deterred him : you must turn this into the
passive, for if you write deum se deterrere the sentence will be
ambiguous ; it might mean that he was deterring the god or that the
god was deterring himself : but if you say that he was being deterred
by the god, the meaning will be quite clear. You should not have
two accusatives with an infinitive, unless the context shows clearly
which is the subject of the infinitive, which the object. Translate the
following sentence in two ways : Aio te, Aeacida, Romanes vincere
posse (Aeacida is a vocative, ' son of Aeacus ' — aio means ' I say ').
He got back (i.e. returned) safe : begin with ipse ; see 47.
safe, salvus.
while those who . . . : don't use dum but autcm.
to come across, in-cidere (perf. incldi) in.
he was quite content to die : say ' he was dying with mind quite
undisturbed (aequissimo animo).'
for the god . . . : begin neque enim ' for to him neither when
leaving (say, stepping out from) home nor when etc., had any sign been
made by the god.' Do you see the reason of this change to the
passive ?
208 LATIN COURSE
EXERCISE 41
A letter from a Roman general
When I received intelligence of the Parthian war
I led my array to Mount Garnanus. Arrived there, I
was informed that our friend Cassius had successfully
driven back the enemy from the city of Antioch.
Meanwhile with all my forces I harassed the
Gamanienses, the perpetual foes of the Boman people.
They were thrown into a panic by our unexpected
arrival and could not withstand even our first attack :
we took their largest city and burned it. And so I
was hailed as Imperator by my soldiers near the Issus
—where, as I have often heard from you, Darius was
beaten by Alexander — and then I led my army
away to attack a very well fortified town : if, as I
hope, I take it, I shall then write an official letter but
not before. We have now been besieging the town
more than four-and- twenty days.
when I received intelligence, etc. : say 'when the war was reported.'
our friend Cassius, Cassius noster.
We hail you as Imperator, Imperatorem te appellamus. This only
happened after a battle of some importance. The writer is evidently
well pleased with himself.
as I have heard, ut audivi. Note this very common use of ut.
then but not before, turn vero (then indeed).
more than twenty-four days : see 58.
EXERCISES 209
EXERCISE 42
Hannibal
Now when he had taken this city, it seemed to him
in a dream that he was summoned into the council
of the gods ;
and when he had come thither Jupiter commanded
him. to make war on Italy, and as leader gave him
one of the council ;
and he with this leader began to advance with his
army :
then that leader charged him not to look back :
but he could restrain himself no longer, and beside
himself with curiosity he looked round >
then it seemed to him that a huge beast was
destroying all the trees and houses and cities :
so he marvelled and asked the god what that
monster was :
and the god answered that it was the desolation of
Italy, and charged him to go straight forward :
as to what was happening behind him, he must
not trouble himself.
I make war on Italy, Italiae bellum in-fcro.
as leader : ' he gave me Socrates as teacher ' would be Socratem
mihi inayistrum dealt.
one of the council : of, e.
beside himself with curiosity, elatus cupiditate (carried out of
himself, e and/ero, by desire of seeing).
a huge beast, belua immanis.
destroy etc. : say ' lay waste all the trees, houses, cities. '
to go straight forward, pergere (to continue one's journey) protinus
(straight on).
Note the phrase non laboro or nihil laboro, I don't trouble myself
(about it). Sometimes it has an indirect question dependent on it :
Quid ille agat non laboro, As to what he 's doing I don't trouble rny
head. Think of the direct form of this speech : ' It is the desolation
etc. : go straight on: don't trouble yourself etc.' As to indirect
commands, see 149.
P
210 LATIN COURSE
EXERCISE 43
Perhaps exaggerated
"In that country women exercise, it is said, not
only an influence over their husbands but even
absolute power. That you may the better understand
this, I will tell you what I myself saw last year. It
happened that I went one day to see my . friend
Arminius : and when I was making inquiries the
servant said he was not at home. Then his wife,
hearing my voice, came to the door and said ' He is
not at home : for this morning he came to me and
asked for permission to go into the city. And when
he asked I gave him leave to go out. If, however,
I had known that you. were coming, I should not have
suffered him to go away. But pray come in and have
dinner with us : for I bade Arminius to come back
before night: and that he might the more easily manage
it is said : see 111.
I exercise an influence over him, auctoritatem in eum tenco.
absolute power, imperium.
That you may the better understand this : see 8 and 32.
tell, narro (1).
I go to see him, venio ad eum.
one day : see 44.
my friend Arminius, Arminius familiaris meus.
make inquiries, quaero (3).
I ask for permission to talk, Peto ut mihi liceat loqui ; I give you
leave to talk, Potestatem tibi facio loquendi ; I suffer or allow you to
talk, Patior te loqui ; I was not allowed to talk non licuit mihi loqui.
pray come in : see 124.
to manage,
EXERCISES 211
this, I allowed him to ride the fastest horse he has.'
But I was so frightened of the woman that I told her
I was not hungry : for I was afraid that, having
stepped in, I might not be allowed to step out."
Having told this tale he went away. But we who
stayed behind wondered whether the man was to be
trusted. I should like to know whether he seems to
you a skilful liar. Mind you write every day.
I was so frightened etc. : say ' I, moved by fear of that woman,
said etc.'
a skilful liar, skilful in lying : perUus with genitive. So perltus
regendi, skilful in ruling, a skilful ruler.
212 LATIN COURSE
EXERCISE 44
A true story
As to the journey we are making through this
country I have much to write to you. Yesterday we
started from the city and arrived in the evening at the
river which separates my brother's province from the
province of Crass us. I had been sent forward with a
few soldiers to choose a place for a camp and have
dinner prepared. And when we reached the river we
saw that, owing to the great storms of the present
month, it had grown so large and strong, that it was
scarcely possible for us to cross it. When we had with
great difficulty succeeded in our efforts, I stood on the
bank to warn our dear Marcus where it should be
crossed : and not long after he rode up to the bank
and stood still ; and when I was just going to shout,
he suddenly rode forward and slipped down into the
I have much to write : see 157.
a few : use quidam.
owing to the storms : simply the abl.
the present month : ' this month. '
strong, vehemens.
possible for us to cross it : eo is an intransitive verb, but transeo
(like many compounds from intransitive verbs) is transitive and may
therefore have the personal construction in the passive : ' [the river]
was scarcely able to be crossed.'
When we had succeeded in our efforts : say ' which object (quod)
when we had attained (consequor).'
just going to shout, iam cldmaturus.
suddenly, subito.
EXERCISES 213
water : neither man nor horse was anywhere to be
seen : I was paralysed with fear : then all of a sudden
he rose to the surface, and, still on horseback, climbed
up the bank, and we embraced one another.
it is not to be seen, non appdret (2).
to be paralysed : use stupere.
all of a sudden, repente.
rise to the surface, ex-sisto, exstiti (3).
still on horseback, codem equo ; see 48.
214 LATIN COURSE
EXERCISE 45
Friend or Foe ?
The next day the Eajah came secretly to the camp
and said that he had a communication to make to the
officer in command. So he was brought in, and spoke
to the following effect: he said that he for his part
was a friend of the English people, through whose
kindness he had recovered the kingdom of his
ancestors : at present, however, it .was necessary for
him to conceal his friendly feeling and simulate
hatred, if he wished to help us. As to his men
having attacked our camp, that he had been compelled
to do that the rest of the Indians might have no
doubt as to his loyalty : their suspicions having been
removed, he had been informed of their plans. So he
had come both to seek forgiveness and to warn us that
all the Indians had entered into a conspiracy : on an
appointed day they were going to attack all our forts,
so that one regiment might not be able to come to the
aid of another. Therefore he warned, nay he begged
the officer to provide for the safety of his men.
See notes to Ex. 25.
to the following effect, in hunc modum.
for his part, quidem.
EXERCISES 215
EXERCISE 46
Friend or Foe ? (continued)
If we wanted to get away in safety we must start
before the forces of the Indians had come together.
At present, indeed, it was easy to conduct even a force
encumbered with baggage through his territory, whence
it was not a long inarch to Fort William. This one
promise he could make, that on the following day he
would conduct them safely through his territory. On
the other hand, if they lingered till the whole of
Bengal was in revolt, he would not be able to help
them.
Having said this, and begged the officer not to let
it be known that the Eajah had been in the English*
camp, he went away into the city.
After this conversation Colonel K at first felt
doubtful what to do ; for, if the Eajah had spoken the
truth, he saw that prompt action was necessary, and
all preparations for setting off must be made that very
night. At last, however, he made up his mind that
he must not adopt any rash measures : he must not
leave the camp without orders from the General : any
number of the natives could be held in check : he had
not only withstood the first attack of the enemy, but
had even driven back a host of the barbarians with
great slaughter : there were supplies enough for twenty
days : in the meantime support would arrive both from
the nearest forts and from the General.
See Exx. 25 and 26.
After this conversation : do not use sermo ; turn by a verb.
Colonel N., legatus ; or use some Roman name.
216 LATIN COURSE
EXERCISE 47
A desperate, measure
Already the danger is almost at our doors : the
Persian army is only twenty miles away : if it makes
its way through the mountain-passes, shall we be able
to defend our city ? What are we to do then ?
Does any one recommend us to stay in the city, to
receive the king, to surrender our wives, our children,
ourselves? God forbid, you answer one and all.
Our ancestors did not hesitate to oppose a countless
host of barbarians : shall we who are rich in ships,
rich in soldiers, rich in resources, shall we not
withstand even the first attack ? Hear then what
is my advice : our city — for it cannot possibly be
defended — our city must be abandoned : let us place
the danger is almost at our doors : use a different metaphor in
Latin ; the danger is hanging over us, periculum impendct nobis
(dative).
Persian army, Persarum exercitus.
What are we to do : see 126-28.
ourselves, nosmetipsos. met is added to some pronouns for emphasis :
cgomct.
God forbid, Di meliora, may the gods (grant) us better things,
one and all : omnes placed emphatically at the end.
shall we who are . . . : arrange thus ' we who in ships, who in
soldiers, who in resources are rich, not even the first attack shall
withstand ? ' It is a question, but num need not be added.
what is your advice ? quid tibi est consilii ?
it cannot possibly : say 'it cannot in any way,' nullo modo potest.
to place (for safety), depono. Begin this sentence with ' wives and
children,' and the next with ipsi : the same order in Greek, but with
iutv and 5<: added : ras p.h vvaiKas . . ., •fyuets 5^ etc.
EXERCISES 217
our wives and children on the island : let us embark
on our ships and with our fleet defend our father-
land : let us either win or die an honourable death.
In rhetorical passages like this the sentences are not linked so
closely together as in narrative pieces. In this passage we have a
large number of short sentences as in English without any connecting
link. Contrast any of the narrative pieces, Ex. 36 for instance.
218 LATIN COURSE
EXERCISE 48
A successful campaign
When I arrived in my province on July 30th, I
saw that, considering the lateness of the season, I
ought to go to m.y army without delay. And as five
cohorts were stationed near Elium, while the rest of
the army was in Lycaonia, I ordered my lieutenant
M. Anneius to bring those five cohorts to the rest of
the army, and having collected the whole force in one
place to make a camp in Lycaonia near Biconium.
When my orders had been carefully carried out by
him, I arrived in the camp on August 25th, having in
the meanwhile prepared a suitable force of cavalry.
And when I had begun to march into Cilicia, envoys
sent to me by King Magenus brought the news that
the Parthians had crossed over into Syria. On hearing
this I thought I had better lead my army into
Cappadocia : for if I had returned into Cilicia, I
should indeed have easily been able to defend Cilicia
itself, but Cappadocia, which is open on the Syrian
side, would have been in danger : and the neighbour-
ing kings, even if they are secretly friendly to us, still
do not dare to be openly unfriendly to the Parthians.
Lycaonia, Cilicia, Cappadocia.
considering the lateness of the season, proptcr anni tempus.
while : do not use dum, for 'while' has no temporal force here ; autem
will supply the necessary link.
near Biconium, apud Biconium.
When my orders etc. : say ' when this had been carefully done. '
I arrived : ego will be expressed as it is slightly emphasised.
having in the meanwhile prepared : use cum.
indeed . . . Cilicia itself : arrange thus ' Cilicia indeed itself I
should etc.'
it is open on the Syrian side, a Sfyria patet.
EXERCISES 219
EXERCISE 49
A successful campaign (continued)
So I made my camp on the edge of Cappadocia
not far from Mount Taurus near the town of Cistra,
that I might both watch over Cilicia, and, holding
Cappadocia in my power, might check the neighbour-
ing kings from helping the Parthians. In the
meantime King Deiotarus sent me envoys to say that
he would come to my camp with all his forces.
Touched by his zeal I thanked him by letter, and
urged him to hasten to do so. On the following day
I learned by letters and messengers that great forces
of the Parthians had advanced as far as the town of
Antioch, and that a large body of their cavalry, which
had crossed into Cilicia, had been beaten by my horse-
men. Accordingly, as I saw that the forces of the
Parthians had turned away from Cappadocia and
were not far from the frontier of Cilicia, I led my
army by forced marches towards Mount Gamanus.
the edge of the country, terra extrema ; compare summus mons, the
top of the mountain.
Deiotarus is referred to in Lucan : ' fidumque per arma Deiotarum. '
touched, commotus.
' to do so ' may be expressed by id.
I hasten, mdturo (1).
to advance as far as, accedfre ad.
Accordingly, Qua re : see 32.
had turned away : the passive of averto is used in this sense (for the
active means to turn some one or something away).
220 LATIN COURSE
EXERCISE 50
A successful campaign (continued)
On my arrival I learned that the enemy had
retired from the neighbourhood of Antioch, and that
Bibiilus was at Antioch : I informed Deiotarus, who
was already hastening to join me with all his forces,
that there seemed to be no reason why he should
leave his kingdom and that I would send him letters
and messengers at once, in case anything went wrong.
And as I wished to help the allies of the Eoman
people, I decided to remove our enemies from Mount
Gamanus. So I pretended to be leaving the district
in order to conduct my army to its winter-quarters.
But when I was at a distance of one day's march from
the mountain, I started off in the evening with my
army in light inarching order, and in the middle of
the night began to climb up the mountain : at dawn I
attacked the enemy who were asleep ; and they were
slain or made prisoners, being cut off from flight.
Having thus carried out my plans, I made my camp
at the foot of the mountain, and we spent five days
in burning the towns and laying waste the fields.
from the neighbourhood of, ab.
there is no reason why you should leave your kingdom, causa
non est cur a rcgno absis ; see 157.
in case anything goes wrong I will let you know, si quid novi forte
acciderit certiorem tefaciam. Si forte, ' if perchance,' is used very much
like our ' in case.' Si quid novi acciderit, literally means, ' If anything
new happens.' There is sometimes a suggestion that the new thing
will be a misfortune.
with my army in light marching order, expedite exercitu (the army
not being encumbered with baggage).
slain or made prisoners : use -que for ' or. '
Having carried out my plans : use the words gercre has res. As
ule you should not transla
word from the context.
a rule you should not translate res by 'thing,' but supply a suitable
EXERCISES 221
EXERCISE 51
A successful campaign (continued)
When these operations were finished, I led my army
away to the town of Nissus : as I had heard that
this town occupied a very lofty and well fortified
position and was inhabited by men who had never
acknowledged the supremacy of Koine and were
looking eagerly for the coming of the Parthians, I
thought it my duty to crush their audacity, in order
that the spirit of the others who opposed our rule
might also more easily be broken. I surrounded the
town with a rampart and a ditch, and with the help
of many engines I finished the matter off on the fifty-
seventh day, and the citizens* surrendered to me.
After the capture of Nissus I received hostages from
the neighbouring states, and dismissed the army to
winter-quarters.
operations, res.
it occupies a lofty position, alto est loco.
It is inhabited by men who . . , incolUur ab Us qui with subj. ;
Us is emphatic here and means ' the sort of people who . . .' See 158.
to acknowledge the supremacy of 'Rome, populi Romani imperio
obtemperare.
they oppose our rule, alieni sunt ab imperio nostro.
with the help of : participle of utor, I use.
222 LATIN COURSE
EXERCISE 52
A false alarm
Our countrymen who live in that city are in
imminent danger. They are sending us messengers
almost every day to say that the Transvalani have
deprived the British of their arms, arid imposed taxes
on them : that our countrymen are sending the women
and children to the cities on the sea-coast that the
fleet may protect them : that they themselves cannot
abandon the city ; for if they do so they must leave
behind all their possessions. What are we to do
then ? Are we to set out to their aid, or are we to
stay at home ? There are some who say that if we
march into the territory of the Transvalani we shall
break the treaty. If a man says this, I should like
to ask him whether the Transvalani have done no
wrong to us. I for my part don't trouble myself
about the treaty. I know that our fellow-countrymen
are in danger : if we will not help them, in a few
days all will be over. We must act promptly if we
Say i Danger is hanging over our countrymen ' (nostri, our people).
I deprive you of arms, arma tibi eripio.
I impose taxes on you, vedlgalia tibi impono.
for if they do so : paraphrase this a little : 'which if we do we
must abandon all that we have ' (it is safer to work out the whole
message in oratio recta first).
what are we to do ? see 128.
There are some who say : see 157.
I for my part, Equidem.
EXERCISES 223
wish to save the lives of our friends : we must not
talk about a treaty. So let us set out this very
night : no great preparations are necessary : w'e must
go in light marching order ; . . .
to save the lives, consulere saluti (dat.) (to take measures for the
safety).
So let us set out : use proinde for 'so.'
no great preparations etc., 'we need not prepare many things.'
in light marching order : look up ' march."
The speech is evidently unfinished ; make up a continuation of it.
224 LATIN COURSE
EXERCISE 53
Travel
Accordingly, as my father and mother were dead,
there was nothing to prevent my leaving my country :
for I had long been desirous of visiting many lands.
And so I sold my house and all that I had, so that I
might have money enough for making a long journey ;
and having bidden my friends farewell I set off on
August 23rd. I crossed the sea and went on through
many cities, and at last in the fifth month I reached
the city of Cirta. When I arrived there my chief
object was to see a certain Diodorus, a man of great
wealth and very friendly to the Eoman people, and I
delivered to him a letter which my friend Lucius had
given me. When he had read it he said " You are
very welcome, for Lucius is very dear to me : I hope
that you will stay with me as long as you can."
Then he talked much about Lucius, and gave me
much information about his own city, and persuaded
me to stay ten days with him.
nothing to prevent : see 157.
I go on, progredior.
my chief object is to see (i.e. to have an interview with) him, nihil
mihi potius ('more important ') est quam ut cum conveniam.
You are welcome, grains mihi venis.
I hope : use velim ; see 122.
as long as : see 63.
give information : use doceo.
EXERCISES 225
EXERCISE 54
The vengeance of the goddess
So when he had taken the city, we could not pre-
vent him from putting the men to death, selling the
women and children, and robbing the temples. Now
there was in a certain chapel a statue of Diana of
wondrous beauty : as he wanted to carry this off to
Rome, but felt doubtful whether it was solid gold or
gilt, he had a hole drilled through it : finding it solid
he gave orders for it to be taken on board his ship.
But that night he seemed in a dream to see Diana
coming to him to warn him not to do this thing. " If
you do so," said she, " you will become lame of one
leg." When he heard this, he thought at first that
the dream should not be neglected, and he made up
his mind to give orders in the morning that no one
should touch the statue. But when he awoke in the
morning and looked out of the window and saw the
statue shining in the sunlight, he thought lightly of
the voice of the goddess which he had seemed to hear
in the darkness of the night. So the statue was
taken on board, and he carried it off home with him.
But the day after he returned, when he was bathing
in the river, he wounded his right foot so seriously
that he became lame.
Is the statue solid gold or is it gilt ? Utrum solida est statua an
extrinsecus aurata (Is it solid or covered-with-gold outside ?).
perterSbrare statuam, to make a hole through a statue.
he had a hole drilled : see 86.
and looked out of the window and saw etc. : one verb will be
sufficient ; say ' and from the window had looked down on (despicio,
despexi}.'
think lightly of, contemno (3) : use the imperfect.
so the statue was taken . . . : see 77 (d).
Q
•226 LATIN COURSE
EXERCISE 55
A Eoman story
The supply of food was running short and there
seemed but little hope of safety, when there came
into the camp one day a deserter from the enemy and
said to one of the soldiers that if we gave him a con-
siderable reward he would return to his camp and
poison the king. So he was brought to the general,
and questioned as to what he promised to do. He
replied " This is what I promise : if you give me a
large sum of money I will poison our king this very
night : if I do so, you will be able to retire into the
territory of your allies. For there is no one worthy
to command us when the king is dead."
On hearing this Quintus at first felt doubtful what
was to be done, for the army was in the greatest
danger. But after a time he gave the deserter
to ten soldiers to take back to the king. Who is
there who would not praise this deed ? Have we
not learned from our ancestors that we must adopt no
treacherous measures, that 'an enemy is to be beaten
by valour not by knavish tricks ?
The first sentence will require to be paraphrased ' When the food
was now (iam) running short, and not (neque) much hope of safety
. . , there came . .' If you examine the English you will see that
' when there came a deserter ' (though grammatically subordinate)
is really the principal statement, to which the other clauses lead up.
run short, deficio.
But after a time, post autem aliquanto.
to take back : see 86.
knavish tricks : use scelus, -eris in the singular.
EXERCISES 227
EXERCISE 56
An attempt at bribery
Before doing this exercise see 156-58 on the use of the relative with
the subjunctive.
If you were a Koinan citizen, if you were a fit
person for me to touch, I would throw you out of that
window. But since you are a prisoner and a slave,
you may take up that money of yours and go out of
the house unharmed. But I just give you this
warning, don't come back to me again, at any rate if
you wisli to consult your own interests : and do not
think that by bringing me money you will persuade
me either to condemn that innocent man or to acquit
you. For if the thing ought to be done, I shall do it:
but if not, there is not enough money in the whole
world to induce me to do it.
fit, dignus.
throw, deicio.
take up, tollo.
just this, illud unum.
back again, rursus (from re-versus).
at any rate if, si quidem.
I consult my own interests, mihi consulo.
bring : use qffero.
but if not, sin minus.
world, orbis terrarum.
induce : use persuadeo.
228 LATIN COURSE
EXERCISE 57
A suspicious tale
When I heard that a great disturbance had been
caused in the territory of the Veneti, and that the
Koman citizens who lived in the district were in the
greatest danger, I decided that I must not wait for
Caesar's return, and started off with all my forces.
And as our fellow-citizens kept on begging me to act
promptly, I led my army by forced marches, and at
length on the fifth day I made my camp not far from
the river which separates the territory of the Veneti
from the territory of the Osismii. On the following
day the king of the Veneti came to me secretly, and
with tears begged me to help him : he said that he
dared not be openly friendly to the Koman people,
that plots were being made against him by his brother,
who wished to be king : that it had been necessary
for him to conceal both his fear of his enemies and his
friendly feeling for the Komans : now, however, owing
to the unexpected arrival of my army his brother had
no spirit left in him: if I would promise my pro-
tection, he could crush his brother's audacity : only I
must not tell any one that the king of the Veneti had
come into the Koman camp to beg for help.
First write out the oratio recta.
kept on begging me : say ' begged me again and again ' (etiam atque
etiam).
had no spirit etc. : say ' his brother's spirit had been broken by the
arrival etc.'
only I must not tell: the direct form would be 'don't tell any
one ' : see 149. Use modo for ' only ' with commands.
EXERCISES 229
On hearing this I promised to take measures for
the safety of the king and his kingdom : as, however,
I felt doubtful whether the king was to be trusted, I
added that, in case anything happened to the Roman
citizens, I would crucify the king and his brother and
all the leading men in the state. When he heard
this he thanked me warmly and went away into the
city.
in case anything . . , si quid novi (anything new). He means,
of course, ' if any harm should happen,' but avoids saying it.
230 LATIN COURSE
EXERCISE 58
In the Law Courts
You have heard my story. Gentlemen of the
jury, do you still doubt that this man robbed his
province ? Does he himself deny it ? Does he try
to conceal it ? I saw what would be his defence : he
made no answer to what I said : he urged that he
had been a good general and one blessed by fortune :
that he had kept his province safe from the runaway
slaves, who at that time under Spartacus were, he said,
a great danger to Italy. [Turning to the defendant]
Great is the glory of a good general : but still I did
not ask what had been your military achievements, I
asked whether you had kept your hands off other
men's riches : I asked why you condemned without
trial the virtuous Cleomenes, why you threw him into
prison and kept him in darkness for two years, and
did not allow any of his friends, not his father, nor his
wife, nor his son, to approach the wretched man. I
ask you this and you answer that by your valour and
vigilance you set Sicily free from the forces of the
slaves, that you finished off a great war. But after
my story : express by a relative sentence.
this man, iste (pointing at him in the court).
What is his defence? Quid defendit? (What does he allege or
maintain in defence, What is his line of defence ?)
no answer to : to, ad.
1 he urged ' should be omitted.
blessed by fortune, felix.
under Spartacus, 'with Spartacus as leader.'
military achievements, in re militari fortitcr facere.
keep your hands off other men's riches, ab alienis pecuniis manus
dbstinere.
after all, tamen.
. EXERCISES 231
all what war did you wage ? What slaves did you
conquer ? For we who live in Eome have heard
nothing about a war. We want to know who led the
enemy's forces, where you fought your battle, how
many men were engaged in the war. If you can give
us information about these matters, I myself will beg
the jury to acquit you.
fight a battle, praelium committere.
232 LATIN COURSE
EXERCISE 59
A stormy night
When he received this information, the General,
feeling that the city had at all times been loyal to the
British flag, immediately gave orders for five hundred
horsemen to start at midnight and hasten to the town.
He placed in command of this force Eichards, a well-
known man of the district. That night the weather
was so violent and the wind so boisterous, that you
could scarcely see or hear a man quite close to you.
This was a great advantage to our men. Accordingly,
Eichards ordered his men, when they reached the
enemy's lines, to go straight on and hasten through
Rather less help will now be given and you will do well to translate
more freely. You will often find it necessary to supply a connecting
link between the sentences, and sometimes to alter the structure of
the sentence. Do not be content to merely look up the words and
write them down with suitable terminations, but work at each
sentence till you feel satisfied that it sounds like a real Latin sentence,
You will not find all the words in the dictionary, but, with a little
thought, you will be able to supply them : for instance you will not
find 'trooper,' but if you know what a trooper is, you will have no
difficulty in recalling the Latin equivalent, for you have used it
hundreds of times.
In translating this and similar passages you can either substitute a
Latin name for an English one or change the English name into a
Latin form : for Richards either Ricardus or Gotta (for instance) will
do very well.
feeling : use arbitrari : see 79.
loyal to the British flag : Roman writers say in something very like
this sense ea civitas omni tempore optime de populo Romano merita e.st
(the city has at all times deserved well of the Roman people). "We
may imitate the expression populus Romanus and write populus
Britannicus.
weather etc. : say ' such was the violence (vis) of the weather.'
boisterous, vehemens.
a man quite close to you, proximus quisque.
lines : use praesidium (pi. ). I go straight on, pergo protinus.
EXERCISES 233
their encampment to the city : he had been informed,
so he told them, that the enemy supposed that we
were still a hundred miles away, and were therefore
not keeping watch very carefully : they were expecting
their allies, and would not be aroused by the arrival of
five hundred horsemen.
Everything happened as he had hoped. When
they were in the middle of the French camp and
people were beginning to ask who they were, one of
the troopers, who had lived some time in Paris at
the British Embassy, replied in French that they
were friends. This answer deceived them, and they
offered no resistance. When our men drew near the
gate of the town, they gave a signal and were admitted
by the townspeople, without the French having any
suspicion that the town was being handed over to us.
to keep watch, vigilias agtre.
arouse, excitare.
happen : use evenire.
people were beginning to ask : use quaerere impersonally.
at the Embassy, apud legatum (i.e. chez V Ambassadeur}.
admit, recipio.
234 LATIN COURSE
EXERCISE 60
A dilemma
The same day a report reached us that those who
remained in the fort were in the greatest danger : as
supplies were running short, and there was no hope of
cutting their way through the enemy, they would die
in a few days either by the sword or by starvation.
The Kaffirs, it was said, had sent messengers in all
directions to let the neighbouring chiefs know how few
of our men there were and what a good opportunity
was offered them to set their country free : if they
could cut off this little band of Englishmen from the
rest of the army, the English would even gladly make
peace in order to rescue their friends from their
perilous position. So we should be too late unless
we reached the camp on the following day.
When we received this message, we were at first
doubtful what should be done. For if we set out to
the assistance of our friends, we thought that the enemy
would march down to the sea and burn the ships : if
they did so, it would soon be all over with us. At
last we decided to leave a few men to guard the ships
if possible : with the rest we hastened with all speed
towards the fort.
See Ex. 24 and the notes there given,
at first, primo quidem : at last, postremo.
if possible : say ' if it could be done.'
we hastened with all speed, omni celeritate ire contendimus. Con-
tendo means 'I exert all iny power, strain every nerve.'
EXERCISES 235
EXERCISE 61
Tlie Rubicon
When therefore the news came that the tribunes
had fled from the city, he at once sent forward his
cohorts secretly in order that no suspicion might be
aroused, and, pretending that nothing had happened,
he dined and talked with his friends, as was his wont.
Then after sunset he started off with a few com-
panions by a route which was little known : having
put out their lights they lost the way and wandered
about for a long while : at last towards dawn they
found a guide and got back to the road. He followed
the cohorts as far as the river which was the
boundary of his province, and there stood still for a
minute, and as he reflected what a mighty task he
was taking in hand, he turned to those who were
standing by and said, " We can still retrace our steps :
but if we cross the bridge, the sword must decide
the rest."
pretending that nothing had happened : simply dissimulans. What
is the difference between simulo and disaimulo ? Quod non est simulo,
dissimuloque quod est.
to start off by a little known route, occultum iter ingredi (to enter
on a secret road).
to lose the way, de via decedere.
towards dawn, ad lucem.
as far as, ad.
the river which was the boundary : the relative will be masculine
to agree with/ras, ' boundary,' not neuter to agree vtitibfiumen. This
attraction is usual when the verb of the relative clause is a copulative
verb : e.g. gloria, qui est fructus virtutis, glory which is the fruit of
virtue.
for a minute, paulum.
reflect, reputo.
what a mighty task I am taking in hand, quantum nwlior (4).
who were standing by : use adsum.
I retrace my steps, regredior.
the sword must decide : not to be translated literally.
236 LATIN COURSE
EXERCISE 62
Caesar and the pirates
About the same time Caesar accused Dolabella of
extortion. On his acquittal, Caesar determined to go
away to Ehodes, in order both to avoid the ill-feeling
which he had aroused and to study under Molo, at
that time the most distinguished teacher of oratory.
While he was going across to the island, somewhat late
in the season, he was captured by pirates, and he
remained among them for nearly six weeks with one
friend and two slaves; for he had sent off in
different directions the rest of his friends and slaves
acquittal : use the verb. In Latin the substantives formed from
the verb are not nearly so freely used as in English. When sub-
stantives are not given in the dictionary, you should try the
corresponding verb : with a little ingenuity you will be able to find
out what part of the verb to use : here are a few examples :
the murderer of the child, qui puerum interfecerat.
on the surrender of the city, urbe dedita.
a teacher of oratory, magister dicendi.
he started in pursuit of the enemy, ad persequendos hostes
profectus est.
he prepared a fleet for the conquest of the British, classem
comparavit qua Britannos vinceret.
Rhodes, Rhtidus : a small island ; no preposition is necessary,
to arouse ill-feeling, invidiam conflare (from flare, to blow : to blow
into a fire so as to kindle it).
I study under Molo, MMonem audio (I hear Molo lecture),
somewhat late in the season, hibernis iam mensibus (when the
winter months were already beginning).
nearly six weeks : the Romans did not divide their time into weeks,
so we must say ' nearly forty days.' Obviously a round number gives
the writer's meaning best.
I send off in different directions, alias alio dimitto (I send off
different persons in different directions, some to one place, some to
another). Alio is the adverb of alius, like quo ( = to which place) from
qui. This double use of alius is very common : alii alia dicunt,
different people say different things ; some say one thing, some
another.
EXERCISES 237
to procure the money for his ransom. When the
money was brought and he was set free, he sailed to
Miletus, and immediately manned five ships and set
sail in pursuit of the pirates. He attacked them
unexpectedly and made them prisoners, and did not
hesitate to inflict on them the punishment with which
he had often threatened them in jest. For while he
was staying among them as a prisoner, he used to
write poems and read them aloud to the pirates : and
if any one did not admire what he wrote, he would
call him a barbarian, and threaten that he would
crucify him some day.
I procure money, pecunias expedio (4).
I man a ship, compleo navem (to give the ship its complement of
men and stores).
238 LATIN COURSE
EXERCISE 63
In the House of Lords
It seems to me, my lords, that you fail to under-
stand that the question before you is, not whether we
are to have peace or war, (for King Philip will not
leave that open to you, he is setting about a great
war both by land and sea,) but whether we are to
carry our forces across to Spain or to receive the
enemy into Britain. What an important difference
this makes, you have certainly learned by your
experience in the recent war, if never before. If
Philip sends his soldiers over to Britain, do you
believe that the Irish will keep quiet and maintain
their loyalty to the throne ? Never will that people
fail to side against us, whenever they have any one, to
A question in the deliberative subjunctive suffers no change of mood
when made indirect :
Direct — Utrum cedamus an resistamus ? Are we to yield or
resist ?
Indirect — Quaerit utrum cedamus an resistamus, He asks whether
we are to yield or resist,
my lords, patres conscripti.
fail to understand : use ignorare.
the question before you is : say ' you are being consulted.'
Philip, Philippus.
I leave it open to you, liberum id vobis permitto.
to set about a great war, ingens bellum moliri.
to learn by experience, experiri.
recent : use proximus.
Irish, Hiberni.
maintain loyalty to the throne, in fide manere.
never will that people etc. : arrange thus 'Never will that people,
unless when there is wanting one to whom they may go over (desciscgre),
not revolt from us.' Here is a similar sentence : Numquam ego, nisi
cum deerunt quibus subveniam, non resistam tibi.
EXERCISES 239
whom they can go over. Let Spain have the war
rather than Britain : let the enemy's cities and the
enemy's fields be wasted with fire and sword : we
have already learned by experience that our arms are
more fortunate and more powerful abroad than at
home.
with fire and sword, ferro atque igni.
240 LATIN COURSE
EXERCISE 64
An official report
Though I kept receiving reports that the Parthians
had crossed the Euphrates with nearly all their forces,
still, as I thought that more definite information with
regard to these matters could be sent you by the
proconsul M. Bibulus, I decided that it was not
necessary for me to report to you officially the
intelligence which reached me with regard to another
man's province. However, after I had received
information from most trustworthy sources, as the
matter was so important, I thought I ought to report
to you what I had heard. The envoys of King
Antiochus were the first to bring me the news that
large forces of the Parthians had begun to cross the
Euphrates.
I kept receiving reports : use nuntio (to bring a report) in the
imperfect.
I send you definite information, certa ad vos scribo.
I report [in writing], scribo.
from most trustworthy sources, certissimis auctoribus.
so important, tantus.
EXERCISES 241
EXERCISE 65
An official report (continued)
When this message was brought to me, as there
were some who thought the king not particularly
trustworthy, I decided that it was best to wait in
case any more definite intelligence should be brought.
On September 20th, when I was leading my army
into Cilicia, a letter was delivered me on the frontier
line between Lycaonia and Cappadocia from Tarcus,
(who is, it is thought, the most faithful ally of the
Eoman people on the other side of Mount Taurus),
saying that Acorus, the son of the king of the Parthians,
had crossed the Euphrates with a very large force of
cavalry and had pitched his camp at Dyba, and that
a great disturbance had been caused in the province
of Syria. On the same day a letter on the same
subject was delivered me from the king of the Arabes,
who is considered loyal and friendly to our interests.
there were some (non-nulli) who : see 157.
in case any more definite etc. : he said to himself ' I must wait in
case anything more definite etc. (si quid certius ad-feratur).'
on the frontier line : say ' on the boundary (fines) of Cappadocia
and Lycaonia.'
on the other side, trans.
our interests, res publica nostra.
242 LATIN COURSE
EXERCISE 66
An official report (continued)
When I received this news I decided to lead iny
army to Mount Taurus, that the enemy might know
that a Komari army not only does not give way at
news of danger, but even advances to meet it. If,
however, I may give you one piece of advice, I
earnestly advise and urge you to take measures at last
for these provinces. You are not ignorant how small
is the force under my command. But no danger
can be so great that I should wish to shirk it. Unless,
however, you send at once to these provinces a large
army, such as you are accustomed to send for an
important war, there is great danger that all these
provinces may be lost.
to give way, cedere.
to advance to meet it : say ' to advance nearer, ' propius accedere.
earnestly, magno opere.
at last, aliquando (lit. at some time or other, however late).
how small is the force etc. : say ' how few I am in command of. '
that I should wish to shirk it : begin with the relative. See 157.
shirk, siibterfagio.
a large army such as etc. : say ' so large an army as you are wont
to send for (ad) a very great war.'
there is danger that, periculum est ne.
EXERCISES 243
EXERCISE 67
A scoffer
After robbing the temple of Proserpina at Locri
Dionysius sailed to Syracuse : and as he went on his
way with the wind all in his favour, he said with a
laugh " Do you see, my friends, what a nice voyage is
granted to the impious by the immortal gods ? " When
he had reached the Peloponnesus, he went into the
temple of Jupiter Olympius, and pulled off the statue
the golden robe of great weight with which the tyrant
Gelo had adorned Jupiter out of the spoils of the
Carthaginians, playfully remarking that in the summer
a golden robe was heavy, and in the winter it was
cold, and he put on the statue a woollen shawl,
saying that that was suitable for every season of the
year. He also ordered the golden beard of Aesculapius
to be removed ; for, he said, it was not appropriate
that the son should be provided with a beard, con-
sidering that in all the temples the father was without
one.
I go on iny way, cursum teneo.
what a nice voyage, quam bond navigatio.
I pall a robe off a statue, vestem statuae (dat. ) detraho.
playfully remarking : say 'and he remarked jesting (iocans).'
I put a shawl on a statue, pallium (neut.) statuae in-icio (a com-
pound of in and iacio).
saying : don't use a present participle in the nominative with
another verb dependent on it.
also : see 48 and note to Ex. 40 ('It was Socrates too ').
beard, barba ; provided with a beard, barbatus ; without one,
imberbis.
Aesculapius was the son of Apollo.
it is appropriate, convenit.
1 he said ' should be omitted, as a verb of saying (iussit] has come
just before.
244 LATIN COURSE
EXERCISE 68
A scoffer (continued)
Dionysius, of whom I spoke above, did not hesitate
to remove the little golden figures of Victory and the
crowns which were held by the outstretched hands of
statues, and he would say that he was not stealing
these things but accepting them ; for it was foolish to
ask the gods for blessings, and refuse to take them
when they held them out and offered them to us.
They also say that he brought out into the market-
place these things which I have mentioned, which he
had removed from the temples, and sold them, and
when payment had been enforced he gave notice that
the purchasers should bring back everything to the
temples before an appointed day. Thus with impiety
towards the gods he combined injustice towards men.
Yet Jupiter Olympius did not strike him down with
a thunderbolt, nor did Aesculapius slay him with
sickness, but he died in his bed and handed on as a
legacy to his son the power which he had obtained by
wickedness.
Victoriola, a little figure of victory. hold, sustineo.
I stretch the hand out, porrigo (like rego) manum.
he would say, i.e. he used to say.
for it was foolish, etc.: the following sentence will help you, but
be careful to adapt it to suit the passage : A quibus bona precamur,
ab eis porrigentibus et dantibus nolumus sumere, We ask the gods for
blessings, and refuse etc. (literally, From whom we pray for blessings,
from them, holding them out and offering them, we will not take
them).
I bring out into the market-place, in forum profero.
enforce payment, exigo pecuniam (from ex and ago], exegi, exactum.
the purchasers : a relative clause. an appointed day, dies certus.
I combine this with that, adiungo hanc rem ad earn rem.
slay, inferimo. as a legacy, hereditatis loco.
by wickedness, per scelus.
EXERCISES 245
EXERCISE 69
Pyramm and Thisbe
Once upon a time there lived in the city of
Babylon a youth of "marvellous beauty, Pyramus by
name. In the next house lived Thisbe, than whom no
maiden was more fair to see. Now he being driven
by love of her begged his father that hie might be
permitted to marry her. But he, inasmuch as he had
no wish to give his son money, persuaded Thisbe's
father to forbid his daughter to talk with Pyramus.
Thereby he hoped that his son would soon forget the
maiden. And so the youth was not granted permission
to approach the poor girl, and the girl was not allowed
to go forth from the house. But yet the lovers — for
what does not love accomplish ? — used to talk daily
to one another : for in the wall which was common to
both houses was a hidden crack : through this crack
they would talk in low voices, and when at nightfall
they said farewell, they would give kisses, he to his
side, she to her side of the wall, which kisses for all
that did not make their way through to the other side.
Babylon, -onis, f. : Pyramus, -i : Thisbe, -ae.
fair to see, formosus (literally ' shapely ').
driven by love : amore captus, or impulsus, or ardens.
thereby, Quo facto. grant permission to go, potestatem dare eundi.
to be hidden, latere.
in low voices, submissd voce (sinking the voice).
they would give : 'they used to give.'
he to his side, she to her side, suae quisque parti (each to his (or her)
own side). The Latin expression is neater than ours, because we have
no word like SUK.S = his or her: qnisqueis strictly speaking masculine,
but may be used as shown in reference to a masculine and feminine
antecedent.
which for all that, quae tamen (nevertheless, i.e. in spite of their
doing all they could).
make their way through (per-venire).
246 LATIN COURSE
EXERCISE 70
Pyramus and Thisbe (continued)
' Thanks, courteous wall. '
Then of a truth Thisbe could not restrain herself
from weeping, and Pyramus, scarce holding back his
tears, would thus lament their lot : " Oh grudging wall,
why dost thou stand in the way of a youthful lover
that he may not go to his beloved ? Would that the
crack in thee were wide enough at least for kissing !
Would that I could see but one eye of my lady ! Yet
we are not ungrateful to thee, most kindly wall ; for
were it not for thee, I should not be able to say even
one word to my Thisbe." Thus would they talk and
then go sadly away.
But when now for many a month Pyramus had
been permitted to hear his lady's voice but not to see
her face, he persuaded Thisbe to try on the following
night to outwit the watchmen and make her way from
the house, and, leaving the city behind, to hasten to the
tomb of Nmus.
Then of a truth, Turn vero.
would thus lament their lot, in hunc modum (in this manner) quZri
(to lament, bewail) solebat. Omit ' their lot.'
grudging, invidus : from invidere (to look spitefully upon, to envy
or grudge).
Would that the crack etc. : say ' Would that thou wert sufficiently
open': 'to be open,' pdtere. Here is a somewhat similar sentence:
Ulinam paries satis pateat ad loguendum, I hope the wall will have a
hole large enough for talking. See 130.
at least, saltern. but one, vel unus.
were it not for thee, nisi per te liceret. Thus, Haec et talia.
But when now for many a month : compare this sentence Multos
iam mihi menses litteras quidem ad te scribere licet, vultum tuum videre
non licet (Now for many a month I have been permitted to write to
you but not to see your face). Note quidem which we express by
emphasising the word 'write ' (= litteras scribere}.
following night, postera nox. make her way from, exced&re, abl.
EXERCISES 247
EXERCISE 71
Pyramus and Tliisbe (continued)
1 This grisly beast. '
Accordingly on the following day, when at length
the night had come and her parents were now asleep,
Thisbe stepped out secretly and came to the appointed
place. Since, however, led on by love she had come
too early and Pyramus was not yet there, she sat
down under a tree which hung over the tomb and
waited for the youth. But lo ! suddenly she sees a
lion approach, who, after devouring an ox which he
had slain, was seeking the river that with its water
he might quench his thirst. As soon as she saw him
she fled into the dark tomb, and while she fled in
terror, her cloak slipped down from her back. Now,
when the lion had drunk a great draught of water and
was now about to return to the forest, he chanced to
find the cloak upon the ground and tore it to pieces
with his bloody mouth.
hung over : use imminere (dat.) in the imperfect,
chanced to find, forte (by chance) invenit.
bloody, cruentus.
248 LATIN COURSE
EXERCISE 72
Pyramus and Thisbe (continued)
' Anon comes Pyramus. '
And now Pyramus approaches, and seeing in the
deep sand the lion's track he hurries in terror towards
the appointed place. And when he recognised Thisbe's
cloak covered with blood, thinking that she had been
devoured by the lion, he exclaimed "Ah me! it is I
beloved who have slain thee, I who bade thee come to
a place full of perils and did not myself come first.
Approach then ye lions who inhabit these forests, that
you may rend my body also. But it is cowardly to
beg the wild beasts to come to my aid. With my
own hand will I slay myself." Then he kissed the
cloak he knew so well, and said " My blood also shalt
thou receive, 0 beloved cloak," and he drew his sword
and plunged it into his breast.
Meanwhile Thisbe, though she had not yet put
away her fears, was longing to tell her beloved what
perils she had escaped. At length she takes courage
to step out of the tomb : she sees nothing to fear ; so
she approaches to get back her cloak.
covered with blood, cruore oblUum ; obllnere means ' to smear. '
Ah me ! Me miscrum.
It is I who : ego coming first will express this.
first (of two people), prior.
' he knew so well ' may be expressed by the participle notus.
I plunge the sword into my breast, gladium in pcctus mihi inflgo.
not yet, nondum.
to put away one's fears, timorem ponerc.
EXERCISES 249
EXERCISE 73
Pyramus and Thisbe (continued)
'Very tragical mirth.'
But when she saw Pyramus lying on the sand, she
embraced his beloved form and kissed his cold face,
and cried aloud " 0 Pyramus, who has taken thee
from me ? O Pyramus, answer : thy Thisbe is calling
thee : listen." And he, hearing the name of Thisbe,
opened his eyes which were now heavy with death,
and at the moment of death he recognised his beloved.
Then did the maiden see her cloak torn in pieces and
Pyramus' sword drawn from its sheath, and when she
perceived that he had sought death for love of her,
" Ah ! luckless one," she cried, " thy own hand undid
thee and love of me. For me also is the hand and
the love strong for this one end, and I who caused thy
death will also share it: and thou, who by death alone
wert torn from me, shalt not be torn from me even by
death." Thus she spoke, and drawing the sword from
her lover's breast she plunged it still warm into her
own.
form, corpus.
take thee from me, te mihi adimere.
at the moment of death : a participle.
Omit ' from its sheath.'
undo, perdere.
strong for this one end, in hoc unumfortis.
I who caused etc. : ' I who was the cause of thy death will also be
the partner (comes) of thy death.'
drawing the sword : use extraho (I pull or drag out),
still warm, adhuc tepens.
250 LATIN COURSE
EXERCISE 74
1 The times are out of joint '
I have so far received one letter from you dated
January 13th, in which you wrote that you sent me
another letter before : this I did not receive. But I
beg you to write to me as often as possible, not only
if you know anything or hear anything, but even if
you have a mere suspicion, and above all I beg you to
write and tell me what you think I ought to do now
or what I ought not to do. For as to your asking
me to let you know what Pompeius is doing, I think
that not even he himself knows; at any rate none
of us knows. I saw the consul Lentulus at Formiae
on January 22nd: whether he means to make a
stand in Italy or to cross the water is not known. If
See 14 as to the tenses, 163-67 as to the Calendar.
so far, adhuc (hitherto, up till now).
dated : use dare. Our word ' date ' comes from the past participle
of dare in this way : to write and send a letter to a man is dare
epistulam ad aliquem. At the beginning of the letter the writer
would often introduce the day of the month in some such sentence as
this : a. d. vi. Kal. Febr. Capiiam Calibus prqficiscens has litteras
dedi, I write this on Jan. 27 as I start (in a carriage or litter) from
Gales for Capua. Sometimes the writer puts at the end a shortened
statement of the date : for instance D. viii. KaL Jun. Athenis.
This stands for Dedi or Data est ante diem octavum Kalendas Junias
Athenis, Given this twenty-fifth day of May at Athens.
to have a mere suspicion, suspicari, often contrasted with having
definite knowledge. Compare Quid ageres, nbi terrarum esses ne
suspicabar quidem, I hadn't even a suspicion (much less did I know)
what you were doing, or where on earth you were.
above all, maxime.
as to yonr asking : see 162.
at any rate, quidem ; arrange thus ' of us at any rate no one.'
mean : use volo.
make a stand, consist^re.
EXERCISES 251
he remains, I fear he will not have a strong army : if
on the other hand he goes away, I don't know where
to go, which road to take, what to do. Labienus, a
great man in my opinion, came to Teanum on January
24th. There he had an interview with Pompeius
and the consuls. I will write and tell you what
passed between them and what was done, when I
know for certain. Already Labienus seems to have
encouraged us a good deal. I should like to know
what you think about the whole matter. Certainly I
do not cease to urge them to peace : for peace even if
unjust is more advantageous than the justest war
with one's fellow-citizens. If Caesar withdraws his
garrisons from the towns which he has seized outside
his province, Pompeius will return to Rome and
arrange a peace. Goodbye. February 2nd. Formiae.
if on the other hand, sin.
where to go, which road to take : say ' whither or by what road I
ought to go.'
what passed between them : say 'what their conversation was.'
to know for certain, certum scire.
He has encouraged us a good deal, aliquantum animi nobis attulit.
Certainly, Equidem.
I urge them to peace, ad pacem hortor.
even if unjust, vel iniusta.
outside the limits of his province, extra provinciam.
252 LATIN COURSE
EXERCISE 75 .
' Citizens of no mean city '
If among the Athenians men were not wanting to
defend the common weal against the hasty action of
the populace, though those who did so were in all
cases banished ; if the great Themistocles, the saviour
of his country, was not deterred from defending the
common weal either by the disastrous end of Miltiades,
who a little while before had saved that state, nor by
the banishment of Aristides, who according to tradition
was of all men the most just ; if in later times the
greatest men of that same state (whom it is not
necessary for me to mention by name), with so many
examples before them of the fickleness of the populace,
among, apml.
'the common weal or wealth,' i.e. the good of the community (as
opposed to res privata, the interests of the individual), res publica.
Publicus ( =populicus) comes from populus.
though those who did so were in all cases (omnes) etc. : this is an
iterative sentence (see 64) : it should begin with cum ( = though), which
will affect the mood of one of the verbs.
Aristides, Miltiades make genitives in -i.
if the great Themistocles . . . : keep the clauses in the order of
the English, but change the verb ' deterred ' to the active : ' if neither
the disastrous end (calamitas] of Miltiades deterred Themistocles, nor
the banishment of Aristides etc.'
'the great' may be rendered by ille.
according to tradition : use the verb tradere (to pass a story on) :
like dico it prefers the personal construction in the passive ; see 110.
Add the word unus to omnium to heighten the effect : unus omnium
iustissimus.
in later times, postea.
the greatest men, summi viri.
mention by name, nominatim appello.
with so many examples before them : say 'so many examples being
set before them (propono}.'
fickleness, levitas.
EXERCISES 253
did nevertheless defend that commonwealth of theirs,
what ought we, pray, to do, we who were born in the
city in which greatness of soul had its origin, we
who have set our hands to the task of protecting a
commonwealth, which is of such excellent dignity that
it is more honourable to fall in its defence than to
win supreme power in an attack upon it ?
pray, tandem.
have origin : 'in which (unde, whence) it arose (orior).'
we who were born . . . : 'we who have sot ' : don't repeat the ' we,'
but begin the clauses with primum and deinde respectively : ' in the
first place having been born ... in the second having set our
hands. '
set our hands to the task of protecting : use a different metaphor
in Latin : ad-gredior ad tnendam rem publicam.
such excellent dignity, tanta dignitas.
it is more honourable, etc. : imitate the following sentence : satins
est jmgnantem occidcre quain superatitem vivere, it is better to fall in
the fight than to survive and be a slave. Compare 91.
I win supreme power, rerum potior (4).
254 LATIN COURSE
EXERCISE 76
' Citizens of no mean city ' (continued)
The Greeks whom I have named, who were un-
justly condemned and banished by their fellow-citizens,
have, nevertheless, because they deserved well of the
state, won immortal fame. Of the Carthaginians who
was of more account than Hannibal for his sagacity,
his courage and his achievements ? He was the one
man to carry on the contest with all those generals of
ours through all those years. He was banished by
his fellow-citizens : we have given him, our enemy, a
place of honour in our literature and our memories.
Wherefore let us imitate Brutus, Camillus, Decius,
Scipio, and countless others, who have stablished this
commonwealth. Let us love our fatherland, let us
obey the senate, let us reflect that the body of man
is mortal, but that fame is everlasting.
of more account, pluris.
for his sagacity : abl.
He was the one man to say : ' who alone (unus) carried on the
contest (decertare).'
all those, tot.
' we have given him even though (etiam) our enemy.'
to give a place of honour in etc., litteris et memoria celebrdre.
EXERCISES 255
EXERCISE 77
A letter home
On October 13 we reached Athens after a slow
and troublesome voyage with the wind against us.
As we disembarked Acastus was waiting for us with
the letters. I received your letter, from which I
gathered that you were afraid that your earlier letters
had not been delivered to me. They were all
delivered, and you took great care to tell me every-
thing, of which I was very glad. Nor was I surprised
that this letter which Acastus has brought was short.
For by now you are expecting me myself, while I am
longing to come to you : though I see in what a state
I shall find the political world. For I have learned
from the letters of many of my friends that things are
tending towards war : so that, when I come, I shall
not be allowed to conceal my views. But we must
bear our lot. I wish you would come as far as you
can to meet me. I hope, by the blessing of heaven, to
be in Italy about November 1 3. Goodbye. — Athens,
October 15.
Do not expect to find all the words in the dictionary ; all that you
need are there : see the first note to Ex. 59.
after a ... voyage : say 'having had contrary winds and made a slow
and troublesome voyage. ' ' I have contrary winds, ' utor adversis ventis.
He is waiting for me (i.e. standing ready for me), praesto (adverb)
est mihi. earlier, superior.
you took great care etc.: say 'everything was most carefully
written by you, and this (id) was most pleasing to me.'
you are expecting me, while I . . . : there is a slight emphasis on
the word 'I,' which is rendered in the Latin by quidem : 'you are
expecting me myself, who on my side (qui quidem) am longing.'
' though I see into what a res publica I am coming.'
things are tending etc., ad arma res (sing.) spedat.
to bear one's lot, sub-ire fortunam.
by the blessing of heaven : ' if the gods help. ' about, circiter, ace.
256 LATIN COURSE
EXERCISE 78
An unjust judge
If you still feel any doubt, gentlemen of the jury,
that Manlius robbed his province, listen to what
he did in the case of my friend Demetrius. When
every one else was sending presents to the praetor in
order the more easily to win his favour, he though
a very rich man would give nothing. So this fellow
got angry and ordered the man to be summoned to his
presence, and said that one of his slaves had joined in
a conspiracy and had incited other slaves to revolt ;
that this slave was the chief herdsman, Charmides by
name : that he must at once be brought to him.
When he heard this Demetrius declared that he had
absolutely no slave of that name : and that he could
not have a chief herdsman, because he had no herd
Before you do this piece study 33 as to se and eum.
If you still feel any doubt : when a negative is expressed or implied
with dubito, it may be followed by quin. Here the sense of Si dubitatis
is ' If you feel, and you surely do not feel, any doubt.' Compare this
sentence from Cicero : ' Quod si quis dubitare adhuc potuit quin nulla
societas huic ordini populoque Romano cum ilia importunissima belua
possit esse, desinet profecto dubitare his cognitis litteris.'
in the case of D., in Demetrio.
I win Caesar's favour, Caesaris gratiam mihi concilia (1).
this fellow, iste (he, the man over there), pointing at him in the
court.
incite : use concito (1).
a herd of cattle, pecus, -8ris n.
chief herdsman, magister pecoris.
declare, ajfirmo (1).
absolutely, omnino.
of that name : abl.
EXERCISES 257
of cattle : that, if any of his slaves had joined in a
conspiracy, he would even gladly have given him up :
for to a man who possessed so many slaves a war
with the slaves would be a great danger. Let the
praetor come himself to his country-house, which was
only two miles from the city, and choose as many
slaves as he pleased for punishment.
give up, Irado.
Oratio Recta f If any of ray slaves had joined in a conspiracy, 1
would even gladly have given him up (see 151). For to one who
possesses so many slaves, to him a slave war will be a great danger.
Come to my villa yourself etc.'
a war with the slaves, servile bellum.
for, i.e. with a view to, punishment, ad supplidum.
258 LATIN COURSE
EXERCISE 79
An unjust judge (continued)
While he was saying this and shouting that he had
done nothing, and committed no crime, the praetor
ordered his lictors to drag the man away and throw
him into prison. And so for two years this excellent
man remained in prison, in the darkness, in the filth :
nor was permission ever granted to any of his friends
to approach the poor wretch. Yet as often as the
defendant came to that town within those two years,
so often did the senate approach him in suppliant
fashion, begging and beseeching him that this un-
fortunate and innocent man might at last be set free.
But he, touched neither by the prayers of the citizens,
nor the sorrow of the father, nor the tears of the son,
would not set him free* till he had bought back his
freedom for a huge sum. For Demetrius, overpowered
at last by all his terrible sufferings, had the money
sent to Manlius. This done he was at once set free.
But this story is strange and perhaps seems scarcely
credible to you. I will therefore call the witnesses :
when you have heard them you will no longer hesitate
to condemn him.
I have committed no crime, nihil commisi. lictor, lictor.
I drag away, ab-ripio. this excellent man, mr honestissimus.
the defendant, iste. as often as, quotiens-cumque. See 54.
(a period of) two years, biennium.
unfortunate : use miser. touched, commotus.
at last : use aliquando ( — some time or other) or, stronger, aliquando
tandem.
overpowered by all his terrible sufferings : say ' broken by so many
and such great sufferings (miseriae).'
strange : use novus. no longer, non mm.
EXERCISES 259
EXERCISE 80
An unjust judge (continued)
Gentlemen of the jury, you have now heard all the
witnesses. From these virtuous citizens you have
learned that Demetrius was thrown into prison without
trial, that he also was suddenly released. Does any
one among you think that the poor wretch had done
anything to deserve punishment ? I ;will not plead
the cause of my friend Demetrius : I will say nothing
of the man's virtues : I will pass over also the point,
of which I spoke before, that a man who has no herd
needs no chief herdsman : I will not even say that
even if Demetrius was greatly in the wrong, still
such .severe measures ought not to have been taken
without trial against an honourable citizen of an
honourable state. I will leave all these considerations
on one side', though if I chose to follow them up, I
could easily show that by his own cruelty towards
others he has closed against himself every approach to
the pity of the jury.
to deserve punishment : ' I am doing nothing to deserve punishment,'
nihil facio quam ob rem poena iure afficiar (I am doing nothing by
reason of which I should with justice be punished). As to the relative
with the subj. see 157.
I pass over the point, illud praetermitto.
I will not even say, non dicam ne illud quidem. Note these two
instances of illud in apposition to a coming clause.
greatly in the wrong, maxime in culpa.
to take severe measures against him, in eum graviter animadvertere.
follow up, persequor.
I close the approaches against myself, aditus mihi prae-dudo
(claudo).
260 LATIN COURSE
EXERCISE 81
An unjust judge (continued)
So I will pass over all these considerations ; for I
foresee what line of defence he will take. He will
admit that neither the advanced age of the father, nor
the youthfulness of the son, nor the tears of both, had
more weight with him than the interests and the
safety of his province. He will tell us that the
administration cannot be conducted without severity.
He will ask us for what reason the fasces are carried
by the lictors before the praetors, why axes are given
them, why a prison is built, why so many punishments
are appointed for the wicked by the custom of our
ancestors. No doubt he will deny that the witnesses
are to be believed. And when he has said all this, I
shall ask him this one question: "Why did you set free
the very man whom you had yourself condemned ? "
I foresee, praevideo.
it has more weight with me, plus valet apud me.
interests, utilitas (sing.).
the administration is conducted, res pullica administratur.
for what reason, quam ob rem.
the lictors carry the fasces before the praetor, lidores praetori fasces
praeferunt.
to appoint a punishment for the wicked, supplidum (or poenam] in
improbos constituere.
no doubt, sine duUo.
Why did you etc. : see 50.
EXERCISES 261
And if he is silent, I shall ask you, gentlemen, if he
has not been guilty of a twofold offence in the case of
this one man: firstly, in that he condemned an innocent
man, secondly, in that he released a condemned man.
I shall ask you if : do not use si to introduce an indirect question,
in the case of this man he has twice been guilty, in hoc uno bis
improbus fuit.
in that, quod with subj. : compare the examples in 161.
262 LATIN COURSE
EXERCISE 82
A traveller s tale
The night had now come : we were making our
way through a dense forest, not knowing where we
were going, and we could not find any hut in which
to sleep. It seemed there was now no hope : we
were beginning to look about for a place where we
could lie down without danger of being attacked by
lions, when Eufus said that he saw a light. A few
minutes later we came to a small hut. In this hut
lived the keeper of the royal forest and his wife, who
In this exercise a little less help is given than hitherto. Not all
the words will be found in the dictionaiy : with a little thought the
student who has done the earlier exercises will be able to find suitable
words and phrases. For example, the Latin for ' we went on talking
till late at night ' has already occurred, but the English phrase by
which it was translated was slightly different. Do not use the
dictionary unless you are obliged, but try to supply the words from
your own knowledge. For instance, you know the Latin for ' to have
a good night ' if you think what it means : if you were to look up the
words in a dictionary you would probably write bonam noctem habere,
which would be wrong. Do not forget that the connection between
the sentences must be expressed in Latin ; in the above passage
several links have to be supplied. Many of the sentences, if trans-
lated literally, will not make satisfactory Latin : try to put them into
a Latin form, i.e. to make them like Latin sentences which you know
from the other exercises in this book or from your reading. For
instance, look at the second sentence above, beginning ' It seemed
there was now no hope.' If you translate it as it stands you will
feel that there is something wrong with it in several places, especially
in the piece 'when Rufus said.' If you think a minute you will see
that the most important statement is 'Rufus said etc.': all the rest
leads up to this : therefore get rid of the ' when ' before ' Rufus said ' :
make the other clauses subordinate and let clixit be the principal verb.
The sentence will then take this form 'when there was no hope and
we were looking etc. Rufus said etc. '
not knowing : use the adj. nescius.
hut, casa.
without danger of being attacked by, tutus a (safe from).
keeper, custos, -odis.
EXERCISES 263
gave us the kindly welcome of country-folk : their one
object seemed to be that we should be satisfied with
the food and have a good night. They took an eager
delight in our conversation, for living in the midst of
the forest they very*seldom saw a fellow-creature in
winter. So we went on talking till late at night and
then at last went to bed. I was tired after the
journey and had had a pretty good supper, so I fell into
rather a heavy sleep.
he gives me the kindly welcome of country -people, rustica bene-
voleitiia me accipit, (he receives me with rustic kindliness).
my one object is that . . ., nihil mihi potius est quam ut . . .
(nothing is for me more important than that . . .).
satisfied, contcntus (abl.).
I take an eager delight in, cupidefruor (abl.).
tired after a journey, de mafessus.
pretty good : ' pretty ' in this sense is satis. In the same way we
sometimes say ' good enough ' and the French say asscz bon.
We say ' I fall into a heavy sleep ' : the Roman uses a different
metaphor and says 'a close sleep wraps me round, embraces me,'
artus somnus me complectitur.
264 LATIN COURSE
EXERCISE 83
A traveller's tale (continued)
In the middle of the night^ after we had been
asleep for some hours, I seemed in a dream to be
hearing the voices of people disputing : at first I did
not recognise the voices of our host and hostess. But
at last I was roused by the incessant plaints of the
woman and began to hear what she was saying.
" Don't do it " quoth she, weeping the while ; " I beg
and beseech you not to. Oh dear ! what will become
of us ? " " You hold your tongue," came the angry
answer, " don't bother me any more. You need, have
no doubt that I 'm going to do it. It will be much
better to kill them both. Didn't you notice that they
are very rich men ? Did you ever see such beautiful
weapons ? "
When I heard this I was alarmed and roused my
friend, and said to him in a low voice " Don't speak :
our hosts are going to murder us : I heard the wife
begging her husband not to do it. So let us get
ourselves ready to fight. Look, I have brought you
your bow. I will hold mine ready to shoot. If any
one opens that door I will shoot at him. If I don't
hit him, you kill him."
some : meaning a good number, aliquot.
to dispute, altercari. host and hostess, hospites.
incessant plaints, assiduae querelae. Oh, dear ! Me miseram !
what will become of me ? Quid me fiet ? (me is abl. , what will
be done with me ?).
bother, sollidtare.
in a low voice, submissd voce (sinking my voice). Look, Ecce.
I hold a bow ready to shoot, arcum intentum (stretched) habeo.
I shoot at him, sagittam in eum emitto (I send an arrow at him),
hit : use configo (to transfix).
EXERCISES 265
EXERCISE 84
A traveller's tale (continued)
" I will do as you say," said he. " We don't know
how many there are of them, but unless they attack
us on both sides there is not much risk."
So we kept awake for three hours without hearing
another word. Meanwhile in the next room our
hosts seemed to be sleeping peacefully and even
snoring. Not to make a long story, when it got light
we went to sleep too. When we got up we went down
not without our weapons, and found a magnificent meal
ready. The man brought two chickens, and said
" Good morning, gentlemen ; I hope you have had a
good night. Look at these two chickens : my wife
and I had a dispute about them : she didn't want to
kill them both. But I said that as you had made a
long journey you would be able to eat hundreds.
However, we had only two." When we heard this, it
was as much as we could do to keep from laughing.
how many are there of you ? quot estis?
side : use pars. word, vox.
room ( = bedroom), cuMc&lum. and even, atque adeo.
Not to make a long story, ne multa (dicam or some other verb is
understood).
it gets light, dies illucescit (3), dies illuxit.
get up, surgo. go down, descendo.
we found a magnificent meal ready : say c we were entertained (use
acdpio) with a magnificence fit for a king, or with royal state ' (regio
apparatu ; apparatus, literally 'preparation,' is used especially of the pro-
vision of splendid banquets ; hence it comes to mean 'splendour, state ').
Look, Ecce and noin. chicken, pullus (poulet in French).
Good morning, Salvete (imper. of salvere, to be safe and well).
gentlemen, domini.
hundreds ( = any number however large), sescenti (600).
it was as much as we could do : express by vix aut ne vix quidem
(scarcely or not even scarcely, scarcely if at all).
I keep from laughing, risum teneo.
266 LATIN COURSE
EXERCISE 85
From a Roman governor
On receipt of this information I thought it best to
march through Cappadocia : for there was a strong
suspicion that, if the Parthians tried to make their
way out of Syria and make an inroad into my
province, they would march through Cappadocia as
that country was specially open to attack. So I
marched into Cappadocia and pitched my camp near
Cistra, a town near the Taurus range, in order that
the Armenian king might know that a Roman army
was not far from his frontier, and that I might have
our faithful friend King Deiotarus as near me as
possible, and might have the assistance of his counsel
and resources. Having made up my mind to stay a
few days there I sent my cavalry into Cilicia, that
my arrival being reported to the neighbouring states
might reassure every one, and that I might get early
information as to what was going on in Syria.
make their way : use egredior.
make an inroad, in-rumpere (to break into).
a town near : say ' which town is near mount Taurus.' The relative
and verb are necessary for this reason : in English we say ' the men
in the ship,' 'the people there' ; that is to say we treat adverbs and
adverbial expressions as adjectives (so in Greek ol ev ry vtji, ol tnei).
This is not done in Latin, except under certain conditions ; we must
therefore introduce a verb to support the adverb 'there' or the
adverbial expression ' in the ship ' : Qui in nave sunt, Qui ibi habitant.
Armenian, Armenius.
our faithful friend etc. : say ' Deiotarus the very faithful king and
very friendly to our interests ' (reipublicae nostrae). Superlatives are
used in Latin very freely.
as near me as possible, maxime con-iunctus.
might have the assistance of, ad-iuvari possem (might be helped by).
EXERCISES 267
EXERCISE 86
From a Roman governor (continued)
As the senate had commanded me to watch over
Ariobarzanes and to protect the king and his kingdom,
and had added that the safety of the said king was a
matter of great importance to the senate and people
of Rome, I thought it my duty to summon his majesty
to my presence and promise him my protection, so
that, inasmuch as his safety and the security of his
kingdom had been commended to my care, he might
make any communication to me that he wished. He
came to the camp, and having expressed his great grati-
tude to the senate, he told me that he did not believe that
plots were being made against his life or his throne.
I congratulated him, and told him that I rejoiced to
hear this : at the same time I urged the young man
to remember his father's end and to take measures to
secure his own safety : whereupon he left me and
went into the town of Cistra.
Ariobarzanes.
the said king : ' that king.'
it is a matter of great importance to me, magnae curae est mihi.
communication : die si quid vis make any communication to me
that you want to (literally, say if you want to say anything).
He came to the camp etc. : say ' when he had come to the camp
and had expressed etc.' Similarly the next sentence will run 'When
I had congratulated him and told him etc., then he left me . . .'
Note that the shorter sentences sound better in English ; in Latin
they would produce a jerky effect not suited to the formal style of the
passage. In Latin, also, there is no objection to the repetition of cum.
father's end: use interitus, a substantive from intereo = I perish ;
interficio = \ bring to destruction, intereo=l come to destruction.
268 LATIN COURSE
EXERCISE 87
(From a Roman governor continued)
On the following day he came to me in the camp
accompanied by his brother and the friends of his
father, men of some age, and with tears began to
implore my protection. On my asking what had
happened, he told me that he had received information
that certain persons wanted to take his life and make
his brother king : that his brother, who was very
much attached to him, had not dared to say this
before my arrival for fear of the risk : he had told
them that he could not accept the kingdom in his
brother's lifetime. When he told me this I advised
his majesty to use all diligence in protecting his
person, and I urged his friends to take a lesson from
his father's untimely end and guard their king with
all care. His majesty pressed me to give him a troop
of cavalry from my army, but I answered that I must
lead my whole army at once into Cilicia, and as it
seemed to me that, now the plot was disclosed, the
king had no need of a Eoman army but could defend
friends of his father, men of some age : paterni amid maiores natu.
See 33-35 on se and eum. Do the Oratio recta first.
very much attached to me, amantissimus tnei.
for fear, propter metum.
I use all diligence in protecting my person, omnem diligentiam ad
me conservandum adhibeo.
to take a lesson etc. : say ' taught by the father's untimely end
(acerbissimo casu) to guard etc. '
pressed me to give etc. , poslulo cquitatum de exercitu.
EXERCISES 269
himself with his own resources, I urged him to
condemn the men to death who had plotted against
him: to punish those whom it was necessary to
punish and to release the rest from fear : every one
would see that if there were any need I should protect
the king. Having thus reassured him, I moved my
camp from there and set about my journey into
Cilicia.
I reassure him, confirmo ilium.
from there : ' from that place. '
set about my journey, iterfacere instituo.
270 LATIN COURSE
EXERCISE 88
From our special correspondent
"When he learned the state of affairs, Mr. C. E.
came to the General and offered to go into the country
of the Matabelii to arrange a peace. The General
having given his permission, he set off the same
evening, and on the following morning he reached
Mount Amanus, on which, as I said above, is the
encampment of the enemy. Now, when they saw an
Englishman climbing the hill alone and unarmed, they
were at first speechless with astonishment : afterwards,
when they had collected their wits, they began to ask
one another what could be the man's intention that he
voluntarily put himself in a perilous position. There
were even some who recommended that the man
should be put to death without delay. But the king,
who was a sensible man, gave orders that no one
should leave the encampment : if the English chose to
Mr. C. 11., Marcus Caecilius Rhodius.
1 offered ' here means ' said he was willing to go.'
the same evening : 'the same day in the evening.'
He is speechless with astonishment, admiratus stupet. Note that
the past not the present participle is used. Cp. 79. Stupeo means
not ' I am stupid ' but ' I stand still, I am struck senseless ' (with
amazement, terror, and the like).
began to ask : use the imperfect.
what could be the man's intention etc. : imitate this sentence, Quo
tandem consilio ultra te pericnlo offers? What can be your intention
that you voluntarily etc. ? (literally, With what intention, pray, do
you voluntarily put yourself in the way of danger ?). tandem denotes
an impatient desire to have the question answered : the same eagerness
may be expressed by turning the sentence with ' could ' in English.
EXERCISES 271
send them a hostage, it was foolish not to receive him.
If they put such a distinguished man to death, did
they suppose the English would let his murder go
unpunished ?
mortem eius inidtam esse patiimtur, they let his murder go un-
punished (they suffer his death to be unavenged).
272 LATIN COURSE
EXERCISE 89
From our special correspondent (continued)
So he was brought to the king and questioned as
to what he wanted. He replied that he wanted to
make peace. He had been informed that the Matabelii,
having sustained so many defeats at our hands, wished
to acknowledge British supremacy. This being the
case he had made up his mind that it was for him,
who had known the Matabelii for so many years, to
come into their territory in order to make peace. He
was the friend of the Matabelii, and he had no doubt
that he had their permission to come to their carnp
when he chose.
On hearing this the king answered that he and his
people had not only long wished to make peace, nay,
they would gladly surrender their arms to him, if he
would protect the Matabelii. As to their having as
yet not sent hostages, they had been afraid that the
British would return to their own country when they
had made peace, and that they would not be able to
resist the Batavi, who had always been hostile to them.
So great were the wrongs done to the Matabelii by
the Batavi that they preferred to suffer any hardship
rather than yield to them. If, however, he would
remain in Africa and protect the Matabelii, they would
give up their arms.
sustain defeats etc. : use vinco.
who had known the M. : it may be convenient to change this to the
passive ' to whom the M. had been known/
nay, sed etiam.
as to their having : see 162.
EXERCISES 273
EXERCISE 90
From our special correspondent (continued)
Mr. R said that from the Batavi there was nothing
to fear : the safety of the Matabelii and the security
of their king had been committed to his care by the
Queen of England : he would not leave Africa before
he had made their position safe. Accordingly he
asked them this one question, Did they wish for peace
or war ? Thereupon the king called the leading men
to him and for a while they talked together : then
they all came to Mr. E. and threw down their arms at
his feet, that they might by so doing give him to
understand that they wished for peace : at the same
time they begged him earnestly to protect them and
not to leave them to be preyed on by the Batavi.
Thereupon he said that he accepted their surrender.
As to their assertion that they had been wronged by
the Batavi, let them not forget what great wrongs they
themselves had done to the English : the war had been
carried on by treachery not by valour ; the wives and
children of Englishmen had been murdered. Those
who had done these acts must be punished, the rest
would be forgiven.
for a while,
talked together : ' talked to one another.'
that they might by so doing, quibus abiectis (that by throwing
them down) ; see 156.
give him to understand : use significare (to show by signs).
they earnestly beg, supplices orant (to be followed by ut . . . ne-ve
and not . . .).
274 LATIN COURSE
EXERCISE 91
From our special correspondent (continued)
It is thought that the war is now finished. Some,
however, think that the Matabelii are not to be
trusted : they are secretly the friends of the Batavi,
people say ; they dare not openly be on friendly terms
with them, because they think that, if they pretend to
be hostile, they will be given permission to retain their
arms : these arms are being kept not for the Batavi
but for the British. The kings of the Batavi and the
Matabelii intend, so it is said, to drive all the British
out of Africa. There are a good many who say this
kind of thing : for niy own part I do not think they
should be believed. Meanwhile, there is no one who
does not praise the courage of Mr. R
I give you permission (to go), potestatem tibifucio (eundi).
keep, reservare.
for the Batavi : dative.
a good many : ' not a few. '
this kind of thing, haec et talia.
for my own part I, equidem.
276 LATIN COURSE
NOTE ON THE MARKING OF THE QUANTITIES
ON the following pages the quantities are marked systematically.
1. The vowels marked are long by nature, and should be pro-
nounced long.
2. The unmarked vowels are short by nature, and should be pro-
nounced short.
3. The diphthongs are long : they are not marked.
Do not confuse 'long by nature' and 'long by position.' A
syllable is said to be long by position in which a naturally short
vowel is followed by two consonants. For instance, the e of per is
short, but the first syllable of perdo is long by position, i.e., in a
verse it is scanned as a long syllable. This length by position is of
no importance to us here.
The more advanced student should see an interesting passage in
Cicero (Orator XLVIII.) in which he tells us that in- and con- were
pronounced long before s or / but not before other letters : hence —
Infellx but indoctus
Insanus „ composuit
consuevit „ concrepuit
confecit „
It seems that a vowel before ns, nf, was always long by nature, i.e.,
was pronounced long.
There is not always evidence to show whether a vowel was long
or short : in case of doubt I have left the vowel unmarked. I have
been guided chiefly by Lindsay, The Latin Language (Clarendon
Press) ; and Seelmann, Die Aussprache des Latein.
ENGLISH-LATIN DICTIONAEY
The long vowels are marked.
Abandon, relinquere.
able, possum.
about : l.( = concerning), de: de
bello loqui, to talk about the
war.
2. ( = nearly), fere : about ten,
decemfere; at about the same
time, eddemfere tern pore.
above, supra.
abroad, fons ( = out of doors).
absence, use the participle
absens : he condemned me
in my absence, me absentem
condemnavit.
accept, accipio.
accomplish, facio, efficio.
accordingly, itaque ( = and
so, and in this way) ; igitur
( = therefore ; follows first
word of its sentence) ; qua re
( = wherefore) : use proinde
with imperatives, and in ex-
hortations, appeals, etc..
accuse, accilsdre.
accustomed, to be, solere.
achievements, res gestae.
acquit, absolvere : to acquit of a
capital offence, capitis absolvere.
act, ago.
add, adiungere.
admiral, imperator.
admire, admlrarl.
admit, faterl.
adorn, orndre.
advance, progredl.
advantageous, utiiis.
advise, give advice. See warn,
affairs, state of affairs, res.
afraid, I am or feel, timed,
vereor, metuo.
1. I am afraid to go, Timed Ire
( = timore motus nolo Ire, owing
to fear I don't want to go). See
103.
2. (a) I am afraid that he will
do it, or that he is doing it,
Timed ne faciat l (I fear lest
he may do it).
(6) I am afraid that he will not
do it, or that he is not doing
1 The construction probably originates
thus : the sentence Timed ne fatiat, for
example, was once two sentences. Timed
(I feel afraid) : n> faciat ! (Oh that he
may not do it !). Ne faciat expressed a
wish, and timed formed a separate sen-
tence : it is easy to understand how in
time the two sentences were fused into
one. Similarly, Vereor ut faciat origin-
ates from vereor : ut faciat (Oh that he
may do it). Compare the wish sentences
(130) in which uti-nam, a longer form of
ut, is used.
278
LATIN COURSE
The long vowels are marked.
it, Timed ne non facial or
Vereor ut facial (I fear as to
how he may do it) ; I was
afraid that he had not told
you, that you were ignorant,
Timebam ne tibi non dixisset,
ne
NOTE.— If the verb of fearing is
negatived ttt is not used but ne
non : n5n vereor nl nonfaciat.
after : 1 . preposition or ad-
verb, post : after three days,
post tres dies; and not long
after, neque multo post.
2. conj., postquam, posted
qtiam, generally used with
perfect, see 6O. But after
he had departed I found that
this was true, posted verd
quam discessit 'intellexi id
verum esse ; the day after,
postridie quam; the day
after he had brought me this
news I started, postridie quam
id mihi nfmtidvit, profectus
sum.
against, contra, ace.
age, old age, advanced age,
senectus, -ntis.
aid, auxilium ; I come to your
aid, auxilio tibi venio : sub-
venio tibi.
Alexander, Alexander, -drl.
all, omnis.
allow : 1. I allow you to go
( = 1 give you leave), potes-
tdtem tibi f acid eundl.
2. to suffer a man to do a
thing (i.e. not to prevent it),
use patior.
llll te mvum exlre passl sunt, They
allowed you to escape alive.
3. I am allowed, licet mihi.
I ask to be allowed to speak, I
ask for permission to speak,
Peto ut liceat mihi loqul.
ally, soriiis.
almost, fere : cotldiefere, almost
every day ; omnes fere, almost
every one : with verbs, paene;
paene deletum est, it was al-
most destroyed.
alone, solus.
already, iam.
also, when possible use the
pronoun idem, as shown in
48 ; otherwise use quoque
or etiam. Quoque follows
the word to which it belongs.
always, semper.
among, apud, ace.
amuse, delectdre.
ancestors, mdiores.
ancient, veins, gen. veteris.
angry : I am, or I get angry
with you, irascor tibi.
another, alter,1 *alius. Do
not use alius in gen. or dat.
sing.
another (one), see 49.
answer, to, or make answer,
respondere : you make me no
answer, nihil mihi responded :
rescnbere ( = to write back).
i Alter means one of two, a fellow-
creature, one's neighbour : to take an-
other man's life, alterl yitam eripere ;
alius means different : different people
like different things (some like one
thing, some another), alii alia amctnt.
ENGLISH-LATIN DICTIONARY
279
The long vowels are marked.
Antioch, Antiochea.
anxiety, sollicitiido, -in is.
any, anybody, anywhere, etc.
See 4O, 41, 42.
appear, viden.
appoint, nomindre ; an ap-
pointed day, constituta dies,
an appointed place, constitu-
tus locus.
approach, to, adlre («c/)y
noun, adventus (4).
arise, surgere.
Aristides, Aristldes, gen. -I.
arms, anna.
army, exercitus (4).
arrange, constituere.
arrival, generally expressed
by the verb venio ; noun,
adventus (4).
arrive, venio.
He arrived at Rome, Romam venit ;
he arrived at the city, ad urbem
venit ; when he arrived there,
quo cum venisset.
art, ars.
as to: 1. prep. ( = with refer-
ence to, concerning), de.
2. (as to' may introduce an
indirect question : he was
questioned as to what he
had done, quid fecisset inter-
rogdtus est.
3. 'as to your assertion,' 'as
to my having attached,' etc.,
see 162.
ascertain, coynoscere.
= try to find out), quae-
rere : he asked me who had
done it, ex rue quaeslvit quis
; he was asked why
he did it, ex eo quaesitum est
cilr fecisset ; ask -for, petere :
he asked me for money,
pecuniam a me petiit; I ask
you to come, royd te tit venias.
See 10.
asleep, to be, dormlre.
assault, impetus (4).
assert, dlcere.
assistance, see aid.
Athenian, Atheniensis.
Athens, Athenae.
attack, noun, impetus (4) : to
resist or withstand an attack,
impetum sustinere.
attack, to, adoriri, oppugndre.
Adorior from orior, I rise, means
I spring out upon, I make an
unexpected attack upon, I try
to surprise the enemy : oppugno
is used of a more elaborate
assault, as of attacking a town
with artillery ; hence hastes
a tergo adortus est, He attacked
the enemy in rear ; hostes dor-
mientes adortus est, He sur-
prised them while asleep. Con-
trast aggeribus, vtneis, turribus
oppugndbam oppidum.
attempt, to, cdnari. See 1O3.
audacity, auddcia.
avoid, vttdre, fugere.
awake, to, experglsci ; to stay
awake, keep awake, vigildre.
away, to be, abesse.
axe, securis.
Back, tergum ; to come back,
or get back, redlre.
280
LATIN COURSE
The long vowels are marked.
band, manus.
banish, expellere, e nvltate
e-icere.
banishment, fuga.
bank, rlpa.
barbarian, biti-baru*.
bathe, to, lavdri.
battle, praelium, piiinm.
bear, fero.
beast, belua.
beat ( = overcome, conquer),
vincere, super are.
beautiful, pulcher.
beauty, pulchritndd, -inis,
forma.
because, see 159.
become, fieri.
bed, lectus : I go away to bed,
cubitum discedo (cubitum is
the supine of cubdre, to lie
down).
before, prep., ante, ace. ; ante
tuum adventum, before your
arrival.
adv., ante, anted; a little
while before, paulo ante; long
before, multo ante.
conj., ante quam, prius
quam; before he returned,
prius quam rediit. See 6O,
61.
beg : beg for, ordre ; beg and
beseech, orare atque obsecrdre.
I beg for help, auxilium oro; I
beg you to come, oro te ut venias ;
I beg you not to come, oro te ne
venias.
begin, I, coepi (pft. = (1) I have
made a beginning, I am now
beginning, (2) I did make a
beginning, I began).
behind, from behind, d tergo,
believe, credere.
beloved, amdtus, cum*.
beseech, see beg.
besiege, obsidere.
best, optitnus"; better, melior.
The gerund or gerundive
will often translate * better '
and ' best ' : I thought I had
better wait, or, I thought it
best to wait, exspectandum
esse putdcl. See 89.
bid, iul&re : I bade him fare-
well, iussi eum valere.
blame, to, culpdre.
blood, sanguis, -inis, in.
body, corpus, -oris.
bombard, per vim expugndre.
book, liber.
booty, praeda.
born, to be, ndsci.
both : 1. both the boy and
the girl, et puer et puella.
2. both of the boys did it,
puer uterque fecit ; both girls
did it, puella utraque fecit.
N.B. We say 'both boys' (pi.),
the Latin is ' either boy ' (sing. ) ;
uterque makes gen. utriusque,
dat. utrlque.
boundary, fines (pi. of finis,
m.).
boy, puer.
brave, fortis.
break, frangere; break a
treaty, violdre foedus.
breast, pectus, -oris.
EXGLISH-LATIN DICTIONARY
281
The long vowels are marked.
bridge, po/ts, pontis (gender of j
fun*, Tiidits, punsf).
bring: 1. ( = to carry), adfero\
or affero : bring back, refero.
2. ( = to lead in), addiico,
Jfico.
Britain, Britannia; Britons,
the British, Britannl ; the
British Ambassador, legdtus
Britannicus.
brother, //•«/'/•.
build, aedificare.
burn ( = set on fire), incendere.
but, autem, sed, af, vero. Sed
and at begin a sentence,
nntem and vero come after
the first word or two.
buy, emere; buy back, red-imere.
Call: 1. rocdre: I called him
to me, eum ad me i-occm.
2. appeti&re : we will call him
king, regem eum appelldbimus.
3. call on, go to call on a
friend, convenlre amlcum.
camp, castra, pi. : to pitch a
camp, castra ponere or facere.
can, possum.
capture, use capio.
care, cur a; vb. curare.
It is an object of care to me,
curae est mihi.
Take care that you do it, cura id
facias.
They don't care what we do, quid
nos agdmus non curant (or non
laborant, they don't trouble them-
selves).
carefully, dlliy enter, superl.
diligentissime : not very care-
fully, parum dlligenter.
carry, fero ; carry off, aufero ;
carry on war, gero bellum ;
carry across, trdnsportare.
Carthage, Karthayo ; Cartha-
ginian , Karthdginien sis.
Catiline, Cat Ulna.
Cato, Cato, -onis.
cause, causa : to plead a cause,
ca usam defendere.
cavalry (force, troop, body of
cavalry), equitdtus (4), equites.
cease, desinere, desistere.
certain, a certain person,
quidam; to know for certain,
certum sclre ; certainly, eerie.
chapel, sacellum.
charge ( = order), praecipio :
I charge you to do it, prae-
cipid tibi ut facias ; not to do
it, ne facias.
check, impedlre : I check him
from coming, impedio eum
quo minus veniat.
chief, rex.
child, puer ; children, liberl.
choose ( = wish), void; •( = pick
out), e-ligere, deligere.
citadel, arx, arcis.
citizen, civis.
city, urbs.
clever, sapiens.
climb up a mountain, (in)
montem ascendere.
cloak, pallium.
clothes, vest's (use the sing.).
cohort, cohors (a cohort con-
sisted of 600 men).
282
LATIN COURSE
The long vowels are marked.
cold, frigidus, gelidus.
collect, cogere: I collect myself,
or I collect my wits, me
colligo (3).
come, venio ; come together,
convenio ; come back, reded ;
come in, intro.
coining, the, adventus(4:); often
expressed by a verb,
command: 1. ( = to order),
imperdre, dat.
He orders me to go away, imperat
ihi ut discedam.
2. ( = to be in command of),
prae-esse, dat.
He is in command of the army,
exercitul prae-est.
3. to place him in command
of the army, eum exercitui
prae-ficere. .
commander - in - chief, im-
perdtor.
commend, commenddre.
commit : I commit him to
your care, commendo (1) eum
libi '(I commend him to
you).
common, communis.
companion, comes, -itis.
compel, cogere.
complain, quert.
conceal, dissimuldre.
condemn, damndre ; condemn
to death, capitis damndre.
conduct, ducere.
congratulate, grdtuldrl, dat.
conquer, vincere.
consider, existimdre. "Con-
sidering that " may often be
translated by cum. See 68.
considerable : a considerable
reward, aliquantum praemil.
conspiracy, to join in, enter
into a, coniurdre.
consul, consul, -ulis.
consult, consider e.
contest, to carry on a, decertdre.
conversation, sermo, -onis.
corn, frumentum.
council, concilium.
counsel, comilium.
countless, innumerdbilis.
country : 1. country as op-
posed to town, rtis, ruris.
He went into the country, rus dbiit.
He is in the country, rUrl est.
2. (= fatherland), patria.
To die for one's country, pro patria
morl.
3. ( = a land), terra; some-
times fines ( = borders).
The country of France, terra
Gallia.
To march into the enemy's country,
in Tiostium fines iterfacere.
country-house, villa.
courage, virtus, -utis : to take
courage, use audere.
cowardly, timidus.
crack, rima.
credible, credibilis.
cross (over), trdns-eo, trd-icio
(iacio).
crown, corona.
crucify, in crucem t oiler e.
ENGLISH-LATIN DICTIONARY
283
The long vowels are marked.
cruel, crudelis: cruelty (to-
wards him), cmdelitds (in
eum}.
cruiser, ndvis lonya.
crush, comprimere.
cry ( = shed tears), lacrimdre ;
cry aloud, shout, cldmdre.
custom, mos : in accordance
with my custom, more meo.
cut, cut off, interclndere ; from
flight, fug (I ; from the rest,
(7 reliqms ; cut their way
through the enemy (to break
through),per hostes e-rumpere;
cut (a thing) in two, cut (it)
through, dl-scindcre.
Danger, perlculum.
dare, audere ; daring spirit,
auddci«.
dark, obscurf*.
darkness, tenebme.
daughter, fllia : little daugh-
ter, flliola.
day, dies; every day, cotldie ;
in, within a few days, see
Sect. 1 ; at dawn of day, £>rfm<i
luce.
dead, mortuus.
dear, cdrus : our dear Tullius,
Tullius noster.
death, mors.
deceive, decipiv.
decide, statuere. See 1O5 (iv).
declare, pronuntidre.
deed, factum.
deep, altus.
defend, defenders What is
your defence ? or, What line
of defence do you take ?
Quid defemlis ?
delay, to, mordri: without
delay, confeslim (adv.).
deliver (a letter to him),
reddere (litterds el}.
demand, postuldre.
dense, densus.
\ deny, negdre.
j depend : everything depends
on victory, omnia in victoria
posita sunt ; our safety de-
pends on our courage, in
virtute posita est saltl*.
descend (from), descendere (de").
desert, deserere.
deserter, perfuya.
deserve, merer!: to deserve
well of us, de nobu bene
mererl.
desire, be desirous, cupio.
desolation, vdstitds, -dtis.
despair, to, be in despair,
desperdre.
destroy, delere.
deter, de-terrere : to deter him
from laying the country
waste, a vdstandls agrls eum
deterrere.
determine, atatuere. See 1O3,
105.
devour, vordre.
dictator, dictator, -oris.
die, morior, per-eo.
different, alius.
difficult, difficilis, superl. diffi-
cillimus.
difficulty, with, scarcely, vix ;
aegre, superl. aegerrime.
284
LATIN" COURSE
The long vowels are marked.
dinner, cena ; dine, have
dinner, cenare, pf. cendvi,
deponent pf. ptcple. cendtus,
having dined ; to have dinner
prepared, see 86.
disclose, pate-facio.
discover, compenre ( = find) ;
coynosco ( = get to know).
disembark, de nave exire.
disgraceful, turpis.
dismiss, dwiittere.
distance : I am at a distance
of one day's inarch, absum
iter umus diei ; of two days'
inarch, bldul iter.
distinguished, cldrus.
district, regio, -onis.
disturbance, tumultus ; to
cause a disturbance, tumul-
tum excitdre.
ditch, fossa.
do, agere, facer e.
doctor, medicus.
dog, canis.
dominion, domindtus (4).
door: 1. ( = door way), idnua.
2. ( = the actual door), foris,
or pi. fores : I shut my bed-
room door, forem cubiculi
claudo.
doubt (vb. dubitdre ; adj.
dubius) : to be or feel doubt-
ful, have doubt, dubitdre ;
is it doubtful to you ? num
tibi dubium est ?
Construction (see also 1O3,
105).
(a) Indirect Question :
Dubito quid sit faciendum, I
feel doubtful (as to) what
should be done, I feel doubt-
ful what to do.
(6) qu'm (only after a negative a) :
Non dubito quln ita sit, I have
no doubt that it is so.
draw a sword, gladium
stringere.
dream, somnium ; in a dream,
in somnis.
drink, bibere ; drink a great
draught of water, multam
aquam bibere.
drive back (the enemy), re-icio
(hostes) ; drive out, expellere.
duty, use gerund or gerundive,
see 89 ; or debeo.
Each, see 46.
eagerly, dcriter or acerrime.
early, mature; too early, mdtu-
rius.
earth, terra.
easy, facilis, facilior, facillimus ;
adv. facile.
effect, efficere.
either : either this or that,
aut hoc aut illud.
elder, mdior ndtu.
embark on a ship, in ndvem
conscendere.
embrace, complectt.
encamp, castra facere; en-
campment, castra.
encourage, adhortdri.
endure, per-petior.
i The negative may be implied : Num
dubitds? Yon, surely, do not doubt?
ENGLISH-LATIN DICTIONARY
285
The long vowels are marked.
enemy, hostis, generally used
in the plural : a private
enemy, inimicus[hom amlcus\.
engaged, to be, in, interesse,
dat.
engine, tormentum.
England, Britannia ; English-
men, the English, Britannl ;
adj. Britannicus.
enough, satis.
Enough corn for a month, satis
frumentl in mensem ; enough
wood for making a bridge, satis
lignl ad pontem faciendum.
enter, intrdre, ingredl.
envious, invidus.
envoy, legdtus.
err, errdre.
escape, fugio, effngio.
even, etiam ; not even, ne . . .
qiiidem; even though, etiam si.
Not even for the sake of a friend
ought we to lie, ne amid quidem
causa mentlrl debemus ; even
though he is said to be my friend,
still he stirs up ill-feeling against
me, etiam si mihi amlcus esse
dlcitur, tamen invidiam mihi
conflat.
evening, vesper ; in the even-
ing, vespere or vesperi; on the
following evening, postridie
vespere.
everlasting, sempiternus.
every, omnis; every one, omnes;
every thing, omnia; every day,
cotldie.
example, exemplum.
excellent, optimus.
exclaim, cldmdre.
expect, exspeddre.
extortion, to accuse him of,
accftsdre eum de pecunils repe-
tundis.
eye, oculus.
Face, vultus.
faithful, fidelis.
fall, cadere ; ( = to die), occidere.
fame, gloria.
famous, nobilis.
far, procul, lonye (longius, lon-
farewell, vale, the imperative
of valere, to be well ; I bid
you farewell, iubed te valere.
fast, celer ; superl. celerrimus.
father, pater.
fatherland, patria.
fear, timor, metus: vb., see
afraid,
feed, pdscere.
feel, sentlre.
fellow-citizen, clvis.
few, panel; how few, quam
panel.
field, ager.
fight : vb. pugndre, praelidn ;
noun, pugna, praelium.
filth, squalor, -oris.
find, reperlre, in-vemre (to come
upon) ; find out, cognoscere.
fine : it is a fine (glorious)
thing, praeddrum est.
finish (off), conficio.
fire, ignis; to be on fire,
flagrdre.
first, primus : he was the first
286
LATIN COURSE
The long vowels are marked.
to say it, primus dlxit ; at
first, pnmo, prlmo quidem
( = at first indeed), often fol-
lowed by deinde (then, after-
wards), or postremo ( = at
last) ; firstly, prlmum ;
secondly, deinde.
fitted, aptus.
flee, see fly.
fleet, cldssis.
flight, fuga.
flog, virgls caedere (to beat
with rods).
foe, see enemy.
follow, sequi ; follow up,
perseqm ; on the following
day, postero die or postrldie.
food, cibus.
foolish, stultus.
foot, pes, pedis : the foot of the
mountain, imus mons.
for, conj., enim (following the
first word of the sentence),
nam.
For there was a strong suspicion,
Erat enim magna suspicio.
prep. ( = on behalf of), pro;
to die for one's country, pro
patrid morl; ( = on account of),
propter, for fear, proptermetum.
forbid, vetdre.
force, forces, copiae, exercitus.
foresee, providere.
forest, silva.
foretell, praedlcere.
forget, obllvisci.
forgive, ignoscere, dat., veniam
dare, dat. ; forgiveness, venia.
former, prior.
fort, castra ; strongly built
fort, miinlta castra.
fortify, miinlre ; very well (or
strongly) fortified, miinitis-
simus.
fortunate, fellx.
free, liber, -a, -urn ; to set free
(from), llberdre (a6).
freedom, llbertds.
French, the, Galft; in French,
Gallice.
friend, friendly, amuus ; he is
on friendly terms with me,
amicus est mihi ; friendship,
amlcitia ; friendly feeling
(for you), amlcitia (tm).
My (our) friend Cassius, Cassius
noster. Nosirl, sul, etc. are
often used where we say ' our
friends,' 'our people/ 'our
countrymen,' etc.
frighten, terrere.
frontier (line), fines (pi.).
full,
Garden, hortus.
g-arrison, praesidium.
g-ate, porta.
general, imperdtor.
Germans, Germdni.
get to a place, get away, see
go, come.
get back ( = receive or take
back), recipio ; ( = return),
red-ire.
give, do; give back, reddo ;
give up, dedo.
ENGLISH-LATIN DICTIONARY
287
The long vowels are marked.
glad, laetus ; gladly, use the
adj., he will do it even
gladly, vel laetus faciet ; I
am glad, gaudeo.
glorious, praecldrus.
glory, laus.
go, eo, venio ; go across, trans-
eo ; go away, dis-cedo, ab-eo ;
go forward, go on, pergere ;
go into, venire in; go out,
ex-eo ; what is going on ?
quid agitur ?
god, deus; goddess, dea.
gold, aurum ; golden, aur>us.
goodbye, imper. of valeo.
grant, do ; I grant you your
life, vitam tibi concedo.
grateful, gratitude : I am very
grateful, magi tarn habeo
grdtiam*; I express great
gratitude to you, maximds
tibi grdtids ago.
great, magnus; so great,
tantus : the greatest men,
summl (not maximi) virl.
Maximus is used of size or age,
rarely of moral or intellectual
greatness.
greatness, magnitude.
Greece, Graecia; Greek, Grae-
cus.
ground, humus; on the ground,
humi.
grow, fieri.
guard, dtfendere.
guide, dux, duds.
Hand, manus ; to be at hand,
adesse ; hand on, hand over,
trddere.
hang : to hang one's self, se
suspendere ; to hang over,
imminere, impendere ; danger
is hanging over the city,
impendet urbi periculum.
happen, accidere (to befall,
coine to pass) ; fieri (to be
done, brought about).
1. I happened to see you, Accidit
ut te viderem (It happened that I
saw you I saw you by accident).
2. Ita factum eat ut te viderem,
This was how it happened that
I saw yon (It was not an acci-
dent but due to this cause).
happy, bcdtus.
harass, vexdre.
harbour, portus (4).
hasten, mdtiirdre, contendere.
hate, I, odi (pft. = I have con-
ceived a hatred of) ; hatred,
odium; he is hateful to me,
odio (dat.) est mihi.
have, I (=1 possess), habeo,
est mihi ; ( = cause, as in * to
have a house built'), curare
with gerundive, see 86.
health : to have good health,
be in good health, valere ;
to be out of health, to be in
weak health, non valere, m-
firmd valetudine esse.
hear, audire^; ( = to get to
know), cognoscere.
heavy, 'gravis.
help : vb. adiuvdre (ace.), sub-
venire (dat) ; noun, auxilium.
288
LATIN COURSE
The long vowels are marked.
here, hie ; he is here, adest.
herself, see self.
hesitate, dubitdre (see 1O3) ;
hesitation, dubitdtio.
hill, mans, montis.
himself, see self,
hold, tenere; hold in check,
sustinere ; hold back, retineo.
home, domus ; at home, doml ;
to go home, domurn ire.
honourable, honestus ; to die
an honourable death, honeste
mori.
hope: vb. spero ; noun, spes (5) ;
to lose hope, desperdre.
He hopes for peace, pdcem sperat ;
he hopes to see, sperat se msurum.
horse, equus; horseman, eques,
-itis.
host ( = one who shows hos-
pitality), hospes, -itis; ( = large
number), multitudo.
hostage, obses, -idis.
hostile, Jiostis, inimicus.
hour, hora.
house, aedes, pi. ; domus.
how, quam ( = to what extent) ;
how few ? quam pauci ? how
great? quantus?
however, vero, tamen, autem
(following the first word or
two of the sentence : How-
ever, after he had returned,
Posted vero quam rediit . . .).
huge, ingenSj ingentis.
hunger, fames, -is, abl. fame ;
to die of hunger, fame mori.
hungry, to be, esurlre.
hurry, properdre.
husband, vir.
If, see 115-9.
ignorant, igndrus.
ill, aeger, aegra, aegrum.
illness, morbus.
imitate, imitdri.
immortal, immortdlis; the im-
mortal gods, di immortdles.
impend, impendere.
impious, impius ; impiety,
impietds.
implore, implordre.
important, importance, see
97-99.
impossible, use possum.
impunity, with, adv. impune.
inasmuch as, quoniam. See
159, 160.
indeed, quidem following the
emphatic word.
Indian, Indus.
induce, persuddere. See 1O.
inform : I inform yon, give
you information, certiorem te
facioj he received informa-
tion, certior factus est, or
cognovit.
inhabit, incolere.
injure, laedere.
injustice, act of injustice,
iniuria.
innocent, innocens, -entis.
inquire, see ask.
intelligence ( = news), use
ntintidre, to bring news.
intend, I, in animo habeo ;
consilium est ( = rny plan is).
ENGLISH-LATIN DICTIONARY
289
The long vowels are marked.
intercept, intcrcipio (3).
interpret, interpretdri.
interview : I have an inter-
view with him, convenio eum.
island, msula.
itself, see self.
Italy, Italia.
Jest : vb. ioco, noun, iocus ; in
jest, iocdns or per iocum.
journey, Her, itineris.
joyful, laetus; joyfully, use
the adjective.
judgment, indicium.
jump down, desillre.
Jupiter, Ifqriter, gen. lovis.
jury, gentlemen of the, indices.
just, iiistus.
Keep : keep in prison, in
career e tenere; he kept saying,
dicebat.
kill, interficio.
kindly, bemgnus.
kindness ( = a kindly act),
beneficium; ( = kind feeling),
benevolentia.
king, rex, regis.
kingdom, regnum.
kiss : vb. osculdri; noun, oscu-
lum.
know, scire (negative form
nescire), novisse (pf. of noscere,
to become acquainted with) ;
to get to know, cognoscere.
I know you did it, scio tefecisse.
I know the man, nom hominem,
notus est mihi.
A well-known man, homo notus.
Our plans get known by the onemy,
consilia nostra ab hostibus co-
gnoscuntur.
He let me know that he was
coming to see me, certiorem me
fecit se ad me venturum.
On various constructions with scire,
see 1O5.
Labour, labor, -oris.
Lacedaemonian, Lacedae-
monius.
lady, puella.
lame, claudus: lame of one
leg, claudus altero pede.
land, terra.
large, magnus ; very large,
permagnus; so large as, tan-
tus quantus.
last : I did it last year, postero
anno feel; lastly, postremo ;
at last, tandem, postremo.
late, sero, adv.
Latin, in, Latme, adv.
laugh, ridere.
law, lex, legis.
lead, ducere; lead away, ab-
dficere ; lead back, reducere.
leader, dux, duds; leading
man, prlnceps, -ipis.
learn ( = to be informed), co-
gnoscere; ( = to be taught),
discere.
leave ( = to go away from),
discedere (ab amlcls, a loco, d
regione) ; ( = to go out of),
excedere (tx castris, ex urbe) ;
( = to leave behind), relinquere.
legion, legio, -onis.
length, at, tandem.
lest, ne.
U
290
LATIN COURSE
The long vowels are marked.
let us go, see 126-27.
letter, litterae, epistula.
levy, delectus (4) : troops are
being levied, delectus (militum)
habetur (a levy of troops is
being held).
lie ( = to tell lies), mentiri;
( = to be recumbent), iacere ;
to lie down, cubdre ; to lie
down again, recumbere.
lieutenant, legdtus.
life, vita: to take another
man's life, vUam alterl eripere; \
in his father's lifetime, patre
vivo.
light, lumen, -inis ; to put a
light out, lumen exstinguere. \
like, volo ; I should like, see
122.
line, acies (5) ; all along the
line, totd acie.
linger, mordri.
lion, led, -onis.
listen : I listen to him, audio
eum.
live, vivere ; ( = dwell), habitdre
(in urbe).
lo, ecce.
lofty, altus.
long: 1. adj., long us ; a long
letter, longa epistula. 2. adv.,
diu, iam diu (see 58).
lam diu mihi mindtur, he has
been threatening me for a long
time.
Diutius simuldre non potest, he
cannot pretend any longer.
3. long before, multo ante.
look : look behind, back, round,
respicio.
look (-out) for: 1. ( = to be
on the look-out for, expect),
exspectdre. 2. ( = seek for),
quaerere.
Qaaero librum, I am looking for a
book.
Adventum tuum acerrime exspccto,
I look eagerly for your coming.
lose, perdere, dmittere.
Amittere, from mittere, to let go,
means to let a thing slip away,
lose by accident or carelessness.
Pcrdere, from per and dare,
means to give to destruction,
just as per-lre means to go to
destruction, perish ; hence per-
dere means to waste, squander,
lose by one's own fault.
love : vb. amdre, diligere; noun,
amor, -or is ; lover, amdns.
loyal, to be, bene sentlre (to
think rightly).
loyalty, fides (5).
lucky, felix ; luckless, infelix.
Maiden, puella.
majesty, his, rex.
make,/<xao; fw (see 4); make
clear, signijicdre.
man: 1. homo ( = human
being, avOpuiros). 2. vir (not
a woman or a child, dvijp).
He ordered the men to retire,
Militibus imperdvit ut recederent.
I think that our men are in danger,
Nostros in perlculo credo esse.
If a man has deceived me, I trust
him no more, Si quis me decepit,
el non amplius credo.
ENGLISH-LATIN DICTIONARY
291
The long vowels are marked.
many, multi ; a great many,
permulti ; so many, tot; as
many as, quot.
inarch: noun, iter, itineris; vb.
iterfacio ; by forced marches,
quam potuit inaximis itineri-
bus (by as great marches as
he could ; any part of possum
may be used according to the
sense required) ; in light
marching order, expedlto ex-
ercitt'f. '
marry : (vir) in mdtrimonium
dilcit (puellam), a man marries
a woman ; (puella) nilbit viro,
a woman marries a man (lit.
puts on the wedding veil for
the man).
marvel, admlrdrl.
marvellous, egregius.
matter, res.
may : you may go ( = you
have permission to go), licet
tibi ire.
mean, turpis.
meantime, meanwhile, inter ed.
measures : I take measures
for you, consulo (3) tibi; for
my own security, saluti meae.
meet : I come to meet you,
obviam (adv.) tibi venid.
mention, dlco.
message, messenger, nuntius;
to bring or give a message,
nuntidre ; nuntium afferre ;
when I received this message,
say, when this message was
brought.
middle, midst, use adj. medius ;
the middle of the night, mid-
night, nox media.
mile, a, mllle passus (1000
paces) ; it is five miles away
from the town, quinque milia
passuum ab oppido abest.
mind, mens, mentis; I make
up my mind, statuo. See
1O3, 1O5. Mind you come,
see 124.
money, sum of money, pecunia.
monster, monstrum.
month, mensis.
moon, lilna.
moreover, praetered.
morning, this, in the morning,
mane; the following morning,
postridie mane.
mortal, mortdlis.
mother, mater.
mount, mountain, mons; moun-
tain-passes, angustiaemontium.
mouth, os, oris.
move, movere.
much : adj. multus ; adv.
multum ; multo (abl. of
measure) with comparatives:
much better, multo melius
(better by a great deal).
murder, necdre, interficere.
must, use gerund or gerundive
or debeo.
myself, see self.
Name : vb. nomindre ; noun,
nomen, -inis.
narrow, angustus.
nation, gens, gentis.
nature, ndtura.
292
LATIN COURSE
The long vowels are marked.
near, apud, ad; nearer, pro-
pius, adv. ; nearest, proxi-
mus; to draw near, appro-
pinqudre.
nearly, see almost.
necessary, it is, necesse est.
need : if there is any need, si
opus est; I need no slave,
servo (abl.) nihil opus est mihi,
or non egeo servo (abl.).
neglect, neglegere.
neighbour, neighbouring, flni-
timus.
never, nunquam.
nevertheless, tamen.
new, novus.
news, to bring, nuntidre ; to
get news, news came, etc.,
use nuntidre : is there any
news 1 num quid novl est ?
no news, nihil novl.
next, proximusj next day,
postrldie.
night, nox; at night, noctu;
far into the night, in mul-
tam noctem ; at nightfall, sub
noctem.
no, nullus ; no one, nemo ;
nothing, nihil: for 'and no
one,' see 41.
notice, give, edlcere.
nourish, alere.
now: 1. ( = at this time), nunc.
2. ( = by this time, already),
iam. 3. sometimes trans-
lated by autem. See 168.
number, multitude
Obey, parere, dat.
obliged : I was obliged to do
it, necesse erat mihi facer e.
obtain, nanclscl.
offer, dare.
officer : officer in command,
legdtus (the officer appointed
by the imperator to act as
his deputy or lieutenant).
officially, publice; to report
officially, write an official
letter, (litterds) publice scribere.
often, saepe, saepius, saepissime ;
as often as, quotiens ; so
often, Miens, tarn saepe.
old age, senectus, -utis.
old man, senex, senis.
once : once upon a time, quon-
dam; at once, statim, con-
festim.
one, unus; the one . . ., the
other . . ., alter . . ., alter
. . . ; one of the soldiers,
unus ex mllitibu* ; one day,
quodam die.
one's self, see self.
only, modo, solum, tantum ;
not only, non modo, non solum
(often followed by sed etiam,
but also) ; only 10 miles, non
amplius decem mllia.
open, to, aperlre ; to be open,
patere.
openly, aperte.
opinion, sententia.
opportunity, occdsio ; an op-
portunity to escape presents
itself, occdsio datur effugiendl.
oppose, resistere, dat.
or, aut, vel ; in questions an ;
ENGLISH-LATIN DICTIONARY
293
The long vowels are marked.
aut is used when one alter-
native is excluded ; vincendum
aut moriendum est, we must
either win or die.
orator, orator.
order, give orders, iubere,
imperdrr.
lubeo eum Ire ; Impero el ut eat,
ne eat. Without orders from the
commander, iniussu imperdtoris.
other : the one . . ., the
other, alter . . . alter ; others,
alii ; the others ceteri.
ought : 1. generally trans-
lated by gerund or gerundive,
see 83-89. 2. sometimes
by a genitive (see 94) : Bonl
civis est facere, a good citizen
ought to do it. 3. debeo,
oportet.
Note the tenses in ' I ought not to
have done it,' N5n debul facere,
non oportuit me facer -e (it was
my duty not to do).
ourselves, see self.
outwit, fallere.
over : all is over with me,
dctum est de me.
own : your own safety, tua
ipsius solus.
ox, bos, bovis.
Panic : throw into a panic,
perterrere; panic-stricken, per-
territus.
pardon, ignoscere, dat.
parent, parens.
Paris, Lutetia.
Parthians, Parthl ' ; adj. Par-
thicus. .
pass ( = go by), praeter-eo.
passes : mountain -passes, an-
gustiae montium.
pay, solvere.
peace, pax: to arrange a
peace, terms of peace, pdcem
constituere.
peaceful, placidits.
people, the, populm: the
Koman people, populus
Romdnus ; the senate and
people of Rome, sendtus
populusque Romdnus.
perceive, intellegere.
perhaps, fortasse.
permission, permit, see al-
low.
perpetual, sempiternus.
Persians, Persae.
person, homo.
persuade, persuddere.
1. Persuaded tibi id esse verum,
I persuade you that it is true.
2. Persuaded tibi ut maneds
(ne maneds), I persuade you to
stay (not to stay). See 10.
pirate, praedo, -Onis.
pity, misericordia.
place, locus.
plan, consilium.
Plato, Plato, -Onis.
play, a, fdbella.
plead a cause, causam dicere.
please : 1 . ( = I like, choose),
void. 2. I am pleased ( = I
rejoice), gaudeo", 3. Please
come, fac venids. See 124.
294
LATIN COURSE
The long vowels are marked.
pleasing, grains.
pleasure, voluptds, -dtis.
plot, insidiae : I make a plot
against you, msidids tibi
/acid (or paro) ; to disclose,
show up, the plot, patefacere
msidids.
plunder, I, diripio.
plunge a sword into one's
breast, gladium sibi inpectus
in-figere.
poem, carmen.
poison, to, veneno necdre.
populace, populus.
position, locus; take up a
position, considere.
possess, habed, or est mihi ;
I take possession of the camp,
potior (4) castris (abl.).
possible : as often as possible,
quam saepissime (possum) ;
as large as possible, quam
maximus.
power, potestds, -dtis; power-
ful, potens.
praetor, praetor, -oris.
praise, lauddre.
prayers, preces.
prefer, maid.
prepare, make preparations,
pardre, compardre.
To make all preparations for start-
ing, omnia pardre ad prqficl-
scendum; all preparations having
been made, omnibus rebus pardtis.
present, a, donum ; at present,
at the present time, mine.
pretend, simuldre. See 1O8.
prevent, obstdre. See 11, 12.
prey, praeda ; I leave them to
be preyed on by their enemies,
relinquo eos praedae hostibus
(I leave them as a prize to
their enemies).
prison, career, -eris ; I throw
into prison, in carcerem (or,
in vincula) conicio.
prisoner, captlvus ; to make
(a man) prisoner, capere.
proceed, pergere.
proconsul, proconsul, -ulis.
produce, gignere.
prolong, producere ; prolong a
conversation far into the
night, sermonem in multam
noctem produco.
promise, make a promise,
promittere, polliceri.
I make this one promise, id unum
polliceor ; I promise to come,
promitto me venturum.
promptly, mature.
protect : I protect him, prae-
sidio el sum ( = I am a pro-
tection to him) ; tueor eum
( = I watch over him) ; pro-
tection, praesidium.
provide for the safety of a
friend, amici saluti consulere.
province, provincia.
pull out, extrahere.
punish (him), inflict punish-
ment on (him), poend (or
supplicio) officer e (eum) (to
affect him with punishment) ;
punishment, poena, suppli-
cium.
pursue, persegul.
ENGLISH-LATIN DICTIONARY
295
The long vowels are marked.
put : put to death, interficio ;
I put myself in a perilous
position, periculo me offero.
Queen, regina.
quench, resting uere.
question : I ask him a ques-
tion, ex eo quaero (I inquire
of him) ; I question him, in-
terrogo eum (interrogdreis used
of cross -questioning a man,
asking him a lot of questions).
quickly, celeriter, snperl. celer-
rime.
quiet, I keep, quiesco.
Rajah, rex.
rampart, vallum.
ransom, to, redimere (to buy
back),
rashly, temere ; to act rashly,
adopt rash measures, temere
agere.
rather, potius ; I would rather,
mdlo.
reach, pervenire, venire.
read, legere; read aloud, recitdre.
ready (for), pardtus (ad) ; to
get ready, par are.
really, in a question may be
expressed by num. See 5.
reason, causa ; there is no
reason why we should go,
nihil causae est cur edmus
(see 157) ; what reason is
there 1 quid causae est ?
reassure (them), firmiores
facer e (evrum) animos.
receive, accipio, recipio.
recognise, agnoscere.
recommend ( = advise), ad-
monere, suddere ; admoneo te
ut eds (ne eds), suddeo tibi ut
eds (ne eds), I recommend
you to go (not to go).
recover, convalescere (emorlo).
reflect, cogitdre.
refuse, recfrsdre ; I refuse to
tell, recuso ne dicam ; I don't
refuse to tell, non recuso
quln dicam.
regard : with regard to, de.
regiment, legio, -onis.
regret : I much regret, valde
me paenitet.
rejoice, gauded.
release, liberdre.
remain, manere.
remark, dicere.
remember, meminisse, recor-
ddri. These vbs. govern gen.
of person, ace. or gen. of thing,
remove, toller e.
rend, dilanidre.
repair, reficio.
reply, respondere; ( — to write
back), rescribere.
report, nuntidre.
reserve, reservdre.
resist : I resist him, resisto ei ;
I resist an attack, impetum
sustineo.
resources, opes, pi.
rest : the rest ( = the others),
reliqui, ceterl.
The rest of the army, reliquus
exercitus ; the rest of the soldiers,
reliaul mllites.
296
LATIN COURSE
The long vowels are marked.
restrain, retinere.
I can't restrain myself from shout-
ing, retinere me non possum quln
cldmem.
result : the result was that,
ita factum est ut . . .
retain, retinere.
retire, recedere.
return: 1. (= come back),
redire, revertl. 2. (= give
back), reddere.
reverence, to, vereri.
revolt (from), be in revolt,
deficere (db] ; I revolt and
join the enemy, ad hostes
deficio.
reward, praemium.
Rhine, Rhenus.
rich, dives, -itis, dlvitior, divi-
tissimus ; to be rich (in gold),
abunddre (auro).
riches, dlvitiae.
ride : vehl (equo) (to be carried
by the horse) ; ride forward,
provehi; ride up, advehi.
right (i.e. on the right, not the
left side), dexter, dextra, dex-
trum.
rise, surgere.
risk, periculum.
river, flumen, -inis.
road, via.
rob, spolidre ; I rob him of his
clothes, veste eum spolio.
robe, vestis.
Roman, Rdmdnus.
rough, asper.
rouse, excitdre.
royal, regius.
rule, imperium ; to rule over,
imperdre, dat.
rumour, fdma.
run, currere; supplies run short,
frumentum deficit.
runaway, fugitwus.
rush, a, impetus (4).
Sad, trlstis ; sadly, use the
adjective,
safe : 1 . tutus ( = watched over,
and therefore safe). 2.
salvus (= safe and sound),
incolumis ( = unharmed).
To keep (a province) safe, preserve
it in safety, tutam servare (pro-
vinciam).
I make your position safe, tutelam
tibi paro.
safety, salus, -utis ; to provide
for the safety of a friend,
amlci salutl consulere.
sagacity, consilium.
sail, ndvigdre ; set sail, solver e
ndvem, or simply solvere.
sailor, nauta.
salvation, salus, -utis.
same, idem ; at the same time,
simul, eodem temp ore.
sand, arena.
save, servdre, conservdre.
saviour, conservator.
say, dicere, loqul. When a
negative follows negdre is
generally used : he says that
he did not do it, negat se
fecisse. Inquit ( = he says,
or, he said) is used when the
ENGLISH-LATIN DICTIONARY
297
The long vowels are marked.
actual words of the speaker
are quoted ; it follows the
first few words of the speech,
as Turn ille ndens 'Hoc vero'
inquit ' optimum.'
scarcely, vix.
Scipio, Scipio, -onis.
sea, mare; on the sea -coast,
maritirnus (adj.).
season, tempus.
secretly, in secret, clam.
security, incolumitds, -dtis.
see : 1. (with the eyes), vulfre.
2. (with the mind, under-
stand), intellegere.
seek: 1. ( = try to find, look
for), quaerere. 2. ( = try to
reach 'or obtain, make for),
petere.
seem, videri.
Not used impersonally : It seemed
to me that I was wandering, or,
as if I was wandering, vlsus
sum mihi errare (I seemed to
myself to be wandering).
seemly, it is, decet (2).
seize, occupdre.
seldom, rdro ; very seldom,
per-rdro.
self: myself, yourself, himself,
herself, itself, themselves, etc.
These words are used (1) reflexively,
(2) emphatically.
(1) Reflexive: the same person or
thing is both subject and object
of the verb : ' A praises A ' :
Me laudo, I praise myself,
Te laudas, you praise yourself,
Se laudat, he praises himself,
and in plural 7105, vos, se.
(2) Emphatic (see 47) :
Ipse vldl, I saw it myself,
Ipsl vidimus, etc.
Ipse vldistl, you saw it your-
self,
Ipse wdit, he saw it himself,
Caesar ipsc, Caesar himself,
Britannia ipsa, Britain itself.
sell, vtndere.
senate, sendtus.
send, mittere ; send a letter to
him, litterds ad eum dare ;
send over or across, trans-
mitters ; send forward, prae-
mittere ; I send for a man,
hominem ad me vocdrl iubeo
(I order the man to be sum-
moned to me).
sensible, prudens.
separate, dividere.
serious : a serious illness,
gravis morbus ; adv. graviter.
servant, ancilla.
set off or out, proficisci.
severity, severitds, -dtis.
shameless, impudens, -entis.
sheep, ovis.
shepherd, pastor, -oris.
shine, micdre.
ship, ndvis.
short, brevis.
shout, to, cldmdre; a shouting,
clamor, -oris.
show, ostendere.
Sicily, Sicilia.
sickness, morbus.
sign, signal, signum.
silent, to be, keep silence,
tacere.
| silver, argentum.
298
LATIN COURSE
The long vowels are marked.
simulate, simuldre.
since : prep., post.
conj., cum (see 68), quoniam
(see 159, 16O).
sister, soror, -oris.
sit, sit down, sedere.
size, magnitudo, -inis.
skilful, peritus.
slaughter, clddes.
slave, servus.
slavery, ser vitas, -utis.
slay, occidere, interficere, caedere.
sleep, somnus, to sleep, go to
sleep, dormlre ; in my sleep,
in somnis, or use the participle
dormiens.
slip, to, Idbij slip down, deldbi.
slow, tardus.
smile, rldere.
snore, stertere.
so : 1 . ( = accordingly), itaque,
igitur. See 168. 2. ( = to
this extent, to that degree),
tarn, ita.
Non tarn (or ita) grams est morbus
quam anted, the illness is not so
serious as befofe.
Socrates, Socrates, -is.
soldier, miles, -itis.
some, see 43, 44 : some time
( = for a good long time), ali-
quamdiu.
son, filius.
soon, mox, brevi ; very soon,
per-brevi; as soon as, sii
atque.
sorrow, Indus (4).
soul, animus.
Spain, Hispdnia.
spare, parcere (dat.).
speak, loqul, dicere.
specially, maxime.
speechless: he is speechless
with astonishment, admzrdtus
stupet.
speedily, celeriter ; as speedily
as possible, quam celerrime ;
with all speed, omni celeritdte.
spend (time), consumere.
spirit, animus; to break the
spirit of the citizens, frangere
clvium animos.
spoil, spolium.
stablish, staUUre.
stain, tingere.
stand, stare ; stand still, con-
sistere ; to stand in the way
of another, obstdre alterl
(followed by quo minus, see
12).
start, proficisci.
state, civitds, res puUica.
stationed, to be, consedisse (to
have settled).
statue, statua.
stay : stay behind, remain,
manere ; make a stay, com-
mordrl.
steal, aufero.
step in, ingredior ; step out,
egredior.
still: 1. ( = nevertheless, all
the same), tamen. 2. ( = even
now), etiam nunc.
stone, lapis, -idis.
storm, tempestds, -dtis.
strike, strike down, ferlre.
ENGLISH-LATIN DICTIONARY
299
The lona vowels are marked.
strong-, firmus.
subject, matter, res.
successfully, fellciter.
such: 1. ( = of such a kind),
tdlis. 2. ( = of such size), such
great, such a large, tantus. 3.
such a long letter, tarn longa
epistula.
suddenly, all of a sudden,
repente, subito.
suffer, patior, perpetior ; he
suffered ( = allowed) me to
do it, id mefacere passus est.
suicide, to commit, sud se
manii inter jicere.
suitable, idoneus ; suitable
for every season, idoneus ad
omne tempus.
sultan, rex.
sum (of money), pecunia.
summer, aestds, -dtis.
summon (to my presence),
voco (ad me).
sun, sol.
sunlight, in the, in sole.
sunset, solis occdsus (4).
supper, cena; to have supper,
cendre.
suppliant, supplex, -ids ; he
approaches as a suppliant,
in suppliant fashion, supplex
adit.
supplies, frumentum (corn),
cibus.
support, siibsidium ; I come
to your support, subsidio tibi
venio.
suppose, putdre, exlstimdre.
supremacy : to acknowledge
British supremacy, popullBri-
tannicl imperio obtemperdre.
surprised, to be, admlrdrl.
surrender, to : 1 . ( = to give
a thing up), dedere. 2. ( =
to give themselves up), se
dedere. a surrender, a giving
up, deditio.
surround, circumdare.
suspicion, susplcio ; a strong
suspicion, magna susplcio; I
arouse suspicion, suspicionem
moveo.
swift, celer.
sword, gladius.
Syracuse, Syrdciisae.
Take, capio : ( = lead), ducere ;
I take his life, mtam el
eripid ; I take on board ship,
in ndvem impono.
tale, to tell a, ndrrdre.
talk, to, loqui ; to talk to a
friend, colloqul cum amlco.
teach, docere.
teacher, magister.
tear, to (something) away
from, dlvellere (aliquid) ab
. . . ; tear in pieces, dllanidre.
tear, a, lacrima ; to shed tears,
flere, lacrimdre.
tell : 1. died, nuntio, certiorem
te faciot nego, scribo, ndrro.
2. iubeo.
temple, templum.
Terence, Terentius.
terrify, perterrere.
territory, fines pi. ( = bound-
aries).
300
LATIN COURSE
The long vowels are marked.
terror : in terror, use a par-
ticiple.
than, quam : in negative sen-
tences use the abl. without
quam.
1. Dlligentior est quam Polybius.
2. Polybium sequamur quo nemo
fuit dlligentior.
thank : I thank him (warmly),
(maximds) grdtids el ago.
themselves, see self.
then: 1. ( = at that time),
turn ; then but not before,
turn vero (then indeed, then
of a truth). 2. ( = after that,
thereupon), deint delude. 3.
( = therefore), igitur (placed
after the first word or two
of its sentence).
there, ibi.
therefore, igitur (not placed
first in the sentence).
Thessaly, Thessalia.
think, putdre, arbitrary existi-
mdre ; I think of going to
Home, Romam Ire cogito ;
what do you think ? what
is your opinion 1 quid sentis ?
thirst, sitis, ace. sitim.
though, etsi (even if, used
like si with indicative and
subjunctive, see 115-19) ;
cum with subj., see 68 ;
sometimes translated by par-
ticiple, see 77.
threaten, I, or, keep on
threatening, minor (1), mini-
tor (1) ;
I threaten him with punishment,
supplicium el minor.
I threaten to tell all, minitor me
omnia dicturum.
danger threatens the city, impen-
det urbi periculum.
throne ( = kingdom), regnum.
through, per, ace.
throw, iacio (3), conicio ;
throw aside, abicio ; I throw
down my arms at your feet,
arma ad pedes tibi abicio.
thunderbolt, fulmen, -inis.
thus, ita, sic.
\ till, see 64.
time, tempus ; at that time,
turn.
timid, timidus.
tired, fessus.
to-day, hodie.
tomb, sepulcrum.
to-morrow, eras.
too: 1. (=also), see also.
2. ( = excessively, too much),
nimis ; too often, nimis saepe.
touch, tangere.
towards, ad.
town, oppidum, urbs ; towns-
people, oppidani.
track, vestigium (use the plur.).
trade, to pursue, negdtidri ;
in pursuit of trade, negotiandi
causa.
traveller, viator.
treacherous : treachery, in-
sidiae ; to act treacherously,
insidiis agere ; to adopt no
treacherous measures, nihil
agere.
ENGLISH-LATIN DICTIONARY
301
The long vowels are marked.
treason, proditio.
treaty, foedus, -eris.
tree, arbor, -oris.
trial : to make trial (try the
experiment), experlrl ; with-
out trial (without having
one's case tried), indicia
causa (the cause not having
been pleaded).
tribune, tribilnus.
trouble, a, malum: some
trouble, aliquid mail; to
trouble one's self, labordre ; I
don't trouble myself as to
what you do, quid tu facias
nan Idboro.
troublesome, molestus.
trust : I trust him, jldem habed
el, credo el ; he is not to be
trusted, not particularly
trustworthy, non credendum
est el, minor fides el habenda
est.
truth, the : use the adj. verus,
true.
try, condri, with inf.
turn, I (intransitive), me verto,
convertor ; I turn away
(intr.), dvertor ; to be turned
into, become, fieri (see 4).
tyrant, tyrannus.
Unarmed, inermis.
uncertain, incertus.
uncle, avunculus.
under, sub : 1 . sub arborem
fugit ; 2. sub arbor e sedet.
understand, intellegere.
unexpected, improvlsus (un-
foreseen) ; unexpectedly, im-
provlso.
unfriendly, inimlcus.
ungrateful, ingratus.
unharmed, incolumis.
unheard of, inaudltus.
unjust, inlquus.
unless, nisi.
unwilling1, I am, nolo : he
did it unwillingly, invltus
(adj.) fecit ; she did- it un-
willingly, invlta fecit.
urge, hortdri, cohortdrl. See 1O.
use : make use of, utor, abl. ;
he used to say, dicebat or
dlcere solebat.
useful, utilis.
Valour, virtus, -utis.
vengeance, to take, ulclscl ;
to take vengeance for an act
of injustice, ulclscl iniuriam ;
without taking vengeance,
inultus, -a, -um.
very : very great, permagnus ;
very short, perbrevis ; on this
very night, hdc ipsd node.
victory, victoria.
vigilance, viyilantia.
villa, villa.
virtue, virtus, -utis.
virtuous, honestus.
visit, vlsere.
voice, vox, vocis.
voluntarily, ultro.
voyage : I have a prosperous
voyage, prospere ndvigo ; I
have a troublesome voyage,
incommode ndvigo.
302
LATIN COURSE
The long vowels are marked.
Wage war, helium gerere.
wait, exspectdre.
He waited for them, exspectdvit
eos ; he waited for them to
arrive, exspectdvit dum vemrent.
See 64.
walk about, take a walk,
ambuldre.
wall, paries, -etis, m.
wander about, errdre.
want, void ; to be wanting
(lacking), de-esse.
war, bellum.
warm, tepens.
warn, moneo, admoneo.
1. I warn you that he is near,
Moneo te eum adesse.
2. I warn you to go (not to go),
Moneo te ut eds (ne eds).
3. I warn you what to avoid,
Moneo te quid sit vitandum.
•waste, lay waste, vdstdre.
watch over, tueri.
watchman, Gustos, -odis.
water, aqua.
way : to make one's way, iter
facere; to give way, cedere.
wealth, dwitiae.
weapon, telum; without wea-
pons, say 'unarmed.'
weather, tempestds ; good
weather for . . ., tempestds
idonea ad . . . ; the weather
is violent, mayna est vis
tempestdtis.
weep, weep over, flere.
weight, pondus, -eris.
welcome, grdtus.
well, bene; to be well, keep
well, valere.
what, see 36-9, 5O.
•whatever, see 45, 54.
when, whence, see 36, 37 ;
as to moods and tenses with
cum, see 65-72.
whenever, see 54.
where, see 36, 37.
wherefore, qua re.
wherever, see 54.
whether, in indirect questions,
see 6.
while : translated by parti-
ciple (see 77), or by dum
(see 62, 63), sometimes by
autem (see note to Ex. 48) ;
for a long while, diu (see
58)
whither, see 36, 37.
who, which, see 36, 37.
•whole, totus.
why, see 36, 37.
wickedness, scelus, -eris.
wife, uxor.
wild beast, fera (from adj.
ferus, wild ; bestia is under-
stood).
willing : use void ; not willing,
use nolo.
win ( = conquer), vincere ;
win ( = attain) fame, gloriam
consequi.
wind, ventus.
With the wind in my favour,
secundo vento ; with the wind
all in my favour, secundissimo
vento; with the wind against
me, adverso vento.
window, fenestra.
winter, hiems, -emis ; winter-
ENGLISH-LATIN DICTIONARY
303
TJie long vowels are marked.
quarters, hlberna (castra) ;
to winter, hiemdre.
wise, sapiens.
wish, void; not to wish, nolo ;
wish for, volo, cupio.
•with ( = in company with),
cum; to stay with (i.e. in
the house of) a friend, apud
amlcum commordrl.
withdraw (an army from),
deducere (exercitum de).
within a few days, etc., see
Section 1.
without, sine, abl.
withstand : we can with-
stand any force (however
great), quantdsvls copids sus-
tinere possumus.
witness, testis ; call a witness,
testem prodiicere.
woman, mulier, -eris, femina ;
the women and children,
mulieres liberl-que.
wonder, mlrdrl.
wondrous, mlrdMlis, mlrus.
wont : it is my wont to do it,
id facere consuevz (pf. of con-
suescere, to grow accustomed).
wool, Idna ; woollen, Idneus.
word, verbum.
worthy, dignus : he is worthy
to rule over us, see 158.
would: he would not do it,
i.e. he was not willing, use
nolo.
wound, a, vulnus, -eris; to
wound, vulnerdre.
wretched, miser; poor wretch,
homo miserrimus.
write, scribere (ad amlcum}.
writer, scrlptor.
wrong, a, iniuria ; to do a
wrong to him, committere
iniuriam in eum ; to be
wronged by them, accipere
iniurias ab els; the wrongs
done by the Helvetii to the
Roman people, Helvetlorum
iniuriae popull Eomdnl.
Xenophon, Xenophon, -ontis.
Year, annus.
yesterday, herl.
yet (nevertheless), tamen ; as
yet, adhuc (hitherto) ; not
yet, adhuc non.
yield, cedere.
young man, adulescens.
yourself, see self,
youth, youthful, iuvenis ;
youthfulness, iuventus, -utis.
Zeal, studium.
IEEEGULAE YEEBS1
The long vowels are marked.
Ab-icio (IACIO), -ere, -ieci, -iec-
tum.
ab-ripio (RAPID), -ere, -ripul,
-reptum.
ac-cido (CADO), -ere, -cidi.
ac-cipio (CAPIO), -ere, -cepi, -cep-
tum.
ad-imo (EMO), -ere, -emi, -emp-
tum.
ad-iuvo, -are, -iuvi, -iutum.
ad-orior, -orm, -ortus sum.
af-fero or ad-fero, -ferre, at-tuli,
al-latum.
af-ficio (FACIO), -ere, -fed, -fec-
-tum.
a-gnosco ((G)NOSCO), -ere, a-gnovi,
a-guitum (agnoturus).
ago, -ere, eg!, actum.
alo, -ere, alui, altum.
a-perio, -ire, aperui, apertum.
a-scendo (SCANDO), -ere, -I, -scen-
sum.
a-spicio, -ere, a-spexi, a-spectum.
audeo, -ere, ausus sum.
audio, -ire, -ivi, -itum.
au-fero, -ferre, abs-tuli, ab-
latum.
Bibo, -ere, bibi.
Cado, -ere, cecidl, casum.
caedo, -ere, cecidi, caesum.
capici, -ere, cepi, captum.
Compounds like accipio.
cedo, -ere, cessi, cessum.
circum-do, -dare, -dedi, -datum,
claudo, -ere, clausi, clausum.
Compounds like include,
co-gnosco, -ere, -gndvi, -gnitum.
co-go (AGO), -ere, co-egi, co-
actum.
col-ligo (LEGO), -ere, -legl, -lec-
tuin.
com-perio (PARIO), -Ire, com-
perl, com-pertum.
coin-plector, -I, com-plexus.
com-pleo, -ere, -evi, -etimi.
com-primo (PREMO), -ere, -press!,
-pressum.
con-icio (IACIO), -ere, -ieci, -iec-
tum.
con-scendo (SCANDO), -ere,
-scendi, -scensum.
con-sldo, -ere, consedi, conses-
sum.
1 In drawing up this list I have found the alphabetical list in
Gildersleeve and Lodge helpful.
LATIN COURSE
305
The long vowels are marked.
con-sisto, -ere, constiti, consti-
tuin.
con-spicio, -ere, -spexi, -spec-
turn.
con-stituo (STATUO), -ere, -in,
-stitutum.
con-suesco, -ere, -suevi, -suetum.
con-sulo, -ere, consului, -sultum.
con-temno, -ere, -tempsl, -temp-
turn.
con-tendo, -ere, -tendi, -tentuni.
con-valesco, -ere, -valui.
credo, -ere, -didi, -ditum.
cresco, -ere, crevi, cretum.
cupio, -ere, cuplvi, cupltum.
curro, -ere, cucurri, cursum.
De-do, -ere, dedidi, deditum.
de-icio (IACIO), -ere, -ieci, -iec-
tum.
de-fendo, -ere, -fendl, -fensum.
deleo, -ere, delevi, deletum.
de-scendo (SCANDO), -ere, -scendi,
-scensum.
de-sero, -ere, -semi, -sertum.
de-silio (SALIO), -ire, -ui.
de-sino, -ere, desii or deslvi, desi-
tum.
de-sisto, -ere, -stitT, -stitum.
de-spicio, -ere, -spexl, -spectum.
dico, -ere, dixT, -dictum,
di-gredior (GRADIOR), -I, -gressus
sum.
di-ligo, -ere, -lexi, -lectum.
disco, -ere, didicL
dlvido, ere, divisi, divisum.
do, dare, dedl, datum,
doceo, -ere, docui, doctum.
duco, -ere, duxi, ductum.
E-lig5 (LEGO), -ere, -legi, -lec-
tum.
emo, -ere, emi, emptum.
eo, ire, ivi (iT), itum (eo, Is, it,
inms, itis, eunt ; ibo ; ibam ;
earn ; irem ; 1 ; iens, euntis ;
eundum).
ex-pello, -ere, -pull, -pulsum.
expergiscor, -I, experrectus sum.
ex-perior, -iri, -pertus sum.
ex-stinguo, -ere, -stinxT, -stinc-
tum.
Facio, -ere, feci, factum.
Compounds like afficio.
fallo, -ere, fefelli, falsum.
fateor, -eri, fassus sum.
ferio, -ire, percuss!, percussum.
fero, ferre, tuli, latum.
figo, -ere, fix!, fixum.
fio, fieri, factus sum.
fleo, -ere, flevi, fletum.
fluo, -ere, flux!,
frango, -ere, fregl, fractum.
fruor, -I, fructus sum.
fugio, -ere, fugT.
Gaudeo, -ere, gavisus sum.
gero, -ere, gessi, gestum.
gigno, -ere, genui, genitum.
gradior, -I, gressus sum.
Compounds like digredior.
lacio, -ere, ieci, iactum.
Compounds like abicio.
i-gnosco, -ere, -gnovT, -gnotum
in-cendo, -ere, -cendl, -censum.
in-cludo (CLAUDO), -ere, -cliisi,
clusum.
306
LATIN COURSE
The long vowels are marked.
intel-lego, -ere, -lexi, -lectum.
inter-imo (EMO), -ere, -emi,
-emptum.
irascor, -I, iratus sum.
iubeo, -ere, iussi, iussum.
oc-cido (CADO), -ere, -cidT, -ca-
sum.
oc-cido (CAEDO), -ere, -cidi, -cisum.
of-fero, -ferre, obtull, oblatuin.
orior, -iri, ortus sum (oriturus).
iungo, -ere, iunxi, ifmctum. ! os-tendo, -ere, -tend!, -tensum.
Labor, -1, lapsus sum.
laedo, -ere, laesi, laesum.
lavo, -are, lavi, lautum.
lego, -ere, legl, lectum.
loquor, -i, locutus sum.
Malo, malle, malui (malo,
mavis, mavult, malumus,
mavultis, malunt ; malam ;
malebam ; malim ; mallern).
maneo, -ere, mansi, mansum.
metuo, -ere, metul.
mico, -are, -ui.
mitto, -ere, mm, missum.
morior, mori, mortuus sum
(moritvirus).
moveo, -ere, movi, motum.
Nanciscor, -I, nactus.
nascor, -1, natus sum.
neg-legd, -ere, -lexl, -lectum.
nolo, n5lle, nolul (nol5, non
vis, non vult, nolumus, non
vultis, nolunt ; nolam ; nole-
bam ; nolim ; nollem ; noli).
nosco, -ere, novi, notum.
nubo, -ere, nupsl, nuptum.
Oblivlscor, -I, oblitus sum.
ob-sideo (SEDEO), -ere, -sedl,
-sessum.
ob-sto, -stare, -stiti (obstaturus).
Parco, -ere, peperci.
pasco, -ere, pavi, pastum.
pate-facio, -ere, -feel, -factum.
patior, -i, passus sum.
pello, -ere, pepuli, pulsum.
per-do, -ere, -did!, -ditum.
per-eo, -ire, peril, -itum.
pergo (REGO), -ere, perrexi, per-
rectum.
per-petior (PATIOR), -T, per-pes-
sus sum.
peto, -ere, -ivi (-ii), -itum.
I pono, -ere, posul, positum.
pos-sum, posse, potui.
premo, -ere, press!, pressum.
Compounds like comprimo.
pro-do, -ere, -didi, -ditum.
pro-ficlscor, -I, profectus sum.
Quaero, -ere, quaesivi, quaesi-
tum.
queror, queri, questus sum.
quiesco, -ere, quievi, quietum.
Rapio, -ere, rapui, raptum.
Compounds like abripi5.
re-cumbo, -ere, -cubul.
red-do, -ere, -didi, -ditum.
red-imo, -ere, -emi, -emptum.
re-icio (IACIO), -ere, -ieci, -iec-
tum.
re-linquo, -ere, -Hqui, -lictum.
IRREGULAR VERBS
307
The long vowels are marked.
re-perio, -ire, repperl, repertum.
re-sisto, -ere, -stiti, -stitum.
re-spicio, -ere, -spexl, -spectum.
re-spondeo, -ere, -spondl, -spon-
sura.
re-stinguo, -ere, -stinxl, -stinc-
tum.
lideo, -ere, rlsl, rlsum.
rumpo, -ere, rupl, rupttim.
Scindo, -ere, scidi, scissum.
scrlbo, -ere, scrips!, scrip turn.
sedeo, -ere, sedl, sessum.
sentio, -Ire, sensi, sensum.
sequor, -i, secutus sum.
soleo, -ere, solitus sum.
solvo, -ere, solvi, solutum.
statuo, -ere, statui, statutum.
Compounds like constituo.
sto, stare, steti, statum.
Compounds like obsto.
string5, -ere, strinxi, strictum.
suadeo, -ere, suasJ, suasum.
sumo (EMO), -ere, sfimpsT, sump-
turn.
surge (REGO), -ere, surrexl, sur-
rectum.
sus-tineo (TENEO), -ere, -tinui,
-tentum.
Tango, -ere, tetigi, tactum.
teneo, -ere, tenui, tentum.
Compounds like sustineo.
ting(u)o, -ere, tinxi, tinctum.
tollo, -ere, sustulT, sublatum.
trado, -ere, -didT, -ditum.
traho, -ere, traxT, tractum.
Ulciscor, -I, ultus sum.
utor, -I, usus sum.
Velio, -ere, vexl, vectum.
vello, -ere, veil!, vulsum.
ven-do, -ere, -did!, -ditum.
venio, -Ire, veni, ventum.
verto, -ere, verti, versum.
veto, -are, vetui, vetitum.
video, -ere, vidi, visum.
vincio, -Ire, vinxl, vinctum.
vinco, -ere, vici, vlctum.
vlso, -ere, visl.
vivo, -ere, vlxl, vlctum.
volo, velle, volui (volo, vis,
vult, volumus, vultis, volunt ;
volam ; volebam ; velim ;
vellem).
voveo, -ere, vovi, votum.
NUMEKALS
The long vowels are marked.
Cardinal.
Ordinal,
I unus, -a, -um
primus
ii duo, duae, duo
secundus
in tres, tria
tertius
IV quattuor
quartus
V quinque
qulntus
VI sex
sextus
vii septem
Septimus
VIII OCto
octavus
ix novem
nonus.
x decem
decimus
xi undecim
undecimus
XII duodecim
duodecimus
xni tredecim
tertius decimus
xiv quattuordecim
quartus decimus
xv qulndecim
qulntus decimus
xvi sedecim
sextus decimus
xvn septendecim
Septimus decimus
xvni duodeviginti
duodevlcesimus
xix undevlgint!
undevicesimus
xx vlgintl
vicesimus
xxi vlgintl unus
vlcesimus primus
NUMERALS
309
TJie long vowels are marked.
Cardinal.
xxii vlginti duo
xxvin duodetrlginta
xxix undetrlginta
xxx trlginta
XL quadraginta
L qulnquaginta
LX sexaginta
LXX septuaginta
LXXX octoginta
xc nonaginta
c centum
cc ducentl, -ae, -a
ccc trecent!
cccc quadringenti
D qulngent!
DC sescentl
DCC septingenti
DCCC octingenti
DCCCC nongenti
M mille
MM duo milia
Ordinal.
vicesimus secundus
duodetrlcesimus
undetrlcesimus
tricesimus
quadragesimus
qulnquagesimus
sexagesimus
septuagesimus
octogesimus
nonagesimus
centesimus
ducentesimus
trecentesimus
qnadringentesimus
qulngentesimus
sescentesimus
septingentesimus
octingentesimus
nongentesimus
millesimus
bis millesimus
ilnus is like bonus, but has gen. unlus, dat. unl.
duo . duae duo tres tria
duo and duos duas duo trium
duorum duarum duorum tribus
duobus duabus duobus
ducentl, trecenti, etc., are like bonus, but have gen.
pi. ducentum, trecentum, etc.
310 LATIN COURSE
The long vowels are marked.
Mllle is used as an indeclinable adjective in the
singular, as a substantive in the plural :
Mllle virl, mllle viros, one thousand men.
Tria milia virorum, ex tribus milibus virorum, 3000
men.
He is a mile away, Mllle passus abest.
He is five miles away, Qulnque milia passuum
abest.
For the Calendar, see 163 to 167 (pp. 181-183).
THE END
Printed fy R. & R. CLARK, LIMITED, EdintntrgJt
WORKS ON LATIN GRAMMAR AND COMPOSITION.
GRAMMAR.
First Latin Grammar. By M. C. MACMILLAN, M.A. Fcap. 8vo. Is. 6d.
An Elementary Latin Grammar. By H. J. ROBY, M.A., and Professor
A. S. WILKINS, LittD. Globe 8vo. 2s. 6d.
School Latin Grammar. By H. J. ROBY, M.A. Crown 8vo. 5s.
Exercises on Latin Syntax and Idiom. Arranged with reference to
Roby's School Latin Grammar. By E. B. ENGLAND, Litt.D.
Crown 8vo. 2s. 6d. KEY, for Teachers only. 2s. 6d. net.
Latin Grammar. By Professor B. L. GILDERSLEEVE and GONZALEZ
LODGE. Third Edition. Crown 8vo. 6s.
A Grammar of the Latin Language, from Plautus to Suetonius. By
H. J. ROBY, M.A. Part I. Sounds, Inflections, Word- formation,
Appendices. Crown 8vo. 9s. Part II. Syntax, Prepositions, etc
10s. 6d.
TRANSLATION.
Macmillan's Latin Reader. A Latin Reader for the Lower Forms in
Schools. By H. J. HARDY, M.A. Globe 8vo. 2s. 6d.
Exercises in Unseen Translation in Latin. By the Same. Pott 8vo.
Is. 6d.
Latin Passages for Translation. For the use of Higher Forms in
Schools and of Students working for Pass Degrees. Selected by
M. ALFORD. Globe 8vo. 3s.
PROSE COMPOSITION.
Macmillan's Latin Course : —
FIRST PART. By A. M. COOK, M.A., Assistant Master at St.
Paul's School. Globe 8vo. 3s. 6d.
SECOND PART. By A. M. COOK, M. A., and W. E. P. PANTIN, M.A.
New and Enlarged Edition. Globe 8vo. 4s. 6d.
THIRD PART. By W. E. P. PANTIN, M.A. Globe 8vo. 3s. 6d.
KEY, for Teachers only. Globe 8vo. 4s. 6d. net.
Macmillan's Shorter Latin Course :—
FIRST PART. By A. M. COOK, M.A. Globe 8vo. Is. 6d. KEY,
for Teachers only. 4s. 6d. net.
SECOND PART. By A. M. COOK, M.A., and W. E. P. PANTIN,
M.A. Globe 8vo. 2s. KEY, for Teachers only. 4s. 6d. net.
The Third Part of the LATIN COURSE is also intended to form
the concluding volume of the SHORTER LATIN COURSE.
Latin Accidence and Exercises, arranged for Beginners. By W.
WELCH and C. G. DUFFIELD. Pott 8vo. Is. 6<1.
Short Exercises in Latin Prose Composition and Examination
Papers in Latin Grammar. By Rev. H. BELCHER, LL.D.
PART I. Pott 8vo. Is. 6d. KEY, for Teachers only. Pott 8vo.
3s. 6d. net.
PART II. On the Syntax of Sentences, with an Appendix, including
Exercises in Latin Idioms, etc. Pott 8vo. 2s. KEY, for Teachers
only. Pott 8vo. 3s. net.
MACMILLAN AND CO., LTD., LONDON.
WORKS ON LATIH GRAMMAR AND COMPOSITION.
PROSE COMPOSITION— continued.
Sermo Latinus. A Short Guide to Latin Prose Composition. By
Prof. J. P. POSTGATE, LittD. Globe 8vo. 2s. 6d. KEY to
' ' Selected Passages. " Globe 8 vo. 4s. 6d. net.
First Steps to Latin Prose Composition. By Rev. G. RUST, M.A.
Pott 8vo. Is. 6d. KEY, for Teachers only. By W. M. YATES.
Pott 8vo. 3s. 6d. net.
Latin Prose after the best Authors : Caesarian Prose. By F. P.
SIMPSON, B. A. Extra fcap. 8vo. 2s. 6d. KEY, for Teachers only.
Globe 8vo. 5s. net.
Latin Prose Exercises based upon Caesar's Gallic War. With a
Classification of Caesar's Chief Phrases and Grammatical Notes on
Caesar's Usages. By CLEMENT BRYANS, M.A. Globe 8vo. 2s. 6d.
KEY, for Teachers only. Globe 8vo. 4s. 6d. net.
Hints towards Latin Prose Composition. By A. W. POTTS, M.A.,
LL.D., late Fellow of St. John's College, Cambridge. Extra fcap.
8vo. 3s.
Passages for Translation into Latin Prose. Edited with Notes
and References to the above. By the Same. Extra fcap. 8vo.
2s. 6d. KEY, for Teachers only. 4s. 6d. net.
Latin Phrase Book. By C. MEISSNER. Translated by H. W. AUDEN,
M.A. Globe 8vo. 4s. 6d.
VERSE COMPOSITION.
Latin Elegiacs and Prosody Rhymes for Beginners. By C. H.
ST. L. RUSSELL, M.A. Globe 8vo. Is. 6d.
A First Latin Verse Book. By W. E. P. PANTIN, M.A. Globe 8vo.
Is. 6d. KEY, for Teachers only. 4s. net.
An Introduction to Latin Elegiac Verse Composition. By J. H.
LUPTON, Sur-Master of St. Paul's School. Globe 8vo. 2s. 6d. KEY
TO PART II. (XXV.-C.). Globe 8vo. 3s. 6d. net.
An Introduction to Latin Lyric Verse Composition. By the Same.
Globe 8 vo. 3s. KEY, for Teachers only. Globe 8 vo. 4s.6d.net.
Exercises in Latin Verse of Various Kinds. By Rev. G. PRESTON.
Globe 8vo. 2s. 6d. KEY, for Teachers only. Globe 8vo. 5s.net.
DICTIONARIES, etc.
Macmillan's Elementary Latin-English Dictionary. By Rev. G.
H. NALL, M.A. 3s. 6d.
English-Latin and Latin-English Dictionaries. By Prof. C. D.
YONGE. Each sold separately, 3s. 6d. ; or complete, 7s. 6d.
The Student's Companion to Latin Authors. By GEORGE
MIDDLETON, M.A., and THOMAS R. MILLS, M.A. Crown 8vo. 6s.
A Short Manual of Comparative Philology for Classical
Students. By P. GILES, M.A. Second Edition. Crown 8vo. 14s.
MACMILLAN AND CO., LTD., LONDON.
THIS BOOK IS DUE ON THE LAST DATE
STAMPED BELOW
AN INITIAL FINE OF 25 CENTS
WILL BE ASSESSED FOR FAILURE TO RETURN
THIS BOOK ON THE DATE DUE. THE PENALTY
WILL INCREASE TO 5O CENTS ON THE FOURTH
DAY AND TO $1.OO ON THE SEVENTH DAY
OVERDUE.
SEP 241934
jlAfo
T*
W^R9
YB 41224
66
UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY
Live Music Archive
Librivox Free Audio
Metropolitan Museum
Cleveland Museum of Art
Internet Arcade
Console Living Room
Books to Borrow
Open Library
TV News
Understanding 9/11